Eq8 Reference Manual PDF

EQ8
REFERENCE MANUAL
User Index of Features and Functions for EQ8 Software
The Electric Quilt® Company

Bowling Green, OH 43402
www.ElectricQuilt.com
EQ8 Reference Manual
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
EQ8, including without limitation the software’s source code, object code, instructions, graphics, and other components (collectively the
“Software”), is provided to you under license.
COPYRIGHT: The Software is copyrighted 1991-2017 by The Electric Quilt Company.
NOTICE OF RIGHTS: All rights reserved.
No part of this software or its documentation may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronically, photocopied,
recorded, translated into a machine language, or otherwise, without the written permission of the publisher.
You may not sell or distribute collections or individual block designs from the EQ8 Block Library. You may not use EQ8 library blocks or other
library designs in any commercial application, including software. For rights clearance, please contact The Electric Quilt Company by email
customerservice@electricquilt.com or by phone 419-352-1134 Monday-Friday, 9:00am-5:00pm Eastern.
NOTICE OF TRADEMARKS: Windows® and Microsoft® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Mac® is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc. Electric Quilt® is a registered trademark of The Electric Quilt Company. Many titles used by manufacturers and sellers to
distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks. Where The Electric Quilt Company was aware of these trademarks, the trademark
symbol was printed beside the trademarked title or product name.
GRANT OF LICENSE: This Software is protected by United States Copyright law and by International Treaty. Any use of the Software in
violation of these laws terminates the license and can be prosecuted. This Software is licensed, not sold.
The Electric Quilt Company grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to EQ8. By your installation and use of this Software you
acknowledge that you have read this agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions.
You agree not to engage in, nor to permit, the decompilation, disassembly, attempt to discover the source code, or other reverse
engineering of the Software.
You may not lend, lease, rent, sublicense, or otherwise distribute any portion of this Software. It is software piracy to do so and the licensee
and others involved in the piracy can be prosecuted.
WARRANTY: The Software is licensed “as is” and without any express or implied warranties whatsoever. Because of the diversity of hardware
and conditions under which this Software may be used, no warranty of fitness for a particular purpose is offered. The user must assume the
entire risk of using the Software. Any liability of seller or manufacturer will be limited to product replacement or refund of purchase price.
The Electric Quilt Company does not guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of use of the Software or any
related content or information in terms of its correctness, accuracy, reliability, currentness, completeness or otherwise. The entire risk as to
the results and performance of the Software or related content or information is assumed by you.
Software Credits
Portions of this software were created using LEADTOOLS ©1991-2011. LEAD Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Software Programmer: Dean Neumann
Development and Production: Jacob Fox, Ann Rutter, Sara Seuberling, Matthew Sigley
Content Creation: Christine Kohler, Heidi Kory, Jenny Novinsky, Penny McMorris, Angie Padilla, Sindy Rodenmayer
Book Credits
Book Writer: Diane McEwen-Martin
Book Cover and Design: Sara Seuberling
Book Layout and Editor: Jenny Novinsky
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction
Introduction..........................................................................................................5
Chapters
Chapter 1: Projects and the Project Sketchbook................................................13
Chapter 2: Quilt Layouts.....................................................................................35
Chapter 3: Borders.............................................................................................59
Chapter 4: Design Quilts with Blocks, Photos, and Embroidery.........................71
Chapter 5: Design with Fabrics, Colors, and Thread...........................................95
Chapter 6: Drawing Blocks................................................................................119
Chapter 7: Working with Photos and Fabric Images........................................171
Chapter 8: Libraries..........................................................................................197
Chapter 9: Printing...........................................................................................213
Chapter 10: Exporting......................................................................................237
Index
Index.................................................................................................................243
Keyboard Shortcuts..........................................................................................249
Toolbars............................................................................................................250
More Copyright Information
COPYRIGHT:
The software is copyrighted 1991-2017 by The Electric Quilt Company.
The reference manual is copyrighted 1991-2017 by The Electric Quilt Company.
COPYRIGHT OF DESIGNS:
If you have a question about copyright, contact us.
When making or publishing a pattern, you do not need to mention that the pattern was made in EQ8 (we love it if you do, of course).
Blocks You Draw: Any blocks you design (without copying a design from existing copyrighted quilt blocks) are yours to copyright.
Blocks from the Library: Blocks from the EQ8 Libraries (Libraries 01-10) are copyright-free when used in your designs. You may not distribute
or sell collections of block designs from EQ8, or use EQ8 library blocks or other designs in any commercial application including software.
Blocks from Linked Libraries: Our other products link to EQ8. Blocks outside the libraries that come with EQ8 may be copyrighted. Many of
these blocks are clearly marked in the notecard. If you have linked other EQ products, please check where the block patterns came from
before publishing your design.
Quilts You Design: Any quilts you design (without copying an existing copyrighted quilt design) are yours to copyright.
Fabrics, Embroidery and Thread: The fabrics, threads and embroidery designs that appear in the libraries appear by permission of their
manufacturers. All these designs are copyrighted by their respective manufacturers.
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to Electric Quilt 8!
This user-friendly software will help you design quilts and blocks,
color with real fabrics, print patterns, and so much more.
Opening EQ8........................................................................................................6
EQ8 Worktables....................................................................................................7
Open Library.........................................................................................................7
Workspace Diagram.............................................................................................8
Choosing Inches or Centimeters.........................................................................10
Restoring Default Settings..................................................................................10
Creating Your Own Default Project.....................................................................11
Getting Help.......................................................................................................12
Downloading and Installing................................................................................12
Activating EQ8....................................................................................................12
OPENING EQ8
When you first open EQ8, the GET STARTED section of the Home Screen is your landing page, giving you options of how you
can begin designing, and a Tip of the Day. You can use the navigation on the left to find help quickly (click LEARN), product
details, and contact information for EQ. You can always return to this screen by clicking the Home Screen button in the top-left
corner.
If you’re not sure what to do to begin, EQ8 gives you suggestions under 3 headings.
Home Screen
button
Home Screen
navigation
Tip of the Day
DESIGN QUILTS
Design a quilt from scratch: Start a new quilt design on the Quilt Worktable. This does not start a new project, only a new,
blank quilt.
Start with a Quick Quilt project: Open and work with a pre-designed project. These projects have several quilts, blocks, and
fabrics pre-loaded based on a theme, such as Log Cabin quilts.
Open an existing project: Open and work with an EQ8 project that you previously created. This will offer a list of projects
stored in the My EQ8 > Projects directory, but you can always navigate to find any EQ8 project on your computer (see page
17).
DRAW BLOCKS
Design a block from scratch: Start a new block design on the Block Worktable, whether it be pieced, applique, or a
combination. This does not start a new project, only a new, blank block.
Search for block patterns: Open the Block Library to find pre-drawn blocks to print patterns, design with, and/or edit to make
your own.
WORK WITH FABRICS

Import and edit fabric images: Scan or take a photo of your own fabric, then import it into EQ to see it in your quilt design.
Search fabric swatches: Open the Fabric Library to find a large variety of pre-loaded fabric to use in your project.
All computers and monitors vary, so what you see on screen may be slightly different than the illustrations in this book.
6
Introduction
EQ8 WORKTABLES
There are 3 worktables in EQ8, each offering different tools and features for your project. You can switch between worktables
at any time by clicking on their respective buttons, which will always be located in the top-right corner of the screen. Let’s take
a closer look at these 3 worktables.
Quilt Worktable
• Design quilts of all layout styles, including: traditional,
modern, custom, strip, one-patch, baby blocks, and
more
• Customize borders (choose from 22 styles!)
• Add blocks, fabrics, and threads
• Visualize quilting
Quilt Worktable
• Create quilt labels
Block Worktable
• Draw pieced blocks
• Draw applique blocks
• Draw combination blocks
• Create blocks without drawing

Block Worktable
• Trace a photo to create a block
Image Worktable
• Import your favorite photos, then crop, resize, and
colorize for your photo quilt or project
• Import photo or scans of your fabric stash, then

straighten, crop, and scale for use in your quilt
Image Worktable
OPEN LIBRARY
The Open Library button is a new addition to EQ8! Quickly
access the appropriate library for the set of tools you’re
currently working with. For example, if you have the Fabrics &
Colors palette open and click the Open Library button, you’ll go
to the Fabric Library.
7
WORKSPACE DIAGRAM
The diagram below shows the EQ8 Quilt Worktable (blue), fully labeled to help illustrate the workspace. The Block Worktable
(yellow) is also shown smaller, with additional content.
Project Name Worktable Tabs
Main Menu
Home button
Ribbon Options
Main Toolbar
Palette
Palette Toolbox
Palette Tools
Palette Sub-tools
Fabric Preview Palette Scrollbar
Most Recently
Used List
Palette Tabs
Palette Viewer
Display Options Viewer Scrollbar Viewer Options Layer Tabs Hide/Show Layers
8
Introduction
Precision Bar - Block Worktable only
Worktable Buttons
Worktable Scrollbar
Layer Tabs Status Bar
Palette Options
9
CHOOSING INCHES OR
CENTIMETERS
You can use inch or centimeter measurements
in EQ8 (inches are the default).
Step 2
1. Click File on the main menu bar, then
click Preferences.
2. Under Workspace, click Measurement.
3. Click on the measurement you’d like to

use. Step 3 Step 4
4. Click OK.
NOTE
Once you change the measurement units the
program will continue to use those units until you
change them again.
RESTORING DEFAULT
SETTINGS
If you make changes to the default settings,
you can always restore the program back to
the way it was when you first installed it.
1. Click File on the main menu bar, then

click Preferences.
Step 2
2. Under Workspace, click Restore.
Step 4
3. (Optional) Click the box next to Also
restore default blocks, fabrics, colors
and thread if you’ve made changes to
the default palette (see page 11) and
would like to go back to the defaults.
Step 3
4. Click the Restore Default Settings
button.
5. EQ8 will need to close to update

the settings. Click OK at the warning
message.
6. Open the program again and the

default settings will be restored.
Step 5
10
Introduction
CREATING YOUR OWN DEFAULT PROJECT

Follow the instructions below to change your default project. The next time you open EQ8, or start a new project, you will be
starting with the Sketchbook items YOU selected, instead of what was pre-loaded in EQ8.
WARNING: Make sure you are in a new, clean project file, as you don’t want to lose any of your in-progress designs.
Delete the Default Content

1. Start a new project.
2. Click View Project Sketchbook.

Step 2
3. Click the Blocks section. You’ll see the
pre-loaded default blocks.
4. Click the 3-dot Options button in the

Step 4 upper-right of the Sketchbook window.
5. Choose Clear all unused blocks.
6. Click Yes to the prompt. The Blocks

section should be empty.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 for the Motifs and

Step 5
Stencils tabs in the Blocks section, and
also for Fabrics and Threads, if desired.
8. Close the Sketchbook.
9. (Optional) Open the libraries and add

any new items you’d like. Close the
library.
10. When you have your project just as

you would like, click File on the main
menu bar and choose Save Palette as
Default. Click OK to the prompt. The
next time you start a new project, you
will see your default palettes, whether
completely empty, or with your own
content.
NOTE
Step 10
You can also save your default project with newly
sorted content. For example, in the Colors section
of the Sketchbook, you might want to put black
and white swatches at the beginning of the Color
palette. Sort the colors so black and white are first
in the list (see page 31). When you choose File >
Save Palette as Default, the black and white will
always be at the beginning of all new projects.
11
GETTING HELP
EQ8 is packed with online resources for learning your EQ8 software. To access most of these resources, click Help on the main
menu to display the options below.
View Home Screen

Display the Home Screen for quick access to features, help resources and product details.
Online Support Articles

Use the search feature on the EQ support site to find the answers you’re looking for.
Video Tutorials
These videos are a great way to get started. Watch and learn!
Printable Lessons
There are fully-illustrated printable lessons to help you get started.
Quick Start Guide

Offers an EQ8 Starter Lesson, along with tips and a tool reference.
User Manual
This User Manual is a reference guide to all the features of the program. View the PDF and print out the pages that are most
useful. Contact EQ for information on purchasing a hard copy of the manual.
Contact EQ
Can’t find the answers you need? Contact our technical support team by email or phone. Emails are answered within 1-2
business days, and phone calls can be taken during business hours. (Monday-Friday, 9:00am-5:00pm ET.)
• Find answers on our Support Site at any time: Support.ElectricQuilt.com
• Contact by email: techsupport@electricquilt.com
• Contact by phone: 1-419-352-1134
DOWNLOADING AND INSTALLING

If you have any problems or questions about downloading, installing/uninstalling, or activating EQ8, please visit
Support.ElectricQuilt.com. Because operating systems and browsers change and update so frequently, you will be able to find
the most up-to-date information regarding your operating system on our Support site.
If you can’t find the help you need on the Support site, please contact us! We’re happy to answer any questions you may have.
See the contact info above.
ACTIVATING EQ8
After you’ve installed EQ8, you will need to activate the software. Activation sends a signal to EQ’s server to verify that the
software is licensed to you and that it has not been shared or stolen.
On how many computers can I have EQ8 installed at a time?

You can have EQ8 installed on as many computers as you wish, however only 2 computers can be active at a time. If you want
to use EQ8 on a third computer, you must deactivate one of the computers before activating the third computer.
Please note: When you deactivate EQ8 so it can be used on a third computer, you do NOT need to uninstall EQ8 unless you no
longer plan to use it on that computer.
12
1
CHAPTER 1
Projects and the Project Sketchbook
The first thing we’re going to talk about in this manual are the projects where your entire designs will be saved because
we don’t want you to lose anything you create. Within these projects, the 6 sections that make up the Project Sketchbook
will hold and allow you to access the individual parts that make up the design, including complete quilts. Continue reading
to understand where your creativity will be stored.
Understanding Projects......................................................................................14
Understanding the Project Sketchbook..............................................................14
Creating a New Project.......................................................................................15
Saving a Project .................................................................................................16
Opening an Existing Project................................................................................17
Saving a Project in a New Location.....................................................................18
Renaming a Project............................................................................................18
Searching for a Project.......................................................................................19
Deleting a Named Project..................................................................................20
Starting with a Quick Quilt Project.....................................................................21
Opening or Sending a Project via Email..............................................................22
Compressing a Project’s File Size........................................................................23
Copying Projects and User Files from One Computer to Another......................25
Adding Items to the Project Sketchbook............................................................27
Editing Quilts from the Project Sketchbook.......................................................28
Editing Blocks, Motifs, and Stencils from the Project Sketchbook.....................29
Editing Photos from the Project Sketchbook......................................................30
Sorting Items in the Project Sketchbook............................................................31
Deleting from the Project Sketchbook...............................................................33
Naming Project Sketchbook Items on Notecards...............................................34
UNDERSTANDING PROJECTS
1 Like most software programs, any work you do in the program will not be saved until you create a file on your computer.
EQ8 creates .PJ8 files that, by default, are saved in your computer’s Documents folder. While most computer files contain
one thing, such as a letter to your Aunt Debbie, an EQ8 project can contain many items, including blocks, fabrics, threads,
embroideries, photos, and completed quilts. These individual items will all be saved in the Project Sketchbook, see the next
section. On the following pages we’ll explain how to open, save, rename, and perform other actions with the projects, but the
most important idea to understand is you must have a project if you want to save what you create.
UNDERSTANDING THE PROJECT SKETCHBOOK

The Project Sketchbook is like a big organizer for your project. In EQ8’s Project Sketchbook there are 6 sections: Quilts, Blocks
(there are 3 tabs within this section: Blocks, Motifs, & Stencils), Fabrics, Colors, Photos, Thread, and Embroidery. By default,
the Blocks, Fabrics, Colors, and Thread sections all have respective items already stored there. Once you’ve designed quilts,
you can add them to your Project Sketchbook, and many of the other sections, whether they start with items or not, can
be filled with your own creations or by looking through and adding items from the Libraries (see chapter 8). Any time you
click the Add to Project Sketchbook button, the current version of your design gets added to the Project Sketchbook and is
organized in the appropriate section. So, you can be working on a quilt, add it to the Project Sketchbook, step away, and when
you come back to the program, begin working on it where you left off. We’ll show you how to add, edit, sort, name, and delete
items from the Project Sketchbook, so you understand how this can store all of your creativity.
Resizing the Project

Sketchbook
The Project Sketchbook in EQ8 can be resized.
Hover your cursor over any edge until it looks
like a double-sided arrow, then click, hold, and
drag to change the size.
Options Menu
At the top-right of every sections’ display Resize the Sketchbook by hovering over one of the edges until
area are 3 dots. If you click on these dots, the your cursor changes, then click, hold and drag to change the size.
options will be different for every section. Yet,
they will all offer the ability to:
• Sort – sort the respective items in the

section, see page 31.
• Frame Color – change the color of the

frame around the selected item.
• Display – change the size of the items

displayed from tiny all the way to large.
Each section offers different options. Click on

the options menu to see what is available. Click the three dots in the top-right corner of the Sketchbook
For example, there are many options for the to access the options menu. The options available will change,
depending on the section of the Sketchbook that’s selected.
Blocks and Colors sections.
14
Chapter 1: Projects
CREATING A NEW PROJECT

When you open EQ8, before creating a project, you’ll notice at the top of your screen it says “Untitled – EQ8.” We recommend
“naming” your project before you begin working. Following are the steps to create a new project, so Untitled will be replaced
1
with a name of your choosing. It is very important to create a project so that you don’t lose any of your designs. If you’re not
sure what your design results might be, and therefore what might be a good name (i.e., Mom’s Lone Star Quilt), you can start
by naming the quilt using the date (i.e., July 12), and rename it later, see page 18.
If you choose not to name your project before you start working in the software, you will be prompted to save (aka “name”
your project) each time you click the Add to Project Sketchbook button. See page 16.
1. With EQ8 open, you can click the New

Project button, or click File > New
OR Project. The Project Helper box will
appear.
Step 1
New Project
2. Type a name of your choosing (you can
Step 1 change it later, see page 18) on the
File > New Project
Create a new project tab .
3. Click OK. You will now see the project

name you typed at the top of your
screen (followed by PJ8).
NOTES
The default locations for projects created in this
manner are:
PC: Documents > My EQ8 > Projects
Mac: Go > Home > My EQ8 > Projects
If you create a new project called “Log Cabin,” you

will find a Log Cabin.PJ8 file in the Projects folder.
To save your new project, see page 16.
To open your new project after closing it, see

page 17.
Step 2 Step 3
To delete your project, see page 20.
After clicking OK in step 3, a file is created in your My EQ8 >

Projects folder using the name you typed in step 2.
15
SAVING A PROJECT
1 If you begin working in EQ8 without creating or opening a new project (it will say “Untitled” at the top of your screen), nothing
you design will be saved if you close the program (though EQ8 will ask you to save). You can create a new project, see page 15,
or follow steps 2-4 below to save a project.
1. If you have named your project (i.e. it

does not say Untitled at the top of your
screen), each time you click the Add
to Project Sketchbook button, your If you see a name at the
top of the screen, each
project file is saved. You can skip to step time you click Add to
5. Project Sketchbook, the
project file is saved.
2. If you have not created a project (i.e. it
says Untitled at the top of your screen),
when you click the Add to Project
Step 1
Sketchbook button you will see a
message warning you that the file has
not been saved yet. Click OK and the
Save As box will appear.
If it says Untitled at the
3. Type a name in the File name box. top of the screen, each
time you click Add to
4. Click Save. The box will disappear and Project Sketchbook, you
will be asked to save (or
the name you gave to the project will name) the project.
be listed at the top of your screen.
5. Continue to click Add to Project

Step 2
Sketchbook as you make new or modify
existing designs. Any time you click this
button your project is being saved with
all the Project Sketchbook contents.
You can have many quilts, blocks, and
images in a project.
NOTES
To open a project after closing it, see page 17. Step 2
To delete your project, see page 20.
If you have already added something to the Project

Sketchbook and click Add to Project Sketchbook
again, EQ8 will alert you that the item is already
there, and you can simply click OK. So, there is
no harm in clicking the button if you are not sure
whether you have added the items—better to
be safe than sorry—because anything not in the
Project Sketchbook will be lost.
If you did not create a new project or create one

while working in EQ8 and attempt to close the Step 3 Step 4
program, you will receive a prompt asking, “Save
changes to Untitled?” If you want to save what
you’ve designed, click Yes, and follow steps 3 & 4
above.
Step 5
16
Chapter 1: Projects
OPENING AN EXISTING PROJECT

You can open projects created in EQ8 or earlier versions of EQ within EQ8. You need to know where the project is saved on
your computer.
1
1. Start EQ8. On the Home Screen, click
Step 1 on Open an existing project. If you
already have EQ8 open, click the Open
Open Project Project button. The Project Helper box
button on
main toolbar will appear with the Open an existing
project tab engaged.
2. If you see the name of the project in

either the Most recently used projects
or Existing EQ8 lists, click on it to select
it, click OK, and skip to step 6. If you
have a lot of existing projects, you may
Open an existing project on the Home Screen
have to use the vertical scrollbar to
see the project you want to open. The
first quilt saved in this project will be
displayed in the preview box, but if you
didn’t save any quilts in this project (if
you only worked on blocks) the preview
box will say, “No quilts to display”.
3. If you do not see the project name in

the lists, you will need to browse to
Step 2 find it. Click the folder in the bottom-
left corner named Click here to open a
project not listed above.
4. Navigate to the location on your

computer where the file is saved.
Step 3 View the quilts 5. Click the name of the project to select
in this project it, and click Open.
Step 4 6. This project’s Project Sketchbook will

open. Within the Project Sketchbook
section you want (Quilts, Blocks, etc.),
select the item you wish to work on and
click the Edit button.
NOTES
Here are the default locations for previous EQ
versions:
EQ6: Documents > My EQ6 > PJ6
EQ7: Documents > My EQ7 > PJ7
Step 5
You can also open an existing project with File >
Open Project or CTRL+O (Command+O).
Use this same method to open projects created in

Step 6 other EQ software, such as BlockBase.
17
SAVING A PROJECT IN A NEW LOCATION

1 Save As under the File menu is great for saving projects to other places on your computer, or onto removable storage devices
like flash drives or writeable CDs. Remember your project consists of everything in the Project Sketchbook, so be sure to add
any designs you want to see again, see page 16. Designs not in the Project Sketchbook will be lost.
1. If you want to save your project to a

removable storage device, be sure the
device is inserted or connected to your
computer.
2. Make sure the EQ8 project you want to

save is open.
Step 3
3. Click File > Save As.
Step 4
4. Navigate to the location where you’d
like to save the project.
5. Type a name for the project in the File

name: box.
6. Click Save. Your project will be saved in

the new location.
NOTE
To open a project from removable storage devices,
you can either double-click the project name or Step 5 Step 6
use the directions on page 17 to open a project not
listed on the Open an existing project tab of the
Project Helper.
Step 1
RENAMING A PROJECT
1. If you are already in EQ8, click the Open Open Project
button on the
Project button. If you start EQ8 and main toolbar
are on the Home Screen, click Open an
existing project. Either way, the Project
Helper box will appear.
2. Whether or not you see the project

listed, click on Click here to open a
project not listed above.
Open an existing project on the Home Screen
3. Navigate to the location where the
project file is saved. EQ8 projects are
saved by default in:
PC: Documents > My EQ8 > Projects Step 2
4. Right-click on the project name and

choose Rename from the pop-out
menu. The current name will be
highlighted. Step 4
18
Chapter 1: Projects
5. Type a new name. (If the entire name,

plus the extension .PJ8, was highlighted,
make sure to only change the name to
the left of the period, so the extension
1
stays the same.)
Step 5
When renaming, make sure you leave the file extension (.PJ8) intact. 6. Click Cancel to close the Open box and
Cancel again to close the Project Helper
and return to the EQ8 worktable you
were previously on.
NOTE
Don’t worry if you see the old project name in
the Most recently used projects list of the Project
Helper. The name will be bumped off the list once
other projects are open.
SEARCHING FOR A
PROJECT
If you ever need to find a project that is not in
the Existing Projects list, follow these steps.
1. Open your computer’s Search option

and type in .PJ8, to find the files on
your computer that end in that file
extension.
2. If you find a project not in the My EQ8 >

Step 1 Projects folder, you can double-click on
the project in the list to open it.
3. You may want to choose File > Save As

and save it in (PC) Documents > My
EQ8 > Projects or (Mac) Go > Home >
My EQ8 > Projects so it will be in the
Existing Projects list.
Step 3
NOTES
When searching, you’ll find projects that you did
not create. These “unknown” projects are needed
for the default projects and Auto Borders in EQ8
and should not be moved or deleted. In general,
do not move PJ8 projects or files out of folders in
My EQ8 > res. Doing this may cause the program to
stop working and you will need to reinstall.
If you’re looking for projects other than those

created in EQ8, try the following extensions:
.PJ7 – EQ7 project
.PJ6 – EQ6 project
19
DELETING A NAMED PROJECT

1 Sometimes you may want to delete a project, and if so, follow the steps below. If you only want to delete an individual block
or quilt within a project, see page 33.
1. Start EQ8 and on the Home Screen click Step 1

Open an existing project, or if you’re
already in EQ8, click the Open Project Open Project
button. button on the
main toolbar
2. In the bottom-left corner of the Project
Helper box, click Click here to open a
project not listed above (even if you
see the project you want to delete in
one of the lists).
3. Navigate to the location where the file Open an existing project on the Home Screen
is saved on your computer. EQ8 projects
are saved by default in:
Step 2
4. Right-click the project name and choose
Delete (PC) or Move to Trash (Mac).
5. If asked if you want to delete, click Yes.

Step 4
6. Click Cancel to close the Open box and
Cancel again to return to the worktable.
NOTES
You can also delete a project outside of EQ8
using File Explorer or Finder. On a PC, navigate
to Documents > My EQ8 > Projects. On a Mac,
navigate to Go > Home > My EQ8 > Projects. Select
the file and send it to the Recycle Bin or Trash Can.
If you delete the wrong project you can recover

it. On a PC, double-click the Recycle Bin and find
the deleted file. Right-click on the file and choose
Restore. On a Mac, click the Trash Can. Right-click
on the file and choose Put Back. The project will
be sent back to its original folder. Deleted projects
are gone forever once you empty the Recycle Bin
or Trash.
Don’t worry if you see a deleted project name in

the Most recently used projects list of the Project
Helper. The name will be bumped off the list once
other projects are opened.
20
Chapter 1: Projects
STARTING WITH A
Home
QUICK QUILT PROJECT 1
button EQ8 has over 70 pre-made quilts for you to
use as is, or edit to make into your own.
1. Start EQ8 and on the Home Screen click

Start with a Quick Quilt project, or if
you’re already in EQ8, click the Open
Project button and click the Start with a
Quick Quilt project tab.
2. Click on the names to see the quilts,

and use the arrows below the preview
of the quilt to see all the quilts in that
Step 1 project.
3. Click on the project you want to use to

select it. Click OK.
4. The Sketchbook for this project will

appear (all of the blocks and fabrics
used to make these quilts will be in the
respective sections). Click the Quilts
section.
5. To put a quilt on the worktable, either

double-click it, or select the quilt and
click the Project Sketchbook’s Edit
button.
NOTES
When you open a Quick Quilt, it will be Untitled.
Don’t forget to save this project, see page 16.
Step 2 Preview the Step 3
other quilts in
the project If you turn off the EQ8 Home Screen, you can
access the Quick Quilts by clicking File > Open a
Quick Quilt Project.
Step 4
Step 5
21
OPENING OR SENDING A PROJECT VIA EMAIL

1 EQ8 projects sent via email are sent as attachments.
Opening a Project from

your Email
1. If the attachment is an EQ8 project file .PJ8 file attached to the email
(ending in .PJ8), click or double-click
on the attachment to see your options.
(You may need to click the words
Download Attachment or click on a
paper clip icon.)
2. Depending on your email provider, you

can:
Save (Recommended) – save the file in

the default location for project files:
Then follow the directions on pages Step 2
17 to open the project from Existing Your options may look different, depending on your email provider.
Projects list.
Open – this will only put the file in your

Temporary Files, but allow you to view
it. You should immediately save the file
following the directions on page 18.
NOTE
Remember, opening attachments from people you
don’t know could potentially harm your computer.
Sending a Project via Email

You may have many quilts, blocks, fabrics, and
images in your project. It’s best to clean up
your project and decrease the file size before
sending. See Copying Projects page 23, and
Compressing a Project’s File size page 24.
1. Open your email account and start a

new message.
2. Add an attachment. You may see a

paper clip, the menu choice INSERT >
File, or the word Attach. Check with Step 2
your email provider on how to add Look for the word Attach, Insert, or a paper clip to add the project file to your message.
attachments if you need help.
22
Chapter 1: Projects
3. Navigate to find the folder where your

project is saved. Default location:
1
4. Click the project name to select it
and attach it to the email. Type in the
receiver’s email address and add a
subject line and message. Then send
the email.
NOTE
Step 4 The person that you are sending the project file to
must have EQ8 installed on his or her computer in
order to open the project file (.PJ8).
COMPRESSING A PROJECT’S FILE SIZE

Use this compress feature to clean up your Sketchbook and make the file size smaller. You may want to do this so the project
file won’t take up so much space on your computer, or so you can attach it in an email, see page 22. Using this feature will
automatically delete items from your Sketchbook that are “unused” (only for this project, NOT from EQ8). There is the
potential for losing items you didn’t mean to delete if you do not fully understand this feature. If you plan to compress the file
size, it is highly recommended you create a backup copy of the project first using either File > Save As (page 18) or File > Create
Copy Project (below).
What does it mean to

be “unused”?
There are two options to choose from in the
Compress Project File Size window:
• Delete unused blocks, fabrics,

embroidery, pictures and thread means
Compress Project File Size Options the Sketchbook quilts determine
whether something is used or not. If
it isn’t in one of the quilts, it will be
deleted from the project.
• Delete unused fabrics only means

Sketchbook quilts and blocks determine
whether a fabric is used or not. If the
fabric is not in a quilt or a block, it will
be deleted from the project.
Step 1
Step 2 Make a Backup Copy of

the Project
1. Click File > Create Copy Project.
2. (Optional) Choose a new location for

the backup copy. Navigate to the folder
in which you want to save the backup.
23
3. Type a name for the backup copy. We

suggest adding the words “original” or
1 “backup copy” to the current file name
so you know what it is.
4. Click Save. The copy will be in the

location you chose and you will still be
working on the current project.
Compressing the
Project’s File Size
Step 3 Step 4
5. Click File > Compress Project File Size.
6. Choose one of the compression options

(see page 23 for details):
• Delete unused blocks, fabrics,
embroidery, pictures and thread will
delete anything not used in one of
Step 5
the quilts in this project.
• Delete unused fabrics only will
delete all fabrics from the Sketchbook
not used in a quilt or block in this
project.
7. Click OK to delete the unused items

and save the result. This process will
overwrite your current project file Step 6
and cannot be undone. (If you made a
backup copy, you have nothing to worry
about.) Click Cancel to do nothing and Step 7
return to the worktable.
NOTES
If you choose to delete unused blocks, fabrics,
embroidery, pictures and thread, first remove
unwanted quilts from the project. See page 33 for
how to delete items from the Sketchbook.
If you click the Clear button in the Fabrics section

of the Sketchbook and check Delete only unused
Fabrics, it has the same results as choosing the
Delete unused fabrics only in step 6.
Block colorings are stacked by default in stacks

of 2. This compressing feature does not remove an
unused coloring from a stack if one of the other
colorings is used. After running Compress Project
File Size once, you can click View Sketchbook, go
to the Blocks section, and manually delete unused
colorings from the remaining blocks. Run Compress
Project File Size again and your project may
become even smaller.
24
Chapter 1: Projects
COPYING PROJECTS AND USER FILES FROM ONE COMPUTER TO

ANOTHER 1
To move important EQ8 files from one computer to another you need the following: 1) a computer with EQ8 installed and EQ8
project files on it, 2) a “middle man” for storing the files, and 3) another computer with EQ8 installed on it.
The “middle man” can be removable storage (like a USB flash drive, writeable CD/DVD) or a server. Emailing yourself the
projects would be another option, although it may take longer if you have multiple projects to transfer (see page 22).
You do not need to have EQ8 open to do this.
Find the Important Files

on the Old Computer
1. Go to the default folder for EQ8 by
clicking Documents > My EQ8 on a PC
or Go > Home > My EQ8 on a Mac.
Step 2
2. Select the Projects and the User
Favorites folders.
3. Right-click and choose Copy or press

CTRL+C (Command+C) on your
keyboard.
Save the Projects to a

Storage Device
4. Insert the removable storage device
Step 3 (USB flash drive, writeable CD/DVD,
etc.) or connect to the server you plan
to use.
5. Open the storage device on your

computer.
Step 6
6. (Optional) Make a new folder by right-
clicking an empty space and choosing
New Folder and name it My EQ8.
Double-click the folder to open it.
7. Right-click and choose Paste or press

CTRL+V (Command+V) on your
keyboard. This will put copies of the
Projects and User Favorites folders in
here.
Step 7
25
8. If there are any other projects lurking

elsewhere on the old computer,
1 repeat steps 1-7 for those files. Use
the directions on page 19 to search
for projects that were not saved in the
Projects folder. Then copy and paste
those files into the Projects folder on
the removable storage device.
Move the Projects to the

New Computer
9. Insert the removable storage device
into the new computer or connect to
the server you used.
10. Open the storage device. Step 11
11. Select the Projects and User Favorites

folders.
12. Right-click and choose Copy or press

CTRL+C (Command+C) on your
keyboard.
Step 12
13. Go to the new computer’s My EQ8
folder by clicking Documents > My EQ8
on a PC or Go > Home > My EQ8 on a
Mac.
14. Right-click and choose Paste or press

CTRL+V (Command+V) on your
keyboard.
Step 13
Step 14
26
Chapter 1: Projects
ADDING ITEMS TO THE PROJECT SKETCHBOOK

Every EQ8 project has its own Project Sketchbook. The Project Sketchbook is where you save your designs, kind of like a
briefcase or file folder for that project. Anything added to the Project Sketchbook will be there the next time you open the
1
project. Anything not added to the Project Sketchbook will be lost.
The Add to Project Sketchbook button is available from each of the 3 worktables (Quilt, Block, and Image). Don’t feel like you
have to wait until your design is completely finished and perfect to click Add to Project Sketchbook. In fact, we encourage you
to save many “in progress” designs or variations in the same project, along with the final design.
1. With the new or changed item on your

worktable, click the Add to Project
Step 1 Step 2
Add to Project View Project Sketchbook button. (If this is your
Sketchbook Sketchbook first time clicking this button and you
haven’t already Saved As, you will be
prompted to name the project and it
Quilts will be saved by default in: My EQ8 >
section Projects.)
2. If you like, click the View Project

Sketchbook button to verify the new
contents.
Quilts Section: Your new quilt will be the last

quilt in the Sketchbook. Drag the scrollbar to
the right to see all your quilts.
Use the scrollbar to see all Displays the number of
the quilts in the project quilts saved in the project Blocks Section: Click the Blocks, Motifs,
or Stencils tab within the Blocks section,
Blocks, Motifs, and Stencils tabs
depending on the item you added. Your new
block, motif, or stencil will be the last one on
its tab. If you recolored an existing design, it
Blocks will be stacked on top of the original (up to
section two colorings by default). Click the design,
then use the coloring arrows to go to the end
of the stack of colorings. Or, right-click the
design and choose Select Coloring to see the
different ways that design has been colored
Coloring and select one.
arrows
Photos Section: Your new image will be
the last image in the Sketchbook. Drag the
scrollbar to the right to see all your images.
For all of these sections, you can also change

the number of items that display at one time.
On the left below the horizontal scrollbar
Photos
section you will see a series of display buttons with
squares on them. Click a button with a larger
square to see fewer items, or one with a
smaller square to see more items.
Display buttons
27
EDITING QUILTS FROM THE PROJECT SKETCHBOOK

1 You can make changes to existing quilt designs or edit quilts to print patterns.
2. Click the Quilts section.

Step 1
3. If you do not see the quilt you wish to
edit, drag the scrollbar to find it.
You can also change the number of

Step 2
items that display at one time. On the
left below the horizontal scrollbar you
will see a series of display buttons with
squares on them. Click a button with
a larger square to see fewer items, or
one with a smaller square to see more
items.
4. To edit the quilt back to the Quilt

Worktable, either double-click it, Display buttons Step 3 Step 4
or select the quilt and click the Edit
button.
Add to Project
5. Make any changes to the quilt and click Sketchbook
Add to Project Sketchbook to save
those changes. The new quilt will be at
the end of the existing quilts.
NOTES
The old quilt you edited will still be in the Project
Sketchbook. See page 33 if you do not want to
keep it.
When you add a Photo Patchwork quilt to the

Sketchbook, the quilt becomes a One Patch quilt
and the image is no longer needed. When you edit
this quilt, it will edit to the Quilt Worktable without After editing from the Sketchbook, the quilt will be on the Quilt Worktable.
the image and will be a normal One Patch quilt.
Read more about Photo Patchwork on page 49.
If you plan to print the quilt, don’t forget to give it a

name on the Notecard so it doesn’t display Untitled
on your printouts. See page 34.
Step 5
28
Chapter 1: Projects
EDITING BLOCKS,
Step 1
MOTIFS, AND STENCILS 1
FROM THE PROJECT
Step 3 SKETCHBOOK
You can make changes to existing block
designs or edit blocks to print patterns.
Step 2 1. Click View Project Sketchbook.
2. Click the Blocks section.
3. There are three tabs in the Blocks

section. Click the Blocks, Motifs, or
Stencils tab, depending on the item you
Step 5
Coloring wish to edit.
arrows
Step 4 Step 6 4. If you do not see the item you wish to
edit, drag the scrollbar to find it. (If you
still don’t see it, try a different tab in
step 3. If no blocks have been added to
a tab, it will say “No blocks to display”.)
5. (Optional) Choose the coloring you

wish to edit. Click the block to select
it and use the coloring arrows to scroll
through the colorings. Or, click the 3
Step 5 dot button and choose Select Coloring
Click the 3 dot button and choose
Select Coloring, then select a coloring to see the different colorings in a menu.
from the menu (right).
6. To edit the block back to the Block
Worktable, either double-click it, or
select it and click the Edit button.
This block was drawn using the EasyDraw
tools, so you’ll see the EASYDRAW BLOCK 7. The block will appear on the DRAW
palette on the Block Worktable when you
edit the block from the Sketchbook. tab of the Block Worktable, with the
tools originally used to create it in the
palette. Make any changes to the block
and click Add to Project Sketchbook to
save those changes. The new block will
be at the end of the existing blocks or
the new coloring will be the last of the
stacked colorings for that block.
NOTES
The old block you edited will still be in the
Sketchbook. See page 33 if you want to delete it.
After editing from the Sketchbook, the block will be on the DRAW tab of If you plan to print the new block, don’t forget to
the Block Worktable with the appropriate tools in the palette on the left. give it a name on the Notecard so it doesn’t show
up as Untitled in your printouts. See page 34.
29
EDITING PHOTOS FROM THE PROJECT SKETCHBOOK

1 You can make changes to existing images or edit them to print. If you don’t have any photos in your Project Sketchbook, since
there are no default photos in this section, you can add them from the Photo Library, see page 200 or Chapter 7.
2. Click the Photos section.

Step 1
3. If you do not see the image you wish to
edit, drag the scrollbar to find it.
4. Photos can go on any worktable:

Edit the photo to the Image Worktable:
Click the image once to select it, then
click the Edit button and choose to Step 2
Image Worktable. You will then be able
to use the tools described in Chapter 7.
Edit the photo to the Block Worktable:

Click the image once to select it, then
click the Edit button and choose to Step 3
Block Worktable. The image will go to
the Block Worktable. Click the NEW
BLOCK tab so you can choose the
appropriate block style and start tracing
(see page 158), or edit an existing block
from the Sketchbook (see page 29) to Step 4
Click the Edit button and choose which worktable you’d like to use.
continue working on an in-progress
block.
Edit the image to the Quilt Worktable:

You need to have NEW QUILT > Photo
Patchwork selected first. Close the
Project Sketchbook, start a new Photo If editing to the Quilt Worktable, click the NEW QUILT tab and choose
Patchwork quilt, then repeat steps Photo Patchwork on the ribbon before editing the photo to the worktable.
1-4. With the correct quilt type on the
worktable, you can click the image once
to select it in the Project Sketchbook,
click the Edit button and choose to
Quilt Worktable. Click on the DESIGN Step 5
tab. You will then be able to use the
Photo Patchwork Options to create a
One Patch Quilt filled with solid patches NOTE
of color (page 49). If you import an image of a fabric on the Image Worktable and click the Add to
Project Sketchbook button, the fabric image will appear in the Photos section
5. Make any changes on the worktable of the Sketchbook. To quickly copy the fabric image to the Fabrics section of the
you selected in step 4 and click Add Sketchbook, click the Copy to Fabrics button. The fabric image will then also be
to Project Sketchbook to save those in the Fabrics section, and you’ll be able to color quilts and blocks with the fabric
changes. The new quilt, block or image using the Fabric Tools.
will be at the end of the existing ones in
the Project Sketchbook. To add the fabric image directly to the Fabrics section while on the Image
Worktable, click Add as Fabric (see page 181).
30
Chapter 1: Projects
If it is too much to trace in one session, make sure that you are saving
both your tracing image and the in-progress drawing to the Sketchbook NOTES
so you can work on the tracing again later.
Images can be saved in the Project Sketchbook,
so you can trace them on the Block Worktable in
1
stages. The existing block described in step 4 could
Add to Project be the tracing “in-progress.” Just edit the image,
Sketchbook
then edit the block, and start tracing where you left
off the last time.
When you edit quilts or blocks from the Project

Sketchbook, you can double-click them and have
them go automatically to the correct worktable.
Click the Add to Project Sketchbook Click the Add to Project Sketchbook
button while Tracing Image is selected button while Drawing Tools is selected Because images can go on any worktable, it works
on the ribbon to save the photo you on the ribbon to save the drawing to differently. If you are on the Image Worktable
are using to trace in the Photos section the Blocks section of the Sketchbook. and double-click an image in the Sketchbook to
of the Sketchbook. edit it, it will go to the Image Worktable. If you
are on the Block Worktable and double-click an
image in the Sketchbook to edit it, it will go to the
Block Worktable. Remember you need to have a
Photo Patchwork quilt on the Quilt Worktable to
double-click an image and have it go to the Quilt
Worktable.
SORTING ITEMS IN THE

Step 1
PROJECT SKETCHBOOK
You can sort items in any section of the Project
Sketchbook. This technique also works in the
My Favorite Library and Current Sketchbook
sections of the library.
2. Click the section you’d like to sort.

For example, to sort photos, go to the
Photos section.
3. Click the Sort button. A Sort box will

Step 3 appear. To see all the items to be
sorted, drag the scrollbar beneath the
items.
4. You can also change the number of

Step 5 items that display at one time. Click
Click directly on the
items in the order
a button with a larger square to see
you’d like them sorted. fewer items, or one with a smaller
square to see more items.
5. Click the items in the order you want

them sorted. The first item clicked will
Scrollbar appear first in your Sketchbook. When
you click on an item, it will “disappear”
so you can’t select it again.
Step 4
Display buttons
31
6. Continue clicking items in the order you

want them to appear. Click the Start
1 Over button if you make a mistake. If
you’ve clicked on all the items, the sort
screen will disappear and you’ll be back
in the Project Sketchbook.
7. Click the Close button if you are

finished or if you want EQ8 to place Step 6 Step 7
the remaining unsorted items in their
current order at the end of what has
been sorted by you in the Project
Sketchbook.
3 dot button
NOTES
You can also sort blocks in the Blocks palette,
fabrics and colors in the Fabrics and Colors palette,
and photos in the Photos palette on the worktable.
Click the 3 dot button in the palette, choose Sort,
and use the above steps to sort them. Also, see
page 107.
If you only need to move a few things, you can drag

and drop blocks, fabrics, or photos within their
palettes. Select the item and drag it into a new
position and release. It will show as a transparency
as you drag. For best results, position the top-left
corner of the transparency over the top-left corner
of the item you want it to go in front of when you
release.
Drag and drop sorting in the Blocks palette
32
Chapter 1: Projects
DELETING FROM THE

Step 1 PROJECT SKETCHBOOK 1
2. Click the section containing the item

you wish to delete. For example, to
Step 2 delete a quilt, click the Quilts section.
3. If you do not see the item you wish to

delete, drag the scrollbar to find it.
4. Click on the item to select it. It will have

Step 5
Coloring a box around it showing it is selected.
arrows
Step 3 Step 6 5. Blocks section only: You can delete a
single coloring or the entire block:
To delete a coloring, click the 3 dot

button in the upper-right corner of
the Project Sketchbook, click Select
Coloring, then select the coloring you
want to delete. (Or use the coloring
arrows to scroll through the colorings.)
Step 5 To delete the entire block and all its

Click the 3 dot button and choose colorings, click the first coloring arrow
Select Coloring, then select a coloring
from the menu (right). to view the line drawing (Coloring 0).
6. Click the Delete button.

Coloring 0
7. Click Yes if you want to delete it.
NOTES
When cleaning up a project, the best order in which
to delete unwanted items is: quilts, blocks, unused
block colorings, then fabrics. By deleting quilts first,
any blocks or fabrics in those deleted quilts are
Step 7 unlinked and changed from “used” to “unused.”
By deleting blocks or unused block colorings next,
you unlink the fabrics they were colored with.
This allows you to make the project as clean as
possible and the file size as small as possible. See
Compressing a Project’s File Size, page 23.
If you try to delete a block or block coloring that is

used in a quilt you will get a warning message that
it is used in a quilt and cannot be deleted until the
quilt is deleted.
If you try to delete a fabric that is used in a quilt

or block you are keeping, you will get a warning
message. If you delete it anyway, the fabric will be
replaced with a solid color in the block or quilt.
You can delete multiple items at once from the Current Sketchbook section
of each library. Open the Block Library, click the Current Sketchbook section,
select multiple blocks to delete, and click the Delete button. To delete an entire project, see page 20.
33
NAMING PROJECT SKETCHBOOK ITEMS ON NOTECARDS

1 In each section of the Project Sketchbook there is a NOTECARD at the bottom left, so that you can label and identify any and
every item you design or use. The default items that come with EQ8 already have notecards (blocks, fabrics, etc.), but you can
still add to or edit these cards. When printing, the Name field of the Notecard appears at the top of your printout.
2. Click the section containing the item

you wish to name. For example, to
name a quilt, click the Quilts section. Step 1
3. If you do not see the item you wish to

name, drag the scrollbar to find it.
4. Click the item to select it and click the

Edit Notecard button. The blinking
Step 2
cursor lets you know where you will
begin typing.
5. Type a name in the Name field.
6. Press your keyboard TAB key to move

from one field to the next. Step 4
Notecard info Step 3

7. Type as much as you’d like in the Notes appears here
field.
Step 5 Step 8
8. Click the X to close the notecard. The
changes will appear on the NOTECARD.
9. Click Close to put the Sketchbook away.
NOTES
Step 7
The Name field appears at the top of the page
when printing, so you can change it to customize
the printout. Example: Quilt Shop BOM: November
To print the notecard information, select, copy, and

paste the notecard contents one at a time into a
word processing document like Microsoft Word.
In the Project Sketchbook and Libraries, you can

move the notecards out of the way or “pin” them
Notecard Buttons
to stay open as you browse the section. To move a
notecard, click and hold the Move icon as you drag
the notecard across the screen. To pin a notecard
to stay open, click the Pin icon. (When you change
Flip Pin Move Close
sections, you have to click the Pin icon again.) (Only available
for blocks, motifs,
Click the Flip icon to flip block notecards (only) to and stencils)
the back side to see marking information. See page
202 for information on block categories.
To learn about searching by using the notecard, see

pages 201.
34
2
CHAPTER 2
Quilt Layouts
EQ8 has ten basic layout styles. All of these styles are adjustable, so you have endless design possibilities. To create
your quilt design, you fill the blank spaces with blocks, fabrics, colors, and photos. EQ8 even has a Custom Set quilt
layout, which gives you a large blank space to give you more flexibility in your quilt design. This chapter gives
information about the size of your quilt, as well as the various quilt layout styles to help you determine which one
will be best to create your design.
Understanding Sizes...........................................................................................36
Choosing a Quilt Layout......................................................................................38
Making a Horizontal Quilt...................................................................................39
Making an On-Point Quilt...................................................................................40
Making a Variable Point Quilt.............................................................................41
Making a Baby Blocks Quilt................................................................................42
Making a Variable Blocks Quilt...........................................................................43
Making a Horizontal or Vertical Strip Quilt.........................................................44
Choosing a Strip Style.........................................................................................46
Strip Formulas....................................................................................................47
Cloning a Strip....................................................................................................48
Making a One Patch or Photo Patchwork Quilt..................................................49
Making Custom Patches in a One Patch Quilt....................................................53
Making a Custom Set Quilt.................................................................................55
Creating a Quilt from a Block..............................................................................56
Using a Layout Library Quilt...............................................................................57
UNDERSTANDING Quilt Worktable

SIZES LAYOUT tab button
It is extremely important that you understand

how the settings you make on the Quilt
Worktable > LAYOUT tab affect your quilt. To
avoid confusion and printing patterns that
2 won’t fit together or designing a quilt that is
exponentially too large, please review this
information. To see what we’ll be explaining,
click the Quilt Worktable button. On the
NEW QUILT tab, the Horizontal layout will be
selected (if it’s not, click on it), and then click
the LAYOUT tab.
Enter Finished Sizes

Never add seam allowance to the numbers
you type in the palettes on the LAYOUT
or BORDERS (see Chapter 3) tabs. You are
designing the finished quilt; finished quilts
don’t show seam allowance when you look at
them. If you are mocking up a quilt found in
a magazine or book, be sure you are entering
the finished size of the block, not the cut size
or the size it will measure before joining it to
the other blocks. Likewise, if you are designing
a quilt layout for blocks you already have
sewn, measure the blocks, subtract the seam
allowance from each side, and enter that
finished size. Enter finished sizes on the LAYOUT and BORDERS tabs
Seam allowance is automatically added by

EQ8 at the printing stage. You have control
over how wide the seam allowance is. If your
block is 8 inches on the LAYOUT tab and your
seam allowance is set to ¼ inch when you
print, your block will be 8 ½ inches unfinished
and will finish at the 8 inches you want. Seam allowance setting in the print dialog
36
Chapter 2: Quilt Layouts
Finished Size of Quilt

As you enter numbers on the LAYOUT and
BORDERS tabs, you can watch the quilt’s size
change. The finished size of the quilt always
shows in the bottom-right corner of your
screen. Pay attention to this number if you
are trying to make a quilt a specific size to fit
a bed. 2
Always Choose Use Size
The finished size of the quilt is always shown at
the bottom-right corner of the Quilt Worktable. from Quilt When Printing
If you like the finished size of the quilt in the
bottom-right corner of your screen and like
the way the quilt looks, print the patterns
and always choose Use size from quilt. If you
choose that option, EQ8 will read the sizes
you have entered on the LAYOUT and
BORDERS tabs for you and automatically
print the pattern so it ends up that size. Don’t
second guess the program and enter your
own sizes; you could end up with blocks
Choose Use size from quilt in the print dialog to ensure that don’t fit together if your math isn’t
your patterns print at the correct size for your quilt. correct. The Use size from quilt option is very
important when the block is not square; it is
the only way to print the skewed pattern in
Variable Point and Baby Blocks layouts, for
example. See Chapter 9.
Verify Sizes with the Tape

Measure Tool
The size will be correct, but if you ever
question a size or what number you are
entering, use the Tape Measure tool on
the vertical toolbar on the left side of your
screen. It lets you drag a line across the quilt
to measure approximately how long it is.
Remember, it is an approximation and is more
accurate the closer you click and stop near the
Using the Tape Measure tool, we can see that this points of the actual object you are measuring.
Variable Point block is 8.00” across the width. You may want to use it for Variable Point and
Variable Blocks quilts so you understand how
the numbers work.
NOTE
Every quilt has three layers. To learn more about
these layers, see page 72.
37
CHOOSING A QUILT LAYOUT

Click the Quilt Worktable button, then the NEW QUILT tab. Choose a layout style on the ribbon. Here is a list of available quilt
layout choices:
A Horizontal layouts arrange blocks in A B

horizontal and vertical rows. Blocks can
be rectangular or square, and the layout
2 can include optional sashing, corner blocks,
and a sash border.
B On-Point layouts contain on-point blocks

tipped 45 degrees and can include optional
sashing.
C D
C Variable Point layouts contain on-point
squares of diamonds that measure through
the block and can include optional sashing.
D Baby Blocks layouts are overall grids of 3-D

cubes made with equal-sided diamonds.
E Variable Blocks layouts are like Baby

Blocks, but the blocks can have unequal
E F
sides and tops.
F Horizontal Strip quilts are long horizontal

pieced or unpieced strips.
G Vertical Strip quilts are long vertical pieced

or unpieced strips.
H One Patch quilts consist of one patch

repeated throughout the quilt. G H
I Photo Patchwork quilts are like One Patch

quilt layouts, except these patches are
filled with solid colors based on the colors
of an image you select.
J Custom Set layouts provide a large central

area for placing blocks of different sizes.
You can vary the height and width of this
I J
central area. Blocks of any size can be
placed and aligned anywhere inside the
center, even overlapping each other.
NOTES
Your quilt’s center size (without borders) will always
appear at the top of the LAYOUT palette.
Use a Quick Quilt project, see page 21.
38
NEW QUILT tab Step 1

MAKING A
Step 2
HORIZONTAL QUILT
1. Click the Quilt Worktable button.
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > Horizontal.

A blank Horizontal quilt layout will
appear. 2
3. Click the LAYOUT tab.
4. Under NUMBER OF BLOCKS, click the

arrows beside Horizontal and Vertical
to choose the number of blocks you
want. (You can also type in these boxes
by double-clicking on the number.)
Step 3 5. Under FINISHED SIZE OF BLOCKS,
choose the block size you want. Check
Keep width and height equal to keep
Step 4 your blocks square. Change the sizes in
any of the following ways:
• Type a new size in the box
Step 5 • Drag the slider bar on the line
• Click to the right or left of the slider

bar to have the number jump in
increments
6. Under FINISHED SIZE OF SASHING,

Step 6 choose the sashing size you want.
Check Keep width and height equal to
keep your cornerstones square. For no
sashing, make the sash size 0.000. The
sizes can be changed the same three
ways described in step 5. Check Include
Step 7 Step 8 sash border if you want sashing not
only between the blocks, but around
the outside of them, too.
Width (8”)
Sashing Height (1”) 7. Click the BORDERS tab to adjust, add,
delete, or insert borders. See page 63.
8. Click the DESIGN tab to start filling your

Height (8”)
quilt. See Chapter 4 (page 71).
NOTE
To make adjustments in the LAYOUT palette faster,
Sashing Width (1”) you can use the keyboard TAB key to cycle between
entries and type immediately.
How blocks are measured: The width and height you input are the edges of the squares
(or rectangles) you see. The sashing width is added to the left and right sides of your block.
The sashing height is added to the top and bottom of your block.
39
MAKING AN ON-POINT NEW QUILT tab Step 1
QUILT Step 2
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > On-Point. A

blank On-Point quilt layout will appear.
2 3. Click the LAYOUT tab.
4. Under SELECT A STYLE, click the circle

next to the style you want (either
triangles in the corners or a seam).

want. (You can also type in these boxes Step 3
6. Under FINISHED SIZE OF BLOCKS,

choose the block size you want. You can Step 4
change the edge length in any of the
following ways:
Step 5
• Drag the slider bar on the line

Step 6

Step 7
increments

choose the sashing size you want. For
no sashing, make the sash size 0.000.
The size can be changed the same three Step 8 Step 9
ways described in step 6.
8. Click the BORDERS tab to adjust, add,

)
0”

(1
th
id
W
9. Click the DESIGN tab to start filling your Sashing Width (1.5”)
NOTE
you can use the keyboard TAB key to cycle between
How blocks are measured: The size of blocks you input here is the diagonal edge
of the on-point squares. The sashing width is added on all sides of your block.
In this layout, your blocks will always be square. If you would rather have skewed
diamonds, use the Variable Point layout instead. Be aware it measures differently.
40
NEW QUILT tab Step 1

MAKING A VARIABLE
Step 2
POINT QUILT
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > Variable

Point. A blank Variable Point quilt
layout will appear. 2
4. Under SELECT A STYLE, click inside

the circle of the style you want (either
triangles in the corners or a seam).

Step 3 arrows beside Horizontal and Vertical to
choose the number of blocks you want.
(You can also type in these boxes by
double-clicking on the number.)
Step 4
choose the block size you want. You can
change the Width and Height through
Step 5
the block in any of the following ways:
Step 6 • Drag the slider bar on the line

Step 7 increments

choose the sashing size you want. For
no sashing, make the sash size 0.000.
Step 8 Step 9 The size can be changed the same three
ways described in step 6.
Width (9”)


Height (14”)
NOTE
Sashing To make adjustments in the LAYOUT palette faster,
Width (2”) you can use the keyboard TAB key to cycle between
How blocks are measured: The sizes you input here are NOT the edges of the Variable
Point blocks you see. The Width is the horizontal measurement from point to point through
the block. The Height is the vertical measurement from point to point through the block.
The sashing Width is added horizontally out on all sides of your block.
41
MAKING A BABY NEW QUILT tab Step 2 Step 1
BLOCKS QUILT
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > Baby Blocks.

A blank Baby Blocks quilt layout will
2 appear.

Step 3
choose the block size you want. You can
change the size in any of the following
ways: Step 4
• Drag the slider bar on the line Step 5

increments
6. Click the BORDERS tab to adjust, add, Step 6 Step 7


”)
quilt. See Chapter 4 (page 71). e (10
Siz
ed
ish
NOTE Fin

you can use the keyboard Tab key to cycle between
entries and type immediately. Finished
Size (10”)
How blocks are measured: The size of blocks you input is the edge length of all
the sides of the Baby Blocks you see. There is no sashing for this layout style.
42
NEW QUILT tab Step 2 Step 1

MAKING A VARIABLE
BLOCKS QUILT
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > Variable

Blocks. A blank Variable Blocks quilt
layout will appear. 2

Step 3 5. Under FINISHED DIMENSIONS OF
TOP, choose the size you want. You
can change the Horizontal and Vertical
sizes in any of the following ways:
Step 4

Step 5
increments
Step 6 6. Under FINISHED DIMENSIONS OF SIDE,

choose the Vertical length of side you
want. This size can be changed the
same three ways described in step 5.
Step 7 Step 8

Horizontal (16”)
NOTE
Vertical Top To make adjustments in the LAYOUT palette faster,
(10”) Vertical you can use the keyboard Tab key to cycle between
Side (3”) entries and type immediately.
How blocks are measured: The Horizontal and Vertical dimensions you input for the
top are NOT the edges of the “top” variable block you see. Horizontal is the horizontal
measurement from point to point through the “top” block. Vertical is the vertical
measurement from point to point through the “top” block. Under FINISHED DIMENSIONS
OF SIDE, Vertical is the edge length of that vertical line.
43
MAKING A HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL STRIP QUILT

A strip quilt is made up of either horizontal rows or vertical columns, each of which can have its own style and Width. The
Length will be the same for all the strips. These rows will feel similar to adjusting border styles (see Chapter 3), more so than
setting up a traditional layout.
1. Click the Quilt Worktable button. NEW QUILT tab Step 2 Step 1
2 2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > Horizontal

Strip, to have your strips go from left
to right (horizontally). Click Vertical
Strip to have the strips go up and down
(vertically). A blank Strip quilt layout
will appear.
4. Under SELECT STRIP, choose the strip

you want to work on. You can either
click directly on the strip in the quilt
or use the left and right arrows to go
back and forth between the strips. The
selected strip always appears gray in
Step 3
the quilt layout.
5. (Optional) Put a check in Clone the

selected strip to copy the settings of
the selected strip whenever you click
Add or Insert. See page 48.
NOTE Step 4
If Clone the selected strip is checked and you click Step 6
Add or Insert, the selected strip will be copied. If it
Step 5
is unchecked, a plain 2-inch strip will be added or
inserted. See page 48.
6. Once a strip is selected you can do any Step 7

of the following:
• Click Add to add a new strip to the

end of the existing strips Selected strip
• Click Delete to remove the selected

strip
• Click Insert to put a new blank strip

in front of the selected strip
7. Under STRIP STYLE AND SIZE, click the

down arrow on the Select a strip style
box. Click on a style name in the list to
make your choice.
44
8. Under STRIP STYLE AND SIZE, choose

the strip size you want. The Width can
be different for every strip, but the
Length will be the same for all. You can
change the size in any of the following
ways:
• Type a new size in the box 2


Step 8 bar to have the number jump in
increments
9. If you choose a style which allows

Step 9 for blocks, then one or both of the
NUMBER OF BLOCKS boxes will become
editable. Click the arrows beside Along
length and Across width to set the
number of blocks. (You can also type in
Step 11 Step 12
these boxes by double-clicking on the
number.) Across width will be disabled
Length
for all styles except Checker Board.
10. Repeat steps 4-9 for each strip in the

Width quilt.

How blocks are measured (Horizontal Strip quilt): The horizontal length stays the same for delete, or insert borders. See page 63.
all strips. The vertical width can be different for each strip.
Width
NOTES
you can use the keyboard TAB key to cycle between
The numbers for Along length and Across width

determine how many blocks to add and have
nothing to do with size.
Length You may want to see page 47 for strip formulas for
making strips with perfect squares or 90 degree
angles.
How blocks are measured

(Vertical Strip quilt): The vertical
length stays the same for all
strips. The horizontal width can
be different for each strip.
45
CHOOSING A STRIP STYLE
Plain
2
Pieced Blocks
Half Drop Blocks
Spaced Squares
Points A
Points B
Diamonds
Half Drop Diamonds
Double Diamonds
Half Drop Double Diamonds
Checker Board
46
STRIP FORMULAS
Use the formulas below when you want perfect
squares or 90 degree angles in your strips. These
formulas are the same for both Horizontal or Vertical
Strip quilts.
A For Pieced Blocks, Half Drop Blocks, Diamonds,

Example A using Pieced Blocks: and Half Drop Diamonds 2
10 (Strip Width) x 5 (Number of blocks) = 50 To create perfect squares or 90 degree angles:
(Strip Length)
Strip Width x Number of blocks = Strip Length
B For Double Diamonds and Half Drop

Double Diamonds
To create perfect squares or 90 degree angles:
Strip Width x (Number of blocks ÷ 2) =
Strip Length
C For Points A and Points B

To create triangles with a 90 degree angle:
Strip Width x (Number of blocks x 2) =
Example B using Double Diamonds:
Strip Length
11 (Strip Width) x 4 (Number of blocks ÷ 2) = 44
(Strip Length) D For Checker Board
To create perfect squares or 90 degree angles:
First divide the Strip Length by the Strip Width.
Multiply that number by the number of blocks
Across width. This will equal the number of blocks
Along length.
NOTE
The maximum number of blocks horizontally and vertically
can range from 24-100. If you can only set Numbers of
blocks to 24 and need it to be higher, change it in Quilt
Worktable Options. Click the Worktable Options button on
Example C using Points A: the left toolbar. Under Layout Options > All Styles, change
4 (Strip Width) x 10 (Number of blocks x 2) = 40 the number in the second box beside Maximum number of
(Strip Length)
blocks horizontally and vertically and click OK.
Example D using Checker Board:

60 (Strip Length) ÷ 10 (Strip Width) = 6
6 x 3 (Blocks Across width) = 18 (Blocks Along
length)
47
CLONING A STRIP
Step 1
To clone a strip you must have either a
Horizontal or Vertical Strip quilt layout on
the screen. Cloning will copy the Layout tab Step 2
settings of the selected strip and make new
strips the same. This feature is great for
2 creating consistent spacers or rows, as well as
for creating Bargello quilts.
2. Click in the quilt on the strip you want

to clone.
3. Under SELECT STRIP, put a check in

Clone the selected strip.
4. Click Add to put a copy of the selected

strip at the end of the quilt.
Click Insert to put a copy in front of the

selected strip.
A blank (empty) strip with the same

settings as the cloned strip will be
added or inserted. You will need to
set blocks into and recolor this empty Step 3
strip on the DESIGN tab, because EQ
considers the clone strip a “new” strip.
NOTES
When you want a quilt of only one strip style, use
the Delete button to delete all strips except one.
Set the style and sizes for the single strip and clone
it until the desired quilt size is achieved.
To quickly set up a strip quilt with two alternating

strips, delete all but two strips in the quilt. Set the
styles and sizes for each strip and put a check in
Clone the selected strip. Select the first strip and
click Add. Now alternate clicking between the left
arrow (below SELECT STRIP) and the Add button
(below the arrows) to quickly add the alternating
strips.
Step 4 - Add Step 4 - Insert

Puts a copy of the selected strip Puts a copy in front of the selected strip
at the end of the quilt
Click the left arrow

and the Add button
repeatedly to quickly
add alternating strips.
48
MAKING A ONE PATCH OR PHOTO PATCHWORK QUILT

A Photo Patchwork quilt is a One Patch quilt filled with solid colors based on the colors of an image you select. Because the
initial steps are the same and a Photo Patchwork quilt is saved as a One Patch quilt, you can follow the same directions for
steps 1-7, then we’ll explain more about a Photo Patchwork quilt.
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > One Patch

or Photo Patchwork. A blank One Patch
2
or Photo Patchwork quilt layout will
appear.
4. Click the down arrow under the Patch

style box. Click a style name in the list
to choose your patch type.
5. Under NUMBER OF UNITS, click the

arrows for Horizontal and Vertical to
set the number of patches. See the EQ8
Online Support site if you question how
Step 3
patches are counted.
6. Under FINISHED SIZE OF UNITS, choose

the size you want. For some styles
Step 5
you choose Width and Height, and for
others, Edge length. Change the size in
Step 4 any of the following ways:

Step 6
increments

Edge Length delete, or insert borders. See page 63.

Height NOTES
you can use the keyboard Tab key to cycle between
Width See page 96 for information on the Paintbrush

How blocks are measured: designing/coloring options.
Edge length is the length of a side of a hexagon or cobblestone.
Height is the vertical measurement through the patch from the lowest point to the highest.
Width is the horizontal measurement through the patch from the furthest left point to the
furthest right.
49
Designing a Photo
Step 8
Patchwork Quilt
Step 9 – Import via the Sketchbook
For the initial layout of a Photo Patchwork
quilt, follow steps 1-7 on page 49. You will see
that the Design tab for this layout is rather
different than the other layout styles. Step 9
2 8. On the Photo Patchwork quilt
View Project
Sketchbook
worktable, click the DESIGN tab.
9. You will need to Import a Photo and

there are two ways to do this:
If the photo you want to use is in the

Project Sketchbook, click View Project
Sketchbook and the Photos section.
Select the photo and click Edit > to
Step 9
Quilt worktable.
Step 9 – Import via the Photo Patchwork palette
If the photo is not in the Project
Sketchbook, click the Import Photo
button. You will need to browse and
locate where the photo is saved on Step 9
Import Photo in
your computer. Select it and click Open. the palette
NOTE
Remember, you can use the Image Worktable to
adjust color or add effects to your photo. (See
Chapter 7.) Then make sure the photo is added
to the Project Sketchbook so you can use the first
option in step 9 to place it on the Quilt Worktable. Step 10
Once you have the photo on the worktable, if you

decide you want to change the style or size of the
shape, click on the LAYOUT tab and make whatever
changes you wish.
10. Click the Position & Resize tool. In the

Fit options
PHOTO PATCHWORK OPTIONS palette,
under POSITION & RESIZE OPTIONS,
click one of the three buttons to resize
the photo automatically: Inside Fit:
• Inside Fit takes the longest edge of

your photo and fits it proportionally
inside the quilt center, thus fitting the
entire photo inside. (If you don’t
adjust your layout to match, you may
have rows of uncolored patches
along the edge of your layout.)
50
Outside Fit: • Outside Fit takes the shortest

edge of your image and lines it up
proportionally with the quilt center.
Some of the longer parts of the
photo may fall outside the quilt
center. Your borders will not be
colored or affected.
• Distort Fit ignores your photo

2
proportions and fits each edge of the
photo to each edge of the quilt
center.
Distort Fit: 11. Click the Position & Resize tool to resize
the photo manually. Click on the photo
and you will have 8 points around the
photo where you can click and drag to
make the photo the size you wish.
If Maintain Aspect Ratio is checked,

when you pull on a corner or side
handle of the photo, the image will
resize but stay proportional and not
skew. If Maintain Aspect Ratio is
unchecked, you can pull on a handle in
any direction to resize the image, but
the photo will distort.
12. (Optional) Click the Mask tool. There

Step 12 are two ways to mask the edges of
the image so you can see which parts
of the image will be used. Masking is
automatic, so you can choose to skip
this step if you don’t care which parts
of the image drop off.
• Click Auto Mask to hide the edges of

the photo that go past the quilt
center.
• To mask manually, click on the photo,

then drag the handles in toward the
center to hide the parts you don’t
want to use.
• To undo a mask, click Reset Mask.
Without Auto Mask With Auto Mask
51
13. Under Photo Patchwork Preview, click

Show Quilt to convert the patches to
solid colors.
14. (Optional) You can switch back to the Step 13

photo and continue resizing or masking
it by clicking the Show Photo button.
2 15. Click the Layer 1 tab below the Quilt

Worktable to view the photo as a
quilt. You can make manual color
adjustments if you wish, just like you
would on any other quilt.
16. Click Add to Project Sketchbook to save

the quilt. You can only save the quilt on
Layer 1, not on the Photo tab.
NOTES Step 15
See Chapter 7 to learn more about scanning,
importing, saving, and other photo-editing options.
Step 16
If you want to set an individual photo in a quilt,
but don’t want to use the Photo Patchwork Quilt
layout, see page 79.
(Optional) Color the Quilt

The colors created when the quilt is converted
to solids are mathematical averages of the Step 17
pixels that overlap that patch. If you want to
replace them with colors or fabrics from the
Sketchbook, you can do so quickly with the
Randomize tool.
17. Click Fabric Tools on the ribbon, then

choose Randomize in the toolbox. Step 18
18. Choose a mapping option:
• Map to colors changes the quilt’s

colors to the closest colors in the
Sketchbook.
• Map to fabrics changes the quilt’s

colors to the closest fabrics in the
Sketchbook.
19. Click on your quilt center. Your success

will depend on the number of fabrics
or colors in your Sketchbook. For more
details on using the Randomize tool,
see page 115. The solid colors have been converted
to fabrics from the Sketchbook
52
MAKING CUSTOM PATCHES IN A ONE PATCH QUILT

Custom patches start like other patch styles, but you can change their shape. Custom patches have light gray “glides,” which
run horizontally or vertically from the patch corners (see step 7 illustration on the next page). Pull on the glides to change the
shape. (These glides do not appear on the quilt, just on the ONE PATCH LAYOUT palette.)
NEW QUILT tab Step 2 Step 1 1. Click the Quilt Worktable button.
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > One Patch. 2

A blank One Patch quilt layout will
appear.
4. Click the down arrow under the Patch

style box to choose either Custom or
Custom (Glide). They are the first and
last choices in the list.
5. Under NUMBER OF UNITS, click the

arrows for Horizontal and Vertical to
set the number of patches. (You can
Step 3
also type in these boxes.) See the EQ8
Online Support site if you question how
patches are counted. It may not be
obvious.
6. Under FINISHED SIZE OF UNITS, choose

the size you want for Width and Height.
Change the size in any of the following
Step 5 ways:
Step 4 • Type a new size in the box

increments
Step 6
53
7. Position your cursor over one of the

gray glides in the display beneath Patch
style. Click, hold, and drag the glides to
a different position. When you release The gray dashed
the mouse, the patch will fill the quilt. lines are “glides”
2 delete, or insert borders. See page 63.
9. Click the DESIGN tab to start filling your Step 7

Drag a glide to a
quilt. See Chapter 4 (page 71). new position
NOTES
Making a custom patch also works the same for a
Photo Patchwork quilt layout.
Step 8 Step 9
If you don’t like the custom patch you’ve created
and want to start shaping it again or use a different
patch style, all you have to do is click the down
Width
arrow under the Patch style box to choose the style
you want.
Height
How blocks are measured: Height is the vertical measurement through the patch
from the lowest point to the highest. Width is the horizontal measurement through
the patch from the furthest left point to the furthest right.
54
MAKING A CUSTOM SET QUILT

A Custom Set quilt can be filled with large and small blocks together in one quilt. This layout style starts out as a large blank
space that you can fill with any blocks, any size, anywhere on your quilt.
All other layout styles have shortcuts for filling the layout quickly. No shortcuts are possible with Custom Set because anything
goes! Create the layout by setting each individual block exactly as you want.

1. Click the Quilt Worktable button. 2
2. Click the NEW QUILT tab > Custom Set.
A blank Custom Set quilt layout will
appear.
4. (Optional) Place a check in the Keep

width and height equal box if you want
the width and height equal. (With this
checked, you only have to adjust either
the Width or Height.)
5. Under SIZE OF CENTER RECTANGLE,

choose the size you want for Width and
Height. You can change the size in any
of the following ways:
Step 3

Step 4

Step 5
increments.
Step 6
6. (Optional) Place a check in the
Maintain the existing block sizes when
resizing the layout box if you’ve already
set blocks in the layout and you’d like
them to remain the same size, even
if you change the dimensions of the
Step 7 Step 8
center rectangle.


NOTES
See page 57 to learn how to use Layout Library quilts (many of which are Custom
Set). These quilts are pre-designed and ready for you to set blocks into them.
See steps 9 – 15 on page 58 for information on how to resize your layout.
55
CREATING A QUILT FROM A BLOCK

EQ8 can turn a block into a quilt layout, but the block must have only horizontal and vertical lines. This feature creates Custom
Set quilts automatically for you, so make sure you understand the rest of the topics in this chapter when you go to fill or edit
your Custom Set quilt.
1. Start on the Quilt Worktable with
blocks in your Sketchbook and the
2 Sketchbook closed.
2. Click Quilt > Create Quilt from Block.
3. Under Select a block on the left,

Sketchbook blocks with only horizontal Step 2
and vertical lines will be shown in a
column. At the right, you will see a
quilt layout, made from the selected
block. You may need to drag the vertical
scrollbar to see all the blocks. Click any
block to see it shown as a quilt layout.
4. Drag the Width and Height slider

bars or type in the boxes to set the
Custom Set quilt size. (Choose a size
proportional to the block’s grid.)
5. Click the Add to Sketchbook button to Step 3

add the quilt layout to the Sketchbook.
Add as many quilts as you’d like. Click
Close when finished. Step 4
6. To use the quilt layout, click the View

Project Sketchbook button, then click
the Quilts section. Select the quilt and
click Edit. Your layout is ready to fill Step 5
with blocks and color.
NOTES
Add your layouts to the My Favorite Layouts, see Step 6
View Project Sketchbook
page 211.
You can draw your own blocks to turn into Custom

Set quilts. Start a new Pieced EasyDraw block (see
page 120). It can be a square or rectangular block.
Make sure the snaps match the dimensions of your
block. Use the Line tool (page 123) to draw only
horizontal or vertical lines (the snaps will help you
keep them straight). Add the block to the Project
Sketchbook and switch to the Quilt Worktable.
When you choose a size in step 4 above, choose
one that is proportional or equal to the dimensions
of your block.
Step 6
56
USING A LAYOUT
LIBRARY QUILT
The Layout Library is filled with over 540 quilts
for you to add to your Project Sketchbook and
use. Many in the Layouts by Style category are
Step 1
Step 5 Custom Set quilts.
2
Add the Layout to Your
Project Sketchbook
1. Click Libraries > Layout Library.
Step 2
2. Click to open the Layouts by Size or
Layouts by Style category. If there is
a + beside them, click on that for the
Step 3
respective examples to appear.
3. Click the size or style you want to see.
Step 6 4. Click the quilt (or quilts) you want to

use. To select multiple items, you can:
Step 7 • CTRL+click (Command+click)

individual items
• SHIFT+click a range of items

Step 7
• CTRL+A (Command+A) to select all
the items in the style.
5. Click the Add to Sketchbook button.

The selected quilt(s) will disappear
temporarily to show they’ve been
added to the Sketchbook.
6. Click Close to return to the worktable.

Step 8
Edit the Layout

7. Click View Project Sketchbook > Quilts
section.
8. Select the Layout Library quilt you want

to use and click the Edit button. You
will be on Layer 1 of the DESIGN tab
and the finished quilt size, as well as
the quilt layout style, will show in the
bottom-right corner of your screen.
Find the quilt layout style and the finished size

of the Layout Library quilt at the bottom-right of the screen.
57
(Optional) Resize the

Layout
If you did not choose a Custom Set quilt, you
can just resize the quilt on the LAYOUT tab and
Step 9
skip these steps. If the layout style is Custom
Step 10
Set, use the following steps.
2 9. On the DESIGN tab, click Block Tools on
the ribbon.
10. Click the Adjust tool in the palette.
11. Click on blocks in the quilt one by one

and view the sizes in the palette under
Adjust Block.
12. Click the LAYOUT tab to view the Size of

quilt’s center layout.
13. If the sizes you view are not to your

View the finished block Step 11
liking (and cannot be solved by adding size in the palette Select a block in the layout
or deleting borders), you will want to
resize the quilt. Decide how you want
the quilt to resize:
Step 12
• Put a check next to Maintain the

existing block sizes when resizing
layout if you want the block sizes to
stay the same (and have white space
added to the right and bottom sides
of the quilt).
• Uncheck Maintain the existing block

sizes when resizing layout if you want
Step 14
everything in the quilt to resize (and
still touch the edges).
Step 13
14. Change the size of the center rectangle
on the CUSTOM SET LAYOUT palette.
15. When you click the DESIGN tab, your

quilt will be resized according to your
choice in step 13.
Maintain existing block sizes unchecked: Maintain existing block sizes checked: White
The blocks resize proportionally to fit the space is added to the right and bottom sides
new quilt size. of the quilt. The block sizes do not change.
58
3
CHAPTER 3
Borders
The border tools in EQ8 allow you great flexibility. You can build your own custom borders from scratch, choosing from
22 styles. Or you can use the Set Auto Borders tool to set pre-designed borders with a click. This chapter tells you
how to use all the border styles and tools.
Border Styles......................................................................................................60
Choosing a Border Style.....................................................................................62
Adding, Deleting, or Inserting a Border..............................................................63
Sizing Borders.....................................................................................................64
Cloning a Border.................................................................................................65
Using the Set Auto Borders Tool.........................................................................66
Keeping Borders when Changing Layouts..........................................................67
Making Each Side a Different Border Style.........................................................68
Understanding “Aligned” Borders......................................................................70
BORDER STYLES
Mitered Corner Blocks Long Vertical
Long Horizontal Blocks Half Drop Blocks
Spaced Squares Diamonds Half Drop Diamonds
Double Diamonds Half Drop Double Diamonds Big & Little Diamonds
60
Chapter 3: Borders
Half Drop Big & Little Diamonds Points Out Points In
Big & Little Points Out Big & Little Points In Tile Squares
Tile On Point Tile On Point Corners
See page 70 for details on two

additional border styles: Blocks
Aligned Inside and Half Drop Aligned.
61
CHOOSING A BORDER Step 1

STYLE
Begin on the Quilt Worktable. If you want to Borders
select a different quilt layout, see page 38. Ribbon
1. Click the BORDERS tab. The BORDERS

ribbon will appear. All quilt layouts have
one, 1-inch Long Horizontal border
by default. You can either resize this
border (see page 64) or choose a new
border style.
3 2. Click on any of the border styles on the
ribbon to select the style and have it
Default 1-inch Long
appear as the quilt’s new border. You Horizontal Border
will know the selected border style is
the quilt border because it will be gray.
Step 2 Click the double arrows
Click on a border style on on the ribbon to see all
NOTE the ribbon to select it. of the border styles.
The default border style for new borders is
Long Horizontal, unless you change it. Click the
Worktable Options button on the left vertical
toolbar. Under Tool Options, click Starting New
Quilts and click the drop-down menu below Default
border style to choose a different style. Click OK.
No matter what style you select to be the default
border, the size will always be 1-inch on all 4 sides.
Blocks in Border Styles

If you have selected a border style with blocks
in it, you can change the number of blocks
in that border. At the bottom of the BORDER
OPTIONS palette the BLOCKS IN BORDER
number boxes are only active for styles with
block spaces.
3. If the number boxes are active, click

the left and right arrows to select the
number of blocks you want. (In some
border styles, only one number box can
be changed.) Step 3
NOTES
Each border can be a different size, but all four
borders must be the same style. For a trick that
gives the effect of making each border a different
style see page 68.
You can set blocks into all border spaces except

You may have to click and
Mitered borders. Blocks will stretch or skew to fit drag the vertical scrollbar to
the border space. see this option in the palette.
62
Chapter 3: Borders
BEFORE
Diamond border selected ADDING, DELETING, OR
INSERTING A BORDER
Begin on the Quilt Worktable. If you want to
select a different quilt layout, see page 38.

ribbon will appear with the BORDER
OPTIONS palette below.
2. To add a border, click the Add button in

the BORDER OPTIONS palette. A blank,
Long Horizontal border with 1-inch
sides will be added around the outside 3
of your quilt.
AFTER
Click Add to add a border outside the quilt
To delete a border, position your cursor
directly over the quilt and click on the
BEFORE
Diamond border selected border you wish to delete. The border
turns gray, showing it is selected. Click
the Delete button in the BORDER
OPTIONS palette. The selected border
will disappear.
To insert a border, position your cursor

directly over the quilt and click on
the border you wish to insert another
border inside of. Click the Insert button
in the BORDER OPTIONS palette. A Long
Horizontal border with 1-inch sides
will be added inside of the border you
selected.
AFTER
Click Delete to remove the currently selected border
NOTES
To add or insert a border with the same size and
BEFORE
settings as another border on your quilt, see how
Long Horizontal border selected
to clone a border on page 65.
If you added or inserted a border, you can now

change the border style and size, see pages 62 and
64 .
AFTER
Click Insert to insert a border inside
the currently-selected border
63
SIZING BORDERS Step 2 Step 1

It’s easy to change the size of the borders, all
together or one at a time.
1. Begin on the Quilt Worktable. If you

want to select a different quilt layout,
see page 38.

OPTIONS palette will appear.
3. Click in the quilt on the border you

3 wish to resize. The border turns gray,
showing it is selected.
Step 3
Sizing All Sides Together

4. By default, all four sides of a border
are the same size (note the check in
the box next to All under Lock size
adjustments). If you want to maintain
this symmetry while changing the size
of the border you can:
All four sides will
size simultaneously
• Hold and drag any of the slider bars when All is checked.
below Left, Top, Right, or Bottom
• Click on either side of any of the Step 4

slider bars to watch the size increase
or decrease by 0.25 inches
• Double-click on the number in any

of the size boxes, type in a new size,
and click on that respective box’s
slider bar.
Sizing the Left & Right

or Top & Bottom Sides
Together
If you want to size the Left and Right border
sides together, click the box next to All to
uncheck it and then click the box next to L+R
to add a checkmark (you can’t add a check to
L+R if there is a check next to All). Resize the
Left and Right border sides simultaneously by
using the options above (only adjusting the
Left and Right slider bars or numbers).
Uncheck All and put a check next to L+R to size the

Left and Right sides of the quilt at the same time.
64
Chapter 3: Borders
Similarly, if you want to size the Top and

Bottom border sides together, click the T+B
box to add a check. (This is only possible when
there is no check next to All). Resize the Top
and Bottom border sides simultaneously by
using the options on page 64 (only adjusting
the Top and Bottom slider bars or numbers).
Sizing Border Sides

Individually
To size the sides individually, make sure there
Uncheck All and put a check next to T+B to size the

are no checks next to any of the Lock size
adjustments boxes (if there are any checks,
3
Top and Bottom sides of the quilt at the same time.
click on them to remove them). Use one of
the options on page 64 to adjust any side.
BEFORE
Big & Little Diamonds border selected
CLONING A BORDER
Begin on the Quilt Worktable with at least
one border you want to clone. If you have not
done this already, see page 62.
1. Click the BORDERS tab. The BORDER

OPTIONS palette will appear.
2. Click (in the quilt) on the border you

wish to clone. The border turns gray,
showing it is selected.
3. In the BORDER OPTIONS palette, make

sure there is a check in the box next to
Step 3 Clone the selected border. If not, click
AFTER on the box so a checkmark appears.
Click Add to add a clone of the selected
border on the outside of the quilt.
4. To put a copy of the selected border
BEFORE
around the outside of the quilt, click
Big & Little Diamonds border selected the Add button. Or, to insert a clone
of the border in front of the selected
border, click the Insert button. A
blank border with the same settings
(style, size, and number of blocks, if
applicable) as the cloned border is
added to or inserted in your quilt.
NOTES
If you clone a border, it will not copy the colors
or blocks used, so you will need to design the
border again in order to add fabrics and blocks. EQ
considers the cloned border a “new” border.
Step 3
If you want to keep your current border style, but
AFTER
Click Insert to insert a clone of the change the quilt layout style, see page 67.
border inside of the selected border.
65
USING THE SET AUTO

BORDERS TOOL
Begin on the Quilt Worktable with a quilt that
has at least one border on it to change. If you
want to change the quilt layout or border
Step 1
styles, see pages 38 and 62.
1. Click on the DESIGN tab and then Auto

Borders from the ribbon options.
Step 2
2. Under SELECT A BORDER STYLE, click
3 the down arrow to display choices.

Click to select the style of your choice.
3. Click and drag the horizontal scrollbar Step 3
(beneath the auto borders style you

selected) to see them all. Click to select
a border.
4. Click the border on your quilt. The

selected border will fill with the auto
border you chose.
5. (Optional) If you want to change the

size or number of blocks, if applicable,
of the auto border, click on the
BORDERS tab and adjust accordingly.
See page 62.
6. (Optional) Click the DESIGN tab and

click on Fabric Tools (see page 96) if you
Use the scrollbar to see all the
want to recolor the auto border. borders in the selected style
NOTES
Auto Border blocks work just like other blocks. If
you don’t like them in the quilt, click a different
block (or Auto Border style) on top of them and the
new one will appear.
On the BORDERS tab, do not change the border

style or your automatic border will disappear from
the quilt. You can only change BORDER SIZE or
BLOCKS IN BORDER.
If you like the border styles available on the

BORDERS tab filled with fabric (rather than using
the border spaces for blocks), try using the Single
Block Patterns from the Auto Borders styles Step 4
instead. These set as one long block and print in Click on the border on the quilt
one pattern instead of many separate ones. to apply the auto border style
Use Tile Squares as your border style before clicking

in an auto border to make them the perfect size.
66
Chapter 3: Borders
KEEPING BORDERS
WHEN CHANGING
LAYOUTS
If you have a quilt with a series of borders you
like, you can reuse these borders on another
quilt. When you switch to a new layout, you
won’t lose your current border settings, but
the blocks, fabrics, or colors will erase from
the border.
Original quilt and borders Begin on the Quilt Worktable and have the
quilt with the borders you like on the screen. 3
1. Click Quilt on the menu at the top and
click Keep Current Borders to put a
check next to it. (The menu will close,
so you will not see the check until the
next time you use the Quilt menu.)
Step 1
2. Now click the NEW QUILT tab and
select a new layout style. You will see
Step 2 the new quilt layout style with the
same border style as your previous
layout.
Choose a
new layout 3. (Optional) If you want to change the
style on the
ribbon size or number of blocks, if applicable,
of the border(s), click on the BORDERS
tab and adjust accordingly. See page 62.
4. Click on the DESIGN tab and click on

Block Tools (see page 73) or Fabric Tools
(see page 96) to set blocks or color the
border(s).
New quilt with same border styles as the original NOTES

The Keep Current Borders option will stay turned
on (have a check next to it) until you click it again to
turn it off.
Keep Current Borders only works during the same

session of EQ8. If you close the program or switch
projects, EQ8 will forget which border you used
last.
67
MAKING EACH SIDE A DIFFERENT BORDER STYLE

To make one border that appears to have different styles on each side, you actually make four separate borders and eliminate
3 sides on each. This is easier than it may sound.
Begin on the Quilt Worktable with the quilt layout that you want to add borders to on the screen, see page 38. We will add
borders to the layout, so only having the default 1-inch Long Horizontal border is perfect.
1. Click the BORDERS tab. The BORDER

OPTIONS palette will appear. Step 1
2. Under BORDER SIZE click on any boxes

under Lock size adjustments that
3 have checks in them to remove the
checkmarks. Now each border side can
Step 2
Uncheck all boxes under Lock size adjustments
be sized independently.
3. If your quilt started with a 1.000” Long

Horizontal border, use this border.
Otherwise, click Add.
Bottom Border
4. Click, hold and drag the Left, Top, and
Step 4
Right slider bars (everything but the
Bottom) one at a time all the way to
the left, so that the size is 0.000. This
eliminates all but the Bottom side.
Step 5
Left Border
5. Click the Add button. This adds a 1-inch
Long Horizontal border all around your
quilt.
6. Click, hold and drag the Top, Right and

Bottom slider bars (everything but
the Left) one at a time all the way to Step 6
eliminates all but the Left side from
your second border.
Step 7
Top Border
7. Click the Add button.
8. Click, hold and drag the Left, Right and

the Top) one at a time all the way to
eliminates all but the Top side from
your third border. Step 8
68
Chapter 3: Borders
Right Border
Step 9 9. Click the Add button.
10. Click, hold and drag the Left, Top and

the Right) one at a time all the way to
eliminates all but the Right side from
your fourth border. Your Top, Bottom
and Left borders will still appear since
they are part of your first, second and
Step 10
third borders.
3
Modify Sizes, Styles and
Step 11
Number of Blocks
Click directly on the quilt to
select the border, or select the
11. Click directly on a border in the quilt
border in the palette. to select it. (Note: In the BORDER
OPTIONS palette under SELECT BORDER
it will let you know which border it is,
i.e. 3 of 4. You can click on the arrows
to toggle between the 4 borders.)
12. Under Select a border style, click the

down arrow to display border style
choices and click on a name to select
it. If your selected style has blocks,
click the BLOCKS IN BORDER arrows to
choose the number of blocks.
13. Three sides will be set to 0.000. If you

need to change the size of the selected
border, modify the side that is NOT set
to 0.000.
Example quilt with each border side a different style and size.
Border Settings: 14. Repeat steps 11-13 for the remaining
Left: Blocks, 4.000”
Top: Points In, 2.500” sides.
Right: Half Drop Diamonds, 4.000”
Bottom: Big & Little Points In, 2.500”
NOTES
Use a similar method to make a quilt with a “pillow
1 1
covering” top border which is different than the
sides and bottom borders. Or, simply eliminate the
top border.
Depending on the order you add the borders, you

4 2 3 4 can get Log Cabin-like or Court House Steps-like
borders.
The exceptions to the border styles that can be

chosen in step 12 are all the borders starting with
3 2 Tile (Tile Squares, Tile On Point, Tile On Point
Order for borders added in Order for borders added in Corners). These must always have 4 sides.
Log Cabin style Court House Steps style
69
UNDERSTANDING “ALIGNED” BORDERS

EQ8 has two border styles found at the far right of the BORDERS ribbon options (you may have to use the double arrows to
see these styles). These styles need a bit more explaining than the others.
When you want two adjacent borders to have rectangular blocks lined up exactly with one another, try setting the inner
border as you like and using an Aligned style on the outer border. Set the number of blocks in the border (Horizontal and
Vertical) to be the same for both borders.
Click the double arrows

Blocks Aligned Inside on the ribbon to see all
of the border styles.
The two example quilts on the right have
a Blocks style border with 4 blocks (gray).
3 Example A has an outer Blocks border with 4
blocks. Notice the blocks in the outer border
do not line up with the blocks of the inner
border. Example B also has 4 blocks, but the The Aligned border styles are the
last two options on the ribbon
outer border style is set to Blocks Aligned
Inside. Notice in the Blocks Aligned Inside
style you actually get two “extra” blocks that Example A
Border blocks do NOT line up when
line up with the corner blocks of the inner both are set to Blocks
border.
This works with other border styles as well.

Example C shows a quilt with a Points In
border. The blocks in the adjacent Blocks
Aligned Inside border line up with the
triangles of the inner border. (This only works
if the same number of Horizontal and Vertical
BLOCKS IN BORDER are selected for both
borders.)
Try these border styles with Blocks Aligned

Example B
Inside: Corner Blocks, Blocks, Half Drop Border blocks DO line up when the 2nd
Diamonds, Half Drop Double Diamonds, Big border is set to Blocks Aligned Inside
& Little Diamonds, Half Drop Big & Little
Diamonds, Points In, Big & Little Points Out,
Bit & Little Points In, and Tile Squares.
Half Drop Blocks Aligned

The Half Drop Blocks Aligned style works the
same way. It is simply a “half-drop” style of Example C
the Blocks Aligned Inside border style. See Points In border (gray) and a Blocks Aligned Inside border
Example D.
Try these border styles with Half Drop Blocks

Aligned: Corner Blocks, Half Drop Blocks,
Diamonds, Double Diamonds, Big & Little
Diamonds, Half Drop Big & Little Diamonds,
Points Out, Big & Little Points Out, and Tile On
Point Corners. Example D
Half Drop Big & Little Diamonds border (gray) and a Half Drop Blocks Aligned border
70
4
CHAPTER 4
Design Quilts with Blocks, Photos, and Embroidery
In this chapter you’ll learn how to further design your quilt by setting blocks (from the library or that you’ve drawn),
photos, and embroidery on it. After setting these items, we’ll show you how to rotate and copy them, and other neat
symmetry tricks. The 3 layers of the quilt that you can work on will be explained. While Layer 2 is typically used for
floating applique elements, including text, and Layer 3 is for quilting stitches, this chapter will suggest other uses. With all
of these options, you multiply your quilt design possibilities, so let your imagination go wild!
Understanding the Quilt Layers..........................................................................72

Setting Blocks on Layer 1....................................................................................73
Setting Motifs on Layer 2 and Stencils on Layer 3..............................................75
Setting Plain Blocks in a Quilt.............................................................................76
Finding a Block, Motif, or Stencil Used in a Quilt...............................................77
Setting Embroidery in a Quilt.............................................................................78
Setting Photos in a Quilt.....................................................................................79
Working with Quilt Snap Settings.......................................................................80
Adjusting Blocks in a Quilt..................................................................................82
Rotating or Flipping Blocks.............................................................................82
Moving, Resizing, Rotating, and Skewing Blocks............................................83
Copying & Pasting, Deleting, or Erasing Blocks in a Quilt...................................85
Creating Fast Designs with Symmetry................................................................87
Stacking, Centering, and Clipping Blocks............................................................88
Adjusting Multiple Blocks at Once......................................................................90
Adding Text to Your Quilt....................................................................................92
UNDERSTANDING THE
QUILT LAYERS Visibility icons on each layer at the
bottom of the Quilt Worktable
Every quilt has 3 layers. Whether you decide
to use all 3 is up to you. Typically, Layer 1 is
used for blocks and plain background fabric,
Layer 2 is used for applique motifs (such as
leaves, flowers, or text that you “float” on top
of your pieced quilt), and Layer 3 is for thread
(quilting stencils and embroidery). Photos can
go on any layer.
There are two basic ways to add items to

quilts: setting and drag and drop. Setting
is used on Layer 1 of all the quilt layouts,
which we’ll call “Standard Layouts.” Standard
layouts are the first 7 layout options on the
4 NEW QUILT tab of the Quilt Worktable (see
page 38). For Custom Set, and Layers 2 and
3 of all layout styles, you’ll use the drag and Quilt with all layers showing
drop method. See pages 74 and 75. To better
understand how items will “drop,” see page
Quilting stencil on Layer 3
74. EQ8 will prompt you if you attempt to
set a block when it should be dragged and
Applique text on Layer 2
dropped, and vice versa.
Quilt with Layer 1 hidden to better
see the applique and stencils
Using the Eye Icon

In EQ8 you will see the tabs for all 3 layers of
the quilt, whether you use them or not, below Hide/show
the quilt design. For any layer, if you want to quilt patch lines
focus on another layer, for example, you can
click on the “eye” on the tab for the layer you
want to temporarily “disappear.” The eye icon
will be crossed out and that layer’s items will
not be visible, though you’ll still be able to
see a transparency of Layer 1. Click on the eye
again for the items to reappear.
Using the Hide/show quilt

patch lines button
If you don’t want to see patch outlines, of any
patch on any layer, including border blocks,
click the Hide/show quilt patch lines button
on the main toolbar. Even if you’ve changed
the thread color for the outline of a block or Quilt showing patch lines
motif, once you click this button those lines
will temporarily disappear. Click it again and
the lines will reappear.
Quilt hiding patch lines
72
Chapter 4: Design Quilts with Blocks, Photos, and Embroidery
Step 1
DESIGN tab SETTING BLOCKS ON
LAYER 1
1. With the block you want to set in
your Project Sketchbook, click the
Quilt Worktable button, then click the
DESIGN tab. On the ribbon, choose
Step 1 Block Tools, then Set Block in the
Block Tools
palette.
2. Click on the block in the palette to

select it (an outline will appear around
Step 1 the block). You may have to use the
Set Block tool
horizontal scrollbar to find it.
3. (Optional) Select a different coloring of

your chosen block by either using the
Step 2
coloring arrows at the bottom-right
below the palette or right-clicking on
4
the block and choosing Select Coloring.
Standard Quilt Layouts

Whether you use a default block, one from
the library, or have drawn your own, it’s easy
to set blocks in your quilt. (This is the method
to use for the first 7 layout options on the
NEW QUILT tab.)
Step 3
4. Click a space on your quilt layout. Or,
drag the block from the palette to the
space in the quilt and release it. The
selected block will pop into the quilt.
NOTES
You can set a block into a sash, cornerstone, border
block, or border strip in the same manner. The
Step 4 selected block will stretch to fit the space.
Blocks cannot be set into mitered borders.
To remove a block immediately after setting it, click

the Undo button, press CTRL+Z (Command+Z), or
click the Erase Block tool and click on the block.
If you drag and drop a block, aim the

top-left corner of the block just inside the
top-left corner of the block space.
When you release the mouse,

the block will pop into the space.
73
5. (Optional) Hold down the CTRL key

(Command key) to set the block into
all spaces on the quilt layout. Or, hold
down the ALT key (Option key) to set
blocks into alternate spaces on the
layout. (Some layouts will require more
than one click to fill.)
6. Click Add to Project Sketchbook.
NOTES Step 5 Step 5

CTRL+click (Command+click) ALT+click (Option+click)
To replace a block, just set a new block on top fills every block space fills alternating block spaces
of the old. You don’t need to erase or delete the
block.
If you attempt to set motifs or stencils on Layer 1,

you will see a pop-up message that this is not a
default option.
4
Custom Set Quilt Layout
Setting blocks on Layer 1 of a Custom Set quilt
is different because the layout does not have
predefined spaces for your blocks to pop into.
4. Drag the block from the palette

to where you want it on the quilt,
and release. It will set either at the
worktable dimensions on which it
was designed or at a default size (see
Notes). See page 80 to learn about
where the block will “snap” on the
quilt.
Step 4
Drag the block from the palette to the quilt center
5. After dragging and dropping the block
on the layout, you can use the Adjust
tool to make adjustments to the size,
position, or rotation. See page 82.
NOTE
Click the Worktable Options button on the main
toolbar. Under Tool Options, click Setting Blocks.
Under Drag and Drop Options you can choose to
have blocks set at the size they were designed, or
at a default size you choose. When you drag and drop the block, it will appear transparent until you release the mouse.
74
Step 1
DESIGN tab SETTING MOTIFS ON
LAYER 2 AND STENCILS
ON LAYER 3
You’ll need motifs and stencils in your Project
Sketchbook, see page 200. Though you can
set pieced blocks on Layer 2, they will not fill
Step 1
Block Tools a space like on Layer 1, but instead will react
like a motif. If you set a stencil on Layer 2, it
will also become a patch/motif. You can set
blocks and motifs on Layer 3, but they will be
converted into stencils. These steps are used
Step 1
Set Block tool
on Layers 2 and 3 of any quilt layout.
1. With the motif or stencil you want to

set in your Project Sketchbook, click the
Step 2
Quilt Worktable button, then click the
DESIGN tab. On the ribbon, click Block 4
Tools, then Set Block in the palette.
2. On the Motifs or Stencils tabs, click on

the motif or stencil in the palette to
select it (an outline will appear around
the motif or stencil). You may have to
use the horizontal scrollbar to find it.
Step 3 3. Click the Layer 2 tab below the quilt

worktable to set a motif or Layer 3 tab
to set a stencil.
4. Drag the motif or stencil from the

palette to where you want it on the
quilt, and release. It will set either at
the worktable dimensions on which it
was designed or at a default size (see
Note on page 74). See page 80 to learn
about where the motif or stencil will
“snap” on the quilt.
5. After dragging and dropping the motif

Step 4 – Drag and drop a motif to Layer 2 of the quilt or stencil on the layout, you can use the
Adjust tool to make adjustments to the
size, position, or rotation. See page 82.
NOTE
To learn how to add text to Layer 2, see page 92.
Step 4 – Drag and drop a stencil to Layer 3 of the quilt
75
SETTING PLAIN BLOCKS Step 1

DESIGN tab
IN A QUILT
When you’d like to use a plain square or
rectangle of fabric in a Custom Set layout, you
can add a “plain block” to the Blocks palette.
You can also set plain blocks on Layer 1 of a Step 1

standard layout, but it’s not really necessary Block Tools
because you can just color the block spaces
with the Paintbrush tool.
The following steps use a Custom Set layout. Step 1

Set Block tool
1. With a Custom Set quilt layout on the
worktable, click the DESIGN tab. On the
ribbon, click Block Tools, then Set Block
3 dot button
in the palette, and the Blocks tab.
4
2. Click the 3 dot button in the palette
and choose Add Plain Block. A plain
block will appear at the end of the
palette and will automatically be
selected.
3. Drag the block to where you want it on

the quilt, and release. It will set at the
default size (see Notes). See page 80 to
learn about where the block will “snap”
on the quilt.
4. After dragging and dropping the block Step 2

on the layout, you can use the Adjust
tool to make adjustments to the size,
position, or rotation. See page 82.
NOTES
To make the plain block the background block of
your Custom Set quilt, check out the size of the
center rectangle on the LAYOUT tab. Then use the
Adjust tool to make the block’s position 0.000,
0.000 and the block’s size match the numbers from
the LAYOUT tab. See page 55.
Click the Worktable Options button on the main

toolbar. Under Tool Options, click Setting Blocks
and there are Drag and Drop Options. You can have Step 3 – Drag and drop the plain block on the quilt
blocks set at the size they were designed, or set at
a default size you choose.
76
Step 1
DESIGN tab FINDING A BLOCK,
MOTIF, OR STENCIL
USED IN A QUILT
If you want to find a block, motif, or stencil
that you’ve already used in your quilt, but
can’t remember where it is or quickly locate
Step 1
Block Tools it (i.e., you have hundreds of blocks in your
Project Sketchbook or many colorings of the
same block), it’s as simple as clicking on the
Eyedropper tool.
Step 1
Eyedropper tool 1. With the quilt where the item you want
to find is on the worktable, click the
DESIGN tab. On the ribbon, click Block
Step 3 Tools, then the Eyedropper tool in the
Click on the block in the quilt and it will automatically be selected in the palette.
palette.
4
2. Click the layer tab, below the quilt,
where the item is set.
3. Click on the item in the quilt you want

to identify. That item will be selected
with an outline around it in the palette.
4. If Toggle automatic tool snapping is

selected in the palette, the Set Block
tool will be engaged and you can
immediately set the “found” item in the
layout.
Step 2 NOTES
If you want to keep finding blocks using the
Eyedropper tool, click on the Toggle automatic tool
snapping button to disengage it.
If the coloring is saved in the Project Sketchbook,

the correct coloring will also be selected, but if
the coloring is new, or not added to the Project
Sketchbook yet, the last coloring in the block will be
selected.
Toggle automatic tool snapping is selected, which means that after you “find” a block,
the Set Block tool will automatically be selected so you can immediately set the block.
77
SETTING EMBROIDERY Step 1

DESIGN tab
IN A QUILT
To set embroidery on Layer 3 of any quilt you
need an embroidery design in your Project
Sketchbook, see page 200. These steps are
used for any quilt layout.
1. With the embroidery design in your

Project Sketchbook, click the Quilt
Step 2
Worktable button, then click the
DESIGN tab.
2. Click the Layer 3 tab below the Quilt

Worktable.
3. On the ribbon, click Embroidery Tools,

then Set Embroidery in the palette.
4
4. Click on the embroidery design in the
palette to select it, drag it to where
you want it on the quilt, and release.
It will set at its recorded size. See page
80 to learn about where the design will
“snap” on the quilt. Step 3
NOTES
The embroidery designs included with EQ8 are not
sewable/digitized patterns. The digitizable designs
are sold and copyrighted by the embroidery
manufacturers. Contact the manufacturer listed
on the Notecard for specific information regarding
the actual files you would receive if you bought the
embroidery card.
EQ8 may allow you to manipulate the designs more

than you can sew them. Pay attention to the size
you set in EQ with regard to your possible hoop
sizes.
Step 4
Color embroidery with the Thread Tools, see page

105.
Embroidery designs are displayed in draft quality by default. To change to 3 dimensional,
right-click on the design and choose Embroidery Drawing > 3 Dimensional. You can switch
To delete the design, use the Adjust tool, select the it back to Draft Quality by right-clicking on it again and selecting this option.
design, and click your keyboard Delete key.
To learn how to rotate, flip, and adjust the size

and position, see page 82. You can stay on the
Embroidery Tools palette, as the tools will work the
same way.
Draft Quality 3 Dimensional
78
SETTING PHOTOS IN A QUILT

You can set a photo on Layer 2 of any quilt, but only on Layer 1 of a Horizontal or Custom Set layout. To set photos in your
quilt, you need a photo in your Project Sketchbook. Photos can come from the Photo Library or be imported (see pages 200 or
208).
Step 1
DESIGN tab Layer 1 of a Horizontal Quilt
1. Start with a Horizontal Quilt layout on
your worktable. Click the DESIGN tab
and the Layer 1 tab below the Quilt
Worktable.
2. On the ribbon, click the Photo Tools

This block space option and Set Photo tool from the
has been left blank
because we intend palette.
to set a photo in
the space. 3. Select the photo you wish to set.
4. Click in the block space on the quilt to 4

set it.
Step 1
Layer 1 tab
Custom Set Quilts or Layer 2

1. Start with any quilt layout. Click the
DESIGN tab and the layer tab below the
Quilt Worktable where you want to set
your photo: Layer 1 (Custom Set only),
or Layer 2 (any style).
2. On the ribbon, click the Photo Tools

option and Set Photo tool from the
palette.
Step 2
3. Click on the photo in the palette to
select it, drag it to where you want it
on the quilt, and release. It will set at
its recorded size. See page 80 to learn
about where the photo will “snap” on
the quilt.
Step 3
NOTES
Photos must be set as squares or rectangles. They
will not clip to fit triangles or borders.
Photos can be rotated, resized and repositioned

Step 4 using the Adjust tool on Layer 1 (Custom Set) or
Layer 2 (any style), see page 83. You can stay on the
Photo Tools palette, as the Adjust tool will work the
same way.
79
WORKING WITH QUILT

SNAP SETTINGS
There are adjustable snap settings that make
working in a Custom Set quilt layout or on
Layers 2 or 3 of any quilt layout easier. If
you’re in either the Sketchbook Blocks or
Sketchbook Photos palette, the QUILT GRID
SETUP will appear when you select the Adjust
tool, but if you want to change the settings
prior to setting an item, follow these steps.
Changing Snap Settings

1. Click the Worktable Options tool (on
the main toolbar).
4 2. Click Snap Settings (under Tool

Options).
Step 1
3. The 3 checkboxes (under Grid Settings) Worktable
correspond to the 3 buttons under the Options
QUILT GRID SETUP, so you can check
them here, or in the palette, when the
Adjust tool is selected:
Show grid (Custom Set) – determines

whether or not you see the grid lines
on a new Custom Set quilt (that doesn’t Step 2
have Layer 1 completely filled yet). For
small grid increments, not all the grid
lines can draw when you’re zoomed out
(or your whole quilt would be pink, or
filled with grid lines). But, the grid lines
are there and you’ll see more of them
draw as you zoom in.
Snap block position to grid – if this is Step 3

turned on, when you move a block,
motif, stencil, embroidery, applique
text, or photo with the Adjust tool, it’s
position will snap to the grid when you
release.
Snap block size to grid – if this is

turned on, when you drag the corner
or side handle of a block, motif, stencil,
embroidery, applique text, or photo
with the Adjust tool, the size will snap
to the grid when you release. The same three snap settings are available on the
Quilt Worktable when you choose the Adjust tool.
80
4. Beside Grid snap every (or under Grid

Snap Increments in the palette when
the Adjust tool is selected) change the
setting by clicking the drop-down arrow
and choosing a different increment.
5. (Optional) Since you’re in the Quilt

Worktable Options box, you may want
to verify your Quilt Ruler origins and
Step 4 turn them on. Click View Settings
(under Tool Options). Change the origin
to one of the 3 options listed. We
recommend setting it to Top left corner
of quilt’s center layout so it matches
the Graph Pad’s numbering system.
6. Click OK.
7. (Optional) Click View from the menu 4

bar, then Quilt Rulers to put a check
Step 5 next to it and turn on your quilt rulers.
NOTES
You will not see the grid lines if you choose a quilt
layout other than Custom Set. You will also not see
the grid lines once your Custom Set quilt’s Layer 1
is filled.
When you resize a block using the handles and

Step 6 Adjust tool, it may move slightly. Don’t forget to
move the block slightly to snap its position back
into place.
If you have trouble positioning a design on the

quilt, check your snap settings. You may want to try
turning Snap block position to grid off.
We recommend resizing a block before rotating if

you are using the handles. The degree may change
and the block may skew if you don’t.
Step 7
Quilt rulers
81
ADJUSTING BLOCKS IN A QUILT

Rotating or Flipping Blocks
The Rotate or Flip block tools work on all
blocks, including motifs and stencils, and
embroidery designs, set in all quilt layouts.
The block must be asymmetric (not the same
on all sides) to notice a rotation or flip.
Symmetrical block Asymmetrical block
1. On the Quilt Worktable click the
DESIGN tab, then Block Tools on the Step 1
ribbon. Be on the layer on which you DESIGN tab
set the block, motif, or stencil. (If you
want to adjust an embroidery design,
you’ll need to select the Embroidery
Tools option and be on Layer 3 below
the Quilt Worktable.)
4 2. Click the Rotate tool. Click on an Step 1
Block Tools
asymmetrical block in the quilt. It will
rotate 90 degrees clockwise with each
click.
Or
Click the Flip tool. Click on an Step 2
Rotate
asymmetrical block in the quilt. It will
flip horizontally (from left to right) with Original block
each click.

your quilt with any rotation or flip you
like.
NOTES
1 click – 90 degrees 2 clicks – 180 degrees
You can flip or rotate after you’ve flipped or
rotated any blocks. Try clicking on the 2 tools in
different orders to discover different patterns or
arrangements.
CTRL+click (Command+click) rotates/flips every

block in your quilt on that layer. ALT+click
(Option+click) rotates/flips alternate blocks in your
quilt on Layer 1 only. 3 clicks – 270 degrees 4 clicks – 360 degrees
(back to original)
Rotating and flipping works on sashes and borders.
When rotating a motif, stencil, or embroidery

design, the design will rotate within the block and
the position will not change. To rotate the position
in a Custom Set layout, or on Layers 2 or 3, see Step 2
page 83. Flip
These tools do not work on photos or text. Instead, Original block 1 click – Flips block
see pages 79 or 93. horizontally
82
Moving, Resizing, Rotating,

Step 1
DESIGN tab
and Skewing Blocks
Begin with a quilt layout and blocks or photos
set on Layer 1 of a Custom Set quilt, or blocks,
motifs, stencils, photos, or embroidery designs
on Layers 2 or 3 of any quilt layout.

DESIGN tab, then Block Tools on the
ribbon.
Step 2 2. Click the Layer tab (below the Quilt

Step 3 Worktable) on which the item is set.
Blocks and photos are on Layer 1 of a
Custom Set quilt, motifs and text are on
Layer 2, and stencils and embroidery
are on Layer 3 of all other quilt layouts.
4
3. Click the Adjust tool.
4. Click the item in the quilt to select it.

It will have a dotted box around it with
little black squares at the sides and
corners. These squares are “handles”
and are used to modify the block.
5. For the following adjustments, there

are 2 options for every change:
Step 4
To move the block – Position your
cursor inside the dotted box so your
cursor looks like a cross with arrows
Move – Click in the center and drag to a new location and click and hold as you drag the block
Cursor becomes a cross with arrows to a new location. Or, type directly in
the X- and Y-Axis boxes in the palette to
change the position. These coordinates
are starting from the top-left corner of
the quilt center (borders not included).
If you drag the item to a new location
you will see the numbers change in the
X- and Y-Axis boxes.
You can also move the selected item by changing

the X- and Y-Axis coordinates in the palette.
83
To resize the block – Position your Resize – Click and drag handle
cursor over one of the handles so Cursor becomes a double-ended arrow when held over the handles
your cursor looks like a double-ended

arrow and click and hold as you drag
the handle to a new location. Or, type
directly in the Width and Height boxes
to change the size. If you use the
handles to resize the item, you’ll also
see the numbers change in the Width Cursor
and Height boxes accordingly.
To rotate the block – Hold down the

keyboard CTRL key (Command key) and
click in the center of the item you want
to rotate. Position your cursor over
one of the corner handles. Click and You can also change the size of the selected item using the Width
hold the corner handle as you move and Height boxes in the palette. Put a check in Preserve aspect ratio
4 it around the center of the block. The while resizing if you’d like to keep the proportions the same.
block will spin around its center and

stop when you release the mouse. Or,
Rotate – CTRL+click (Command+click) and spin handle
you can type a specific degree in which Cursor becomes a circle with an arrow on one
you want the item to rotate in the end when held over the corner handles
Block Rotation box. If you rotate the
item using the handles, you will see the
angle change in the Block Rotation box.
6. To skew the block – hold down your

keyboard CTRL key (Command key) and
click in the center of the block. Position
your cursor over one of the side Cursor
handles so your cursor looks like two
parallel lines. Click and hold as you slide
the side handle up/down or left/right
to a new position. The selected item
will reshape itself as you move the side
handles. Notice the Width, Height, and
X- and Y-Axis boxes all may change. You can also change the rotation of the selected
item using the Block Rotation box in the palette.
7. Click outside of the dotted selection
box to deselect an item.
Skew – CTRL+click (Command+click) and slide side handle
8. Click Add to Project Sketchbook to save Cursor becomes two parallel lines
any adjustments you like. when held over the side handles
NOTES
Snap settings will affect moving, rotating, and
resizing the blocks, motifs, stencils, photos, and
embroidery designs. See page 80.
If you don’t like an adjustment, immediately after

making the change, click the Undo button. Or press Cursor
CTRL+Z (Command+Z) on your keyboard.
84
Step 1
DESIGN tab
COPYING & PASTING,
DELETING, OR ERASING
BLOCKS IN A QUILT
Begin with a quilt layout and blocks or photos
set on Layer 1 of a Custom Set quilt, or blocks,
motifs, stencils, photos, or embroidery designs
on Layers 2 or 3 of any quilt layout.

Step 2
ribbon.
Step 3
2. Click the Layer tab (below the Quilt

Worktable) on which the item is set.
Layer 2, and stencils and embroidery 4
3. Click the Adjust tool.

Step 4 4. Click the item in the quilt to select it.
Click the item on the
quilt to select it. Step 5
5. To copy and paste a selected item -
Using the palette: Under SINGLE SELECT
OPTIONS, click Copy, then click Paste.
Using the keyboard: Press CTRL+C

(Command+C), then CTRL+V
(Command+V).
A copy of the selected item will appear,

and this new pasted copy will be
The pasted block will appear down and selected. You can now alter it by using
to the right of the original block.
any of the adjustment options, see
page 82.
6. To delete the selected item – under the

SINGLE SELECT OPTIONS, click Delete,
or press the keyboard Delete key.
7. If you like the changes you made, click

Add to Project Sketchbook to save the
Step 6
new designs.
Step 7
85
Erasing a Block in a Quilt

You can use the Erase (Block) tool to erase blocks, motifs, stencils, photos, or embroidery. The difference between this and the
Delete tool is that whatever you erase will be gone, but the outline of that item will still be there and can now be filled with
fabric or new applicable items (i.e., a new motif on Layer 2, a new stencil on Layer 3, etc.).
1. On the Quilt Worktable click the Step 1

DESIGN tab, then Block Tools on the DESIGN tab
ribbon.

3. Click the Erase (Block) tool.

Step 2
4 4. Click the item you want to erase and it Step 3
will “disappear,” leaving a blank space
in your quilt.
5. (Optional) If you used the Erase tool on

Layer 1 of a Custom Set quilt, or Layers Step 4
2 or 3 of any quilt layout, there will Using the Erase
Block tool on Layer
be a blank block outline. To get rid of 1 removes the block
this outline, click the Adjust tool, click from the space
on the outline, and click Delete in the
palette.
6. You can now fill these “blank” spaces by

coloring them with fabric or setting in
new blocks, motifs, stencils, photos, or
embroidery, see pages 96 or 73.
NOTES
To erase all the blocks in the quilt, click Quilt on
the menu bar, then Erase Quilt, or hold down your
keyboard CTRL key (Command key) as you click
on the quilt with the Erase tool. You cannot use
CTRL+Z (Command+Z) if you erase everything.
ALT+click (Option+click) erases alternate blocks

Erase Block does not remove the space you’ve created for a motif or stencil.
in your quilt. On some complex quilt layout Use the Adjust tool and the Delete option if you’d like to remove the blank space.
styles, you’ll need to repeat these steps to erase
alternates or all.
Erasing is not really necessary; it’s quicker to just

replace a “wrong” block with a “right” block in one
step by clicking the new block on top of the old.
To erase all blocks in the quilt, click Quilt

on the menu bar and choose Erase Quilt.
86
CREATING FAST DESIGNS WITH SYMMETRY

The Symmetry tool automates flipping and rotating on all blocks simultaneously. It works on Layer 1 for all layouts, but works
best with a Horizontal layout with no sashing, as in the example. Be sure to choose asymmetrical blocks, which are not the
same on all sides, to see a difference.
Begin with a quilt completely filled with asymmetrical blocks (see pages 39 or 73).
Step 1 1. On the Quilt Worktable, click the

DESIGN tab DESIGN tab. On the ribbon, click Block
Tools, then Layer 1 below the Quilt
Worktable.
2. Click the Symmetry tool from the

palette.
Step 1 3. Click on a block in the quilt and watch

Block Tools
them all change, a combination of
flipping and rotating. There are 16
different symmetries built into the tool, 4
so you can click 16 times to see all the
Step 1 variations. On click 17 the quilt will
Step 2
return to the way it looked before you
used the tool.

any quilt designs you like.
NOTES
If you use the Symmetry tool in quilt layouts other
than Horizontal, you may have to click on different
blocks to make them all flip and rotate (i.e., in a
Baby Blocks layout, you will need to click on at least
3 blocks on the different visual levels). If it takes
Original quilt more than one CTRL+click (Command+click) to set
blocks in a layout, then it will also take the same
number of clicks when using the Symmetry tool.
If your quilt design doesn’t change as you click,

check your block. It must be asymmetric (not
the same on all sides) in color or design, to make
symmetries noticeable.
To replace rotated blocks and have the new blocks

remain rotated, click the Worktable Options tool.
Under Tool Options, click Setting Blocks and check
Maintain the block rotation from the current quilt
when replacing blocks. Click OK.
Three examples of the
16 possible symmetries
Step 4
87
STACKING, CENTERING, AND CLIPPING BLOCKS

For all of these tools you must begin with a quilt layout and blocks or photos set on Layer 1 of a Custom Set quilt, or blocks,
motifs, stencils, photos, text, or embroidery designs on Layers 2 or 3 of any quilt layout.

DESIGN tab, then Block Tools on the Step 1
ribbon. DESIGN tab

3. Click the Adjust tool. You may need to

use the vertical scrollbar beside the
4 palette to see all the SINGLE SELECT Step 2
Step 3
OPTIONS.
4. Click the item in the quilt to select it. It

will have a dotted box around it.
5. You can perform any of the following

options:
• Stacking blocks
• Centering blocks
• Clipping blocks
See the following page for details on

each of these options.
NOTES
Clipping works well for stencils on Layer 3 of on-
point quilts that need to be over the quilt blocks,
but not over the borders.
Stacking
options
Clipping a block only affects the way the block
appears on the screen and in exported images. If
you print the pattern for a clipped block, you will Centering
options
still get the full pattern.
Clipping
options
88
Stacking Blocks
You can layer blocks simply by moving them on top of one another, but
they may not overlap in the order you like. To change this order, you can
click on any of the four Order tools to change the stacking order.
Stacking blocks is a great technique for applique motifs in the corners of Original block
position
borders that need to overlap.
Bring to Front Send to Back Bring Forward Send Backward

This will make the selected This will make the selected This will move the selected block This will move the selected block
block the top-most block. block the lowest block. up one in the stacking order. down one in the stacking order.
4
Centering Blocks
You can calculate where a block is centered by measuring the size of the block and the quilt, or you can use either of the
Center tools. Centering blocks is helpful for when you are starting a Custom Set quilt with a center medallion block.
Original block position Center Horizontally Center Vertically Clicking both Center tools
This will space the block equally This will space the block equally This will put the center
between the left and right sides between the top and bottom of the block in the exact
of the quilt center. It will not of the quilt center. It will not center of the quilt.
change its vertical position. change its horizontal position.
Clipping Blocks at the Border

This tool is used when you have blocks at the edge of the quilt center or overlapping a border. (If your block is set in the center
of your quilt, you will not notice any change.) There are three choices for this option.
Clip to Edge Clip to Border Unclip Block

This will clip the block to stay within the This will clip the block at the outer This will allow the block to hang over
quilt center (stop before the borders). edge of the quilt. and past the quilt’s outer border.
89
ADJUSTING MULTIPLE BLOCKS AT ONCE

For these tools, like for the Single Select Options (see page 88), they can be used if you are on Layer 1 of a Custom Set quilt or
Layers 2 or 3 of any layout. The only difference is that you must have more than 1 block selected in order for these options to
appear in the palette.
1. On the Quilt Worktable click the Step 1

DESIGN tab
ribbon.
2. Click the Layer tab on which the items

are set. Blocks and photos are on Layer
1 of a Custom Set quilt, motifs and
text are on Layer 2, and stencils and
embroidery are on Layer 3 of all other
quilt layouts.
Step 2
3. Click the Adjust tool. You may need to Step 3
4 use the vertical scrollbar beside the

palette to see all the MULTI SELECT Step 4
OPTIONS.
4. With both of the following options,

you will need to decide which block
is set in the correct position or is the
correct size for the design you want.
Click this block first to select it. It will
have a dotted box around it and will be
your anchor. All other blocks you select The first block you select is the “anchor.” The settings for the
other blocks you select will come from the anchor block.
will move or resize according to your
anchor’s position.
5. Hold down the SHIFT key on your

keyboard and click on the remaining
blocks you want to adjust according
to your anchor block. An outline will
encompass all the blocks you select.
You can release your SHIFT key and all
of the blocks will remain selected (until
Step 5 – Select the remaining blocks
you click outside of the quilt area). while holding down the SHIFT key
6. You can perform the following options:
• Align blocks
• Size blocks
See the following page for details on

each of these options. Align
options
Same Size
options
90
Anchor block
Aligning Multiple Blocks
These four options allow you to quickly align
multiple blocks to your anchor block.
Align Left Sides – this will make the selected

blocks line up with the left side of the anchor
block.
Align Right Sides – this will make the selected

blocks line up with the right side of the anchor
block.
Align Tops – this will make the selected blocks

line up with the top of the anchor block.
Align Tops used to make the tops of all Align Bottoms – this will make the selected
the blocks line up with the anchor block blocks line up with the bottom of the anchor
block. 4
Using the Same Size Buttons

These three options allow you to quickly make multiple blocks the same size.
Anchor block
Select the remaining blocks
while holding down the SHIFT key
Same Width Same Height

This will make the selected blocks have the This will make the selected blocks have the
same horizontal width as the anchor block. same vertical height as the anchor block.
NOTES
Using the Aligning tools allows you to quickly and
easily line up quilting stencils or rows of blocks.
Same Width/Height
This will make the selected blocks have the Remember when using the Same Size options that
same width and height as the anchor block. they are for horizontal and vertical dimensions, not
edge length of on-point blocks. When using the
Same Size options on rotated and unrotated blocks
at the same time don’t expect them to have the
same edge length.
91
ADDING TEXT TO YOUR Step 1

DESIGN tab
QUILT
EQ8 is not a word processor, but it lets you
“write” on your quilt (in any layout). You can
print applique text as templates to get the
patterns for each letter.
1. On the Quilt Worktable, click the

Step 2
DESIGN tab.
2. Click Layer 2 below the quilt worktable.

The Text Tools option will become
available.
3. On the ribbon, click the Text Tools

option. The APPLIQUE TEXT palette will Step 3
appear.
4
4. Under Select typeface, click the down
arrow to see your list of font choices
and click on one to select it. The name
of the font is written in its style to give
you a sneak peek of how your text
will appear. These are TrueType fonts
installed on your computer. (You can Step 4
always change the typeface later.)
Step 5
5. Under Approximate size in inches,
drag the slider bar to set a starting size.
Step 6
The size is approximate (font sizes vary
depending on the style). Rely on how
the text looks on your quilt. (You can
always change the size later.)
6. Under Additional formatting, select any

other options you want, such as bolding
the text or aligning it in the center. Be
aware that all choices you make will
apply to all words in the same text box.
(You can make more than one text box
in order to apply different options.)
7. Hold down your keyboard SHIFT key

and point your mouse cursor at the
quilt where you want the text to start.
Click and hold as you drag diagonally
to make a box, then release the mouse.
Don’t worry about the size of the text
box because it resizes to a small box
which enlarges as you type. Step 7
Hold down SHIFT while dragging to create a box for the text.
92
8. Start typing and you’ll see your text

appear in the box. The text won’t wrap,
so to make a new line of text, press
your keyboard ENTER key. You control
how long each line is, and how many
lines there are. While the Applique Text
box is still selected on the quilt, you
can resize or choose a different font
(see steps 4-6 above) and your font will
change accordingly on the quilt.
9. You can move, rotate, and resize your

Step 8
text, just as if it’s a block. To change
the text box, click the Adjust tool and
click the text box to select it. You can
manually move, rotate or change the
size of the text, or you can also use
Step 9 respective boxes in the APPLIQUE TEXT
palette, under Adjust Text. See page 83.
4
Click on the text box to select it. You can stay on the Text Tools palette,
as the tool will work the same way.
10. Since the text box acts as if it’s a block,

if you have multiple text boxes or other
blocks/motifs on Layer 2, you can
quickly stack them if they overlap, or
reposition or align them. See page 88.
NOTES
All text in one box will have the same format.
You must have a new text box for each different
typeface, size, format, or text color.
Move your cursor over the text box and it Move your cursor over a handle and To change the text after it has been deselected,
will change to a cross with four arrows. You it will change to a double-ended arrow.
can then drag the text box to a new location. You can then drag to resize the text box. click the Set Text tool, click the text box to reselect
it, and change the typeface, resize, or reformat as
described in steps 4-6.
To recolor, click the Fabric Tools option, click the

Paintbrush tool, select a fabric or solid color, and
click on the text. The entire text in the box will
change to the newly-selected color.
Text prints only as templates and all letters in the

selected box will print together. Using the PRINT
& EXPORT tab, remember to be on Layer 2, click
the text-box outline and the Templates option will
appear in the PRINT PATTERNS palette. To learn
more about printing templates, see page 218.
You can copy and paste entire text boxes with the
Adjust tool, see page 83. If you only want a portion
of the text, you can create a new text box with only
Each word in the quilt above is in a separate text box, those letters or words.
allowing different typefaces to be used for each one.
93
5
CHAPTER 5
Design with Fabrics, Colors, and Thread
EQ8 lets you design your blocks or quilts with fabrics, solid colors, and threads by using easy and fun tools. You’ll have
hundreds of solid colors and thread and thousands of fabrics to choose from. You can also import your own fabric scans
and create new color palettes. Several tools help you fine-tune your design by fussy cutting or rotating fabric, or adding
outlines of colored thread around patches. One feature even makes dramatic color changes with each click of the mouse.
Designing with the Paintbrush Tool....................................................................96

Designing with the Spraycan Tool.......................................................................99
Designing with the Swap Color Tool.................................................................100
Using the Fussy Cut Tool...................................................................................101
Using the Rotate Fabric Tool.............................................................................102
Finding Items with the Eyedropper Tool...........................................................104
Using the Thread Tools.....................................................................................105
Adding Thread Colors.......................................................................................106
Sorting Fabrics or Colors...................................................................................107
Understanding Block Colorings........................................................................109
Adding New Solid Colors..................................................................................110
Adding Shades & Tints or Tones.......................................................................112
Adding Grades..................................................................................................113
Changing the Default Palette............................................................................114
Using the Randomize Tool................................................................................115
Modifying Color with the Randomize Tool.......................................................116
DESIGNING WITH THE PAINTBRUSH TOOL

Once you have drawn a block or set a block in a quilt layout, you can color it with fabrics or solid colors. If you don’t have a
quilt set with blocks yet, see pages 38 and 73.
Step 1
Coloring with the Default
Paintbrush Style
1. On the Block Worktable, click the
COLOR tab and then Fabric Tools or on
the Quilt Worktable click the DESIGN Block Worktable
tab, and then Fabric Tools. Click the
Paintbrush tool. The SKETCHBOOK OR
FABRICS & COLORS palette will
appear. The palette is slightly different Step 1
depending on the Worktable.
The steps below use the Paintbrush tool’s

One Dot Brush. It is the only brush style
available on the Block Worktable and one of
five Paintbrush styles on the Quilt Worktable
Quilt Worktable
(see page 98 for details). This brush is
automatically selected for you unless you have
5 previously chosen another brush style.
NOTE Step 1
Paintbrush tool
Coloring errors are caused by drawing errors.
Whether you’re drawing a pieced, applique, or
combination block, there are requirements that
need to be met. See pages 120, 129, and 140.
2. Click the Fabrics tab in the palette to

see the fabric prints or the Colors tab Most recently
used fabrics
to see the solid colors. Use the scrollbar Fabrics and and colors
below the swatches to see all of them. Colors tabs
You can also change the number of
items that display at one time. On the
will see a series of display buttons.
Click a button with a larger square to
see fewer items, or one with a smaller
Above the Fabrics and Colors tabs, Use the

you will see a long rectangle showing scrollbar to see
more swatches
the Most recently used fabrics and
colors. If you have not used any fabrics Display buttons
or colors, this area will be a light gray
(“blank”) rectangle. Once you have
fabrics and colors in this palette, you
can click on them and use them again
to color your block.
96
Chapter 5: Design with Fabrics, Colors, and Thread
Above the Most recently used rectangle

Currently selected you will see the Currently selected
fabric or color
fabric or color. If you click on the
Detach button horizontal arrow in the bottom-right
corner, the rectangle moves on top of
the worktable. It can be moved over
the worktable by clicking on the white
title bar of the rectangle and dragging
it around. To position it back in the
palette, click the X in the top-right
corner.
Detached Fabric 3. Click a fabric or color to select it, then

Preview click a patch in your block to color it
with the selected fabric or color. (If your
whole block colors or you cannot color
a patch, see the Notes below.)
4. To recolor, click a different fabric or

color in the palette and click the patch
again. The patch will be newly colored.
5. (Optional) On the Quilt Worktable, hold

down the CTRL key (Command key) to 5
color one patch in matching blocks. Or,
hold down the ALT key (Option key) to
When the Fabric Preview is detached from the palette, it “floats” on the worktable. color one patch in alternate matching
You can move it by clicking and dragging on the title bar, or resize it by hovering over
an edge until your cursor changes to a double-ended arrow and dragging. blocks. This is a time-saving step.
NOTES
When drawing any style of a pieced block, if you
lose lines, or the whole block colors at once when
you click on the COLOR tab, you have a line that is
not connected properly. You will have to go back to
the DRAW tab and draw the lines again. You might
have to Zoom In to be sure lines are connected, or
change your grid, see pages 120 or 129.
If you’re drawing an applique block and can’t color

patches, the entire background colors as one, or
are only seeing lines on the COLOR tab, then your
patch is not closed. Return to the DRAW tab and
make sure patches are closed. You might have to
Zoom IN to check that the nodes of the patch are
connected. You can also use pre-drawn patches.
Step 3 See page 140.
Click on a swatch in the palette to select it,
then click on a patch in the quilt to color it.
Color your quilt quickly using the other design
tools, see pages 99 and 100.
97
Coloring with the Other Step 1
Paintbrush Styles
The four remaining styles are only on the Quilt
Worktable. They are good for coloring quickly,
especially on One Patch quilts.

DESIGN tab. On the ribbon, click Fabric
Tools, then the Paintbrush tool from
the palette. Choose and click on one of
the Paintbrush styles:
Freehand Brush – paints a freehand

line of color.
Line Brush – paints a straight line of Paintbrush

styles
color.
Rectangle Brush – paints a rectangle

outline of color.
Freehand Brush
5 Oval Brush – paints an oval outline of

color.
2. Click a fabric or color in the palette.
3. Position your cursor over the quilt.

Click and hold as you drag the brush
across the quilt. A line or shape draws, Line Brush
indicating the brush path. Release the
mouse to see all patches touched by
this patch change to the selected fabric
or color.
NOTES
Anything touching the brush path will be colored.
Use the default One Dot Brush to recolor patches Rectangle Brush
you did not intend to color.
The keyboard shortcuts to color faster are only

available when using the One Dot Brush
Oval Brush
98
To find the Spraycan tool:

On the Quilt Worktable, click the DESIGN tab, then choose Fabric Tools on the ribbon. DESIGNING WITH THE
On the Block Worktable, click the COLOR tab, then choose Fabric Tools on the ribbon.
SPRAYCAN TOOL
Step 1 Coloring with the Default

Spraycan tool
Spraycan
The Spraycan “sprays” all similarly-colored
patches in the block with the fabric or color
you select.
1. Click the Spraycan tool.
3. Click on a patch on the Block or Quilt

Worktable. All of the patches that were
filled with the same color will recolor
with the newly-selected fabric or color.

Step 2 Step 3 (Command key) to color all similarly-
colored patches on an entire Quilt
Worktable layer. Or, hold down the ALT
key (Option key) to color all similarly-
5
colored patches in alternate blocks on
the same layer.
Coloring with the Select &

Spray Tool
With the Select & Spray tool, choose the
patches first, then click fabrics or solid colors
Step 4 Step 4
CTRL+click (Command+click) to color all ALT+click (Option+click) to color similarly- in the palette to audition them while the
similarly-colored patches at once colored patches in alternate blocks patches remain selected.

Select & Spray tool in the SKETCHBOOK
Step 1 FABRICS & COLORS palette. On the
Select & Spray Quilt Worktable, select the Spraycan
on Block Worktable
tool in the SKETCHBOOK FABRICS &
COLORS palette. You will see 2 smaller
buttons in the bottom left, under the
other tools. Click the second button,
the Select & Spray tool.
Step 1
On the Quilt Worktable, choose the Spraycan 2. Click on a patch in a block. You will see
tool, then choose the Select & Spray sub-tool. an outline around the patches with the
same coloring.
Step 2
Click on a patch and all matching patches
will be selected with a green outline.
99
3. Click a fabric or color in the palette

to change those patches. Click other
fabrics to audition them. Stop when
you find one you like.
4. To deselect the fabrics, click a different

tool on the toolbar or click in the white
space outside of the quilt’s border or
block’s outline.

(Command key) to select all similarly
Step 3
colored patches on an entire Quilt Select a fabric or color in the palette and the selected patches will change.
Worktable layer. Or, hold down the ALT Use your keyboard arrow keys to try out fabrics or colors quickly.
key (Option key) to select all similarly-
colored patches in alternate blocks on
the same layer.
DESIGNING WITH THE

SWAP COLOR TOOL
Coloring with the Default Step 1
5 Swap Color Tool

Swap Color tool
Step 3
The Swap Color tool works color by color
across the entire quilt and on every layer (it is
not available on the Block Worktable). It will
change all patches of a given fabric or color in
the quilt to the newly-selected fabric or color,
regardless of which layer you are on. With this
Swap tool, you choose your fabric first, then
click to replace the color.

Tools, then the Swap Color tool. Original quilt All the blue patches in the entire quilt
have been changed to gray
3. Click on a patch in the quilt.
Coloring with the Select &

Swap Tool
With the Select & Swap tool, choose the
patches first, then click fabrics or solid colors
in the palette to audition them.

Tools, then the Swap Color tool. Click
Step 1
the second sub-tool button, the Select Choose the Swap Color tool, then
& Swap tool. choose the Select & Swap sub-tool.
100
2. Click on a patch in the quilt. This can be

on a border block, sash corner, motif,
etc. All patches with that color (on that
layer only) will select.
3. Click a fabric or color in the palette

to change those patches. Click other
fabrics to audition them. Stop when
Step 2 you find one you like.
Click on a patch and all matching patches will be selected with a green outline.
4. To deselect the fabrics, click a different
tool on the toolbar or click in the white
space outside of the quilt’s border.
USING THE FUSSY CUT

TOOL
Focal fabrics, striped fabrics, and other fabrics
with a large pattern in their image give you
lots of options for choosing which part of the
fabric you want to see in the patch. The Fussy
All the selected blue patches in Cut tool lets you slide fabrics around in a
Step 3
the quilt have changed to yellow.
patch to center or align patterns in the fabric
image however you like. This tool is available
5
on both the Block and any layer of the Quilt
Worktable, as long as there is fabric.
To find the Fussy Cut tool: 1. Click on the Fussy Cut tool.
On the Quilt Worktable, click the DESIGN tab, then choose Fabric Tools on the ribbon.
2. Click and hold on the fabric in a patch
and drag it around to choose what
part of the fabric you see. Release the
mouse when you’re done fussy cutting.
Step 1
Fussy Cut tool 3. The fabric is still selected. If you need to
nudge the fabric in a certain direction
in small increments, use your keyboard
arrow keys. If you want to nudge the
fabric in larger increments, hold down
the CTRL key (Command key) while
using the keyboard arrow keys.
4. Click on another fabric to fussy cut it or

deselect the tool by clicking on another
tool or outside the quilt’s border.
Block before fussy cutting NOTE

You will use the Fussy Cut tool most often after you
are done rotating fabrics, see page 102.
Block after fussy cutting
101
USING THE ROTATE Step 1

FABRIC TOOL
Step 2
The Rotate Fabric tool lets you rotate fabric
in several different ways on the quilt. (Don’t
confuse it with the Rotate tool, which rotates
blocks in the quilt.) To use the Rotate Fabric
tool you must have fabric in a quilt on the
Quilt Worktable. If you do not have this, see
pages 200 or 208.
1. Click the quilt layer tab (below the Quilt

Worktable) where the fabric is that
needs rotating. Step 2
Rotate Fabric tool

Step 3
DESIGN tab. Select Fabric Tools in the
ribbon and click the Rotate Fabric tool.
3. Click on the circle next to Simple,

Advanced or Align to edge, to select
your ROTATE FABRIC OPTIONS method.
(See Rotating Methods below.)
5 Simple Rotating Style
4. Click any fabric in the quilt to rotate it
according to the method you selected.
Simple Rotating Method

A simple quarter turn rotation
Click the fabric to rotate it 90 degrees Original
clockwise with each click. Four clicks will
return the fabric to the original orientation.
CTRL+click (Command+click) = rotates in all

blocks
ALT+click (Option+click) = rotates in alternate

1 Click – 90 degrees 2 Clicks – 180 degrees 3 Clicks – 270 degrees 4 Clicks – 360 degrees
blocks
Advanced Rotating Method

A custom rotation
Choose the Starting angle for first rotation (0 – 359); this impacts the first click only. Choose the Number of rotations (1-16)
you want within 360 degrees for future clicks. You can either enter any number (1-16) or divide 360 degrees by the degree you
want the fabric to rotate by and enter that number. For both of these numbers, you can use the arrows or double-click on the
number and type a new number.
CTRL+click (Command+click) = rotates in all blocks

NOTE
ALT+click (Option+click) = rotates in alternate blocks Some advanced-rotation formulas won’t bring the
fabric back to the starting position because the
See examples on the next page. numbers chosen may not be divisible by 360.
102
Example 1:
Starting angle: 10 degrees
Number of rotations: 8 (360 degrees ÷ 8 = 45)
click 1: 55 degrees (10 + 45)
click 2: 100 degrees (10 + 45 + 45)
click 3: 145 degrees (10 + 45 + 45 + 45)
And so on. It will take 8 clicks to rotate 370
degrees (360 degrees + the initial 10 degrees).
Original 1 Click – 55 degrees 2 Clicks – 100 degrees 3 Clicks – 145 degrees
Example 2:
Starting angle: 0
Number of rotations: 6 (360 degrees ÷ 6 = 60)
click 1: 60 degrees
click 2: 120 degrees (60 + 60)
click 3: 180 degrees (60 + 60 + 60)
And so on. It will take 6 clicks to rotate 360
degrees.
Original 1 Click – 60 degrees 2 Clicks – 120 degrees 3 Clicks – 180 degrees
Align to Edge Rotating

Method 5
Alignment Edge marker
Aligns the design of fabric to the patch edge
Click a patch to see a line appear along the

patch’s long edge. The fabric will rotate to
align along that edge. Click in the center of
the patch to rotate the fabric 90 degrees each
time with respect to the alignment edge. You
can change the alignment edge in the patch,
if you:
Original 1 Click – Finds edge and
rotates fabric along that edge Click on the Move alignment edge around the
patch arrow in the palette, OR
SHIFT+click in the patch.
This option works on one patch only, not

multiple patches in the quilt. Therefore, CTRL
(Command) and ALT (Option) do not affect
other patches.
2 Clicks – Rotates 90 degrees 3 Clicks – Rotates 180 degrees Example:

To rotate the fabric 90 degrees from the
NOTES alignment edge, you can just click.
The Rotate Fabric tool does not work on One Patch quilts. click 1: finds the long edge and rotates the
fabric along that edge
Tip: Set Advanced to 6 for hexagons and 8 for octagons. click 2: rotates the fabric 90 degrees more
click 3: rotates 90 degrees more
You will usually leave the starting angle set to 0 for Advanced, unless you need to And so on.
correct a crooked scanned fabric, or want to start out at an angle.
103
FINDING ITEMS WITH To find the Eyedropper tool:

On the Quilt Worktable, click the DESIGN tab, then choose Fabric Tools on the ribbon.
THE EYEDROPPER TOOL
Using the Default
Step 1
Eyedropper Tool Eyedropper tool
Find a fabric or color already used in a block

or quilt.
1. Click the Eyedropper tool.
2. Click on a patch on either the Block or

Quilt Worktable. The palette will jump
to the fabric or color of the patch you
clicked on.
NOTE
When you use the Eyedropper on the Block
Worktable, it will automatically switch to the last
used Fabric Tool so you can begin coloring again.
On the Quilt Worktable, you can choose whether
or not you’d like to switch tools by turning Toggle
automatic tool snapping on and off. Step 2
5 Click on a patch and the fabric will become selected in the palette
Using the Matching Fabric

or Color Eyedropper Tools
These additional Eyedropper tools are only
available on the Quilt Worktable.
1. On the Quilt Worktable, with the

Eyedropper tool selected, click the
Fabric Eyedropper sub-tool to find a
fabric or click the Color Eyedropper
Fabric Color Toggle automatic
sub-tool to identify a solid color. Eyedropper Eyedropper tool snapping
2. Click on a patch or part of a photo in a

quilt.
The Color
Eyedropper is
The Fabric Eyedropper tool will find the selected so a
fabric used if you click on a fabric. If you matching solid
is found on the
click on a photo or solid color, it will Color tab
find a fabric from the Sketchbook with
a close average color. (If the closest
average fabric is not close, you may
have to add fabrics to the Sketchbook,
see pages 27 and 200.)
The Color Eyedropper tool will find the

solid color used if you click on a solid
color. If you click a fabric or a photo, it Step 2
Click on a patch or photo and a matching fabric
will find the closest average solid color. or solid color will become selected in the palette
104
USING THE THREAD TOOLS

The Thread Tools are used to change the thread color on quilting stencils and embroideries, and to color patch edges on
blocks and motifs. You can change the thread color while still working on the block, motif or stencil, or after you’ve set it, or an
embroidery, into a quilt. Have whatever item you want to change the thread in on your worktable.
1. Click on the thread tool you want to

To find the Thread tools:
On the Quilt Worktable, click the DESIGN tab, then choose Thread Tools on the ribbon. use:
On the Block Worktable, click the COLOR tab, then choose Thread Tools on the ribbon.
Brush Thread - changes thread
color one section at a time. On the
Quilt Worktable, use CTRL+click
Step 1 (Command+click) to change color in all
Choose a thread tool
identical designs.
Spray Thread - changes thread color in

one entire block, motif, or stencil.
Swap Thread (only available on the

Quilt Worktable) - changes thread color
over the entire quilt.
2. Click to select a thread color in the

Brush Thread Spray Thread palette.
5
3. (Optional) Under Quilting/Outline
Thread Properties, check the boxes
to change color, style, and/or weight.
You must have at least one checked
because without them being checked,
the options won’t change.
Color - check this and click a color

below to change the thread color.
Style - check this and select a style

to change the line style from solid to
dashed.
Swap Thread
Weight - check this and select a
thickness to change the line weight
Step 3
(thread width).
4. Click the patch or any thread line in

which you want to change the thread.
NOTE
Thread color changes will be saved with the block
or quilt when you Add to Project Sketchbook.
Step 2
105
ADDING THREAD COLORS

If you want different thread colors than what come with EQ8, you can add your own thread colors to the library.
1. Click Libraries from the menu bar, then

Thread Library.
2. Click the section you want to add

threads to (you cannot add to the EQ
Thread Library):
Step 1
My Favorite Thread - to add your own
thread colors to your personal library.
Current Sketchbook - to add thread to

the current project you are working on.
Search Results - to add colors Step 2

temporarily to use as the base of a
search for “real” threads.
3. If you chose My Favorite Thread, click

the library name and then the style to
5 which you want to add them. If you do
not have a library created, please do
this first, see page 210. If you chose
Current Sketchbook or Search Results,
continue with the following steps. Step 4
4. Click the Add Thread button.
5. In the first box, type the Thread Name

(usually a color name like Aqua).
6. In the second box, type the Thread Step 5

Number. Check the spool for the Step 6
number. If you do not have a number, Step 7
it is okay to leave this field blank.
Display box
Step 8
7. In the third box, type the Manufacturer
name. It is okay to leave this field blank
if you do not know the manufacturer.
Step 9
8. Enter numbers between 0 and 255 in
the boxes for red, green and blue to
make the thread color you want. See
the chart at right for help. You may
have to try different numbers in each
field to achieve the color you want, Here is a chart of pure RGB colors. When adding thread colors, start with the closest
pure color and then increase or decrease red, green, or blue to match your spool.
which you can see in the display box.
Black (0, 0, 0) Green (0, 255, 0) Cyan (0,255, 255)
White (255, 255, 255) Blue (0, 0, 255) Magenta (255, 0, 255)
9. Click Add when you are done.
Red (255, 0, 0) Yellow (255, 255, 0)
106
10. If you chose My Favorite Thread in

step 2, click Save Library. If you change
styles without clicking Save Library, you
will be prompted to save. If you chose
Step 10
If saving to My Favorite Thread, click Save Library Current Sketchbook, the thread is now
in your Project Sketchbook. If you chose
Search Results, you can now use the
color for searching purposes by clicking
Search > By Color.
Step 10 11. Click the Add Thread button again to
If using Search Results, click Search > By Color
add more thread colors or click Close to
NOTE
To change the thread name or to create variations
of the threads you added, visit the EQ8 Online
Support site.
SORTING FABRICS OR
COLORS
Step 1
Sorting fabrics or colors arranges them in the
5
order you want, letting you put your favorites
up front in the palette.
Sorting Fabrics or Colors

Manually
COLOR tab or on the Quilt Worktable
Step 2 click the DESIGN tab. Click Fabric
Tools on the ribbon and then click the
You can also click Paintbrush tool.
the 3 dot button to
view this menu
Step 3 2. On the Fabrics and Colors palette, click
the Fabrics tab to sort the fabrics or the
Colors tab to sort the colors.
3. Fabrics – Right-click over the swatches,

then click Sort Fabrics.
Colors – Right-click over the swatches,
point to Sort Colors, then click Manual.
107
4. Click the swatches in the order you

want them sorted. The first swatch
clicked will appear first in your
respective palette. When you click on Click directly on the
swatches, in the order
a swatch, it will “disappear” from your in which you’d like
Sort box so you won’t select the same them to appear
one twice. Use the display buttons to
see more or fewer swatches at a time
or use the scrollbar.
5. Continue clicking the swatches in the Display

order you want them to appear. Click buttons
the Start Over button if you make a Step 6
mistake.
6. Click the Close button if you are

finished or if you want EQ8 to place
the remaining swatches in their current
order after the ones you have already You can also click
the 3 dot button to
sorted. view this menu
Sorting Colors
5 Automatically
click the DESIGN tab. Click Fabric
Paintbrush tool.
2. Click the Colors tab. Right-click over the

swatches, point to Sort Colors, then
click Automatic. The Automatic Sort
Colors box appears.
Step 2
3. Choose your sorting options. You can
learn more about these options by
visiting the EQ8 Online Support site.
Click OK.
Unsorting Fabrics or Colors

To unsort fabrics, follow steps 1-6 under
Sorting Fabrics or Colors Manually, in the
previous section, and click them back to the
their original order.
Step 3
To unsort colors, right-click on the swatches,
point to Sort Colors, then click Unsort.
108
Blocks from the library have two colorings. The “base” is the line drawing of the block, and
is not considered a coloring. The first coloring is in grayscale and the second is in color. UNDERSTANDING
BLOCK COLORINGS
When you recolor and add a quilt or block
to the Sketchbook (see page 27), each block
coloring is stacked 2 times to save space in the
palette. You only see the selected coloring.
Coloring 0 of 2 Coloring 1 of 2 Coloring 2 of 2

See Stacked Colorings with
Select Coloring
You can also click
the 3 dot button to 1. On the Quilt Worktable, click the
view this menu DESIGN tab. On the ribbon, click Block
Tools, then the Set Block tool, and a
block in the Blocks palette.
2. Right-click the block and choose Select

Step 2 Coloring from the pop-up menu. You’ll
Right-click and choose Select Coloring. see a strip showing all the colorings for
that block. Click one of the colorings for
that to display in the palette.
Strip of block colorings appears.
Click on one to select it.
See Stacked Colorings with
5
the Coloring Arrows
1. Click View Project Sketchbook, then
Step 1 click the Blocks section. Click a block to
select it. Or, on the Quilt Worktable,
click the DESIGN tab. On the ribbon,
click Block Tools, then the Set Block
tool, and a block in the Blocks palette.
2. Use the coloring arrows, found at the

bottom of the Blocks palette and the
Project Sketchbook, to move among
and see the colorings:
First arrow - moves to the front (line
drawing).
Second arrow - moves back one
coloring.
Third arrow - moves forward one
Step 3 Step 2 coloring.
Displays which Coloring arrows
coloring is selected Last arrow - moves to the last coloring.
3. Below the blocks in the Project

Sketchbook, the number of colorings
and which one you’re viewing are
displayed. For example, 2 of 5.
The coloring arrows also appear at the

bottom-right of the Blocks palette.
109
To Split Stacked Colorings

If you want to group block colorings differently
from how they appear in the Sketchbook or
want to see a specific coloring first, follow the
steps below.
1. Right-click on a block in the palette or

Sketchbook and choose Select Coloring.
2. Click the coloring where you want to

start the split.
3. Right-click the block again and click

Split Colorings. There will now be 2
Step 3
identical blocks in the Sketchbook,
except for the stacked colorings.
The Variable Star block has now
been split between the grayscale
Changing the Number of and colored versions.
Stacked Block Colorings

If you prefer to have a new block form each
time you color and recolor a block, or you
5 want more than 2 colorings to stack, click Change number
of colorings
File from the menu bar, then Preferences.
Under Project Properties, click General.
Change Maximum number of colorings per
block to however many colorings you want
and click OK.
Note
When you save different colorings of quilts, they Click OK to save
each save separately. your changes.
ADDING NEW SOLID

COLORS
If you can’t find the solid colors you need for Step 1
your block or quilt, you can create your own. Paintbrush
1. On the Block Worktable, click the Step 2

click the DESIGN tab. Click Fabric
Paintbrush tool.
2. Click the Colors tab.
110
3. Place the cursor over a color swatch

(don’t click). You will see an RGB
number appear.
Step 3
4. Click any color swatch to select it.
5. Right-click on the swatch and click Add

Colors. A standard Color box appears
The RGB number represents the with 48 basic colors.
amount of red (R), green (G), and blue
(B) in that color. The palette can range
from black (R:0 G:0 B:0) to white (R:255 6. Click Define Custom Colors. If the box
G: 255 B: 255). Every combination (over expands past the edge of your screen,
2,700,000 total) does not exist in the
Sketchbook/palette, but can be made. move it to the left. To do this, click and
Step 5 hold on the title bar at the top of the
Title bar box, then drag the box to the left until it
fits on your screen.
7. Under Custom colors, click the top-

left white square. (You must select the
boxes in order from left to right before
you modify the color or it will not
work as expected. Start in the top-left
square, fill the top row, then start in the
Step 7
bottom-left square and fill the second
row.)
5
Step 6 8. At the far right is a thin, vertical bar
with a black triangle. Drag the triangle
up or down to the middle of the bar.
9. In the large colorful square, click near

the color you want to make. Below you
Step 9
will see the Color/Solid box show the
color you selected. Click elsewhere in
Step 8 the large colorful square and watch the
Color/Solid box update as you slide it
around.
10. On the vertical bar at the right, drag the

arrow up or down to make the selected
color lighter or darker.
11. When you see a color in the Color/

Step 11
Solid box that you like, click the Add to
Custom Colors button at the bottom.
NOTES
If you are having trouble using this, don’t skip steps 7 and 12 when you click the 12. If you are finished adding, click OK.
white squares in order.
If you would like to add another color, start at
You can manually type in any RGB (0-255) or HSL (0-240) number at step 8. Do step 7 again and select the white box to the
steps 1-7, then double-click the number for Red or Hue so it turns shaded and right of the last square you filled. Once you
type the new number. Press the TAB key and type the next number, then press fill the top row, start in the bottom-left square
the TAB key and type the last number. Click Add to Custom Colors if you like the and fill the second row. You can add 16 colors
new color, then go to step 12.
at a time.
111
ADDING SHADES & TINTS OR TONES

You can add shades (dark values) and tints (light values) of a selected color to your EQ8 palette.
Tones are pure colors to which gray has been added. This determines how saturated (pure) a color is. The more gray, the less
saturated it is (like earthtones). You can also add a range of tones to your EQ8 colors.
1. On the Block Worktable, click the Step 2

click the DESIGN tab. Click Fabric Step 1
Tools on the ribbon and then click the Paintbrush tool
Paintbrush tool.
2. Click the Colors tab and click the color

you want to modify. Step 3
3. Right-click on the color swatch and

select Add Shades & Tints (if you want
it lighter or darker) or Add Tones (if you
want to make it more gray). You’ll see a
range of values.
4. You can add or remove swatches from

the range and make 4-16 colors. Step 4
5
To Insert a new color, click the swatch
you want to insert in front of and click
the Insert button.
To remove a color, click the swatch and

click the Remove button.
5. Click the Add to Sketchbook button

Step 5
to add this range to your EQ8 color
palette. Your added colors will be at the
end of the current palette.
The new shades and tints will be added to the
Click Cancel to close the window end of the palette. Use the scrollbar to find them.
without adding shades & tints or tones. Step 4
NOTES
If you don’t want your new colors at the end of the
palette, you can sort your color swatches, see page
107.
You can also make Shades & Tints by using Add

Grades. Mix the selected color with white or black,
see page 113.
Step 5
You can also make Tones by using Add Grades. Mix
the selected color with any gray, see page 113.
The new tones will be added to the end of

the palette. Use the scrollbar to find them.
112
ADDING GRADES
Step 1
Paintbrush tool click the DESIGN tab. Click Fabric
Step 2 Paintbrush tool.
2. Click the Colors tab in the palette and

click the color you want to mix.
3. Right-click on the color swatch and

select Add Grades. You will see a box
appear with two colors at the top. The
Step 3 color on the left will be the color you
selected.
4. If you want to change the color on

the right, click the down arrow beside
it, then click another color from the
picker. (To see all the colors, drag the
bottom scrollbar.) The color on the right
and the graded colors in between will
change. 5
Step 4 5. When you’re mixing colors you can add
or remove swatches from the range.
You can have 4-16 colors.
To insert a new color, click the swatch

you want to insert in front of and click
the Insert button.
Step 5 To remove a color, click the swatch and

click the Remove button.
6. Click the Add to Sketchbook button

to add this range to your EQ8 color
palette. Your added colors will be at the
end of the current palette.
Click Cancel to close the window

without adding shades & tints or tones.
Step 6
NOTES
If you don’t want your new colors at the end of the
palette, you can sort your color swatches, see page
The new tones will be added to the end of 107.
the palette. Use the scrollbar to find them.
Add tints by mixing with white. Add tones by mixing
with any gray. Add shades by mixing with black.
113
CHANGING THE DEFAULT PALETTE

The blocks, fabrics, colors, and threads you start with in every EQ8 project are in the default project. You can choose different
defaults that will then appear each time you open EQ8 and start a new project.
1. Click View Project Sketchbook, then
click the Blocks, Fabrics, Colors, or
Threads section. Click an item and click Step 1
View Project
Delete. Click Yes to delete it. Sketchbook
2. Click Close when you have deleted all Choose a section

the items you do not want in your new in the Project
projects. Sketchbook

the Block, Fabric or Thread Library. For
colors, see pages 107. Delete Step 2
button
4. Click to select a block, fabric or thread,
then click Add to Sketchbook. Add as
many as you’d like from any section or
category.
5. Click the respective Current Sketchbook

5 section to check and approve your
choices. If you want to add more items, Step 3
click the Library section, and repeat
step 4. If you want to remove items, Step 4
select the item and click Delete.
6. Click Close when you’re finished.

Step 5
7. When you are ready to make your new
default palette, click File from the menu
bar, then Save Palette as Default. Click
OK. Your new palette will now appear
each time you start a new project.
Or, click Cancel to do nothing, and

return to the worktable. The original
EQ8 default palette will not change
when you start a new project. Step 6
NOTE
Once you’ve changed the palette, you can revert
back to the original default palette by clicking
File from the menu bar, and Preferences. Under
Workspace, click Restore, then click to put a check
next to Also restore default blocks, fabrics, colors
and thread. Click the Restore Default Settings
button, then OK. Your palette will revert to the Step 7
original EQ8 palette (and toolbars and dialog boxes
will revert to their original settings and positions).
114
USING THE RANDOMIZE TOOL

Testing out new colorations of the same quilt has never been this fun. With the Randomize tool you can switch your entire
quilt back and forth from colors to fabrics, and even shift the colors randomly, by hue, saturation, or brightness. This is only
available on the Quilt Worktable. (Before you start, with your quilt on the screen, you should Add to Project Sketchbook, in
case you don’t like the recolored version.)
1. With the quilt you’d like to use on the
Step 1
Quilt Worktable, click the DESIGN tab.
On the ribbon, click Fabric Tools, then
the Randomize tool.
2. Choose one of the modify color options

(see details about each option on the
following pages).
3. (Optional) Click on the quilt as many

times as you like.
4. Modifying color sends the current

colors through a calculation and returns
different colors. If your quilt is colored
with fabrics, they will be replaced by
the average solid color of that fabric.
Randomize tool Remember to Map to colors or Map 5
to fabrics after any modifications, see
page 118.
5. Click Add to Project Sketchbook

Step 2 whenever you find a new color version
you want to keep.
NOTES
Step 4 The Randomize tool does exactly what it says – it
randomly recolors the quilt. You may find, after
a few clicks, you would like to try a different
option instead of the one you chose. To go back
to your original quilt (which you Added to Project
Sketchbook), click the View Project Sketchbook
button, then the Quilts section. Find and click the
quilt, then click the Edit button.
Don’t forget to color all parts of your quilt. The

Randomize tool does not change uncolored areas
filled with hatching lines.
Quilt after using the

Randomize option
Quilt after using the

Map to Fabrics option
115
MODIFYING COLOR WITH THE RANDOMIZE TOOL

See page 115 for details on using the tool. Below are descriptions of the Modify Color options.
Shift Hue (-40 to +40)

Colors are identified by their hue. Hue is what
makes something red, or green, or blue. If you
think of a color wheel (or putting a rainbow in
a circle), this is how Shift Hue works in EQ8.
You can click a long time because you’re going
in a circle. The higher the number, the more
dramatic the change will be.
Set Hue to 0 and click on your quilt. The only

Original quilt
change you will notice is that fabrics will be
replaced by solid colors.
Shift Hue set to 0 –
Set Hue to a negative number and click on Fabrics changed to
solid colors
your quilt. Watch your colors go around the
color wheel one way with each click.
Set Hue to a positive number and click on your

5 quilt. Watch your colors go around the color
wheel the opposite way with each click.
Saturation (-20 to +20)

Saturation is the purity of color. High
saturation is very rich in color, low saturation
looks washed out. Saturation is changed by
adding or subtracting gray. While hue change
is circular, saturation is not. This means Shift Hue set to -40 Shift Hue set to 40
saturation will stop, because eventually the
quilt cannot get any grayer or purer. The
higher the number, the more dramatic the
change will be.
Set Saturation to 0 and click on your quilt. You

will notice the fabrics will be replaced by solid
colors and may be slightly toned down.
Set Saturation to a negative number and click

on the quilt. Your quilt will become grayer
with each click.
Set Saturation to a positive number and click Saturation set to -20 Saturation set to 20
on the quilt. Most of the colors in your quilt
will become richer.
116
Brightness (-20 to +20)

Brightness is the intensity of a color. A high
brightness would have a lot of white; a low
brightness would have more black. Like
saturation, a color is either bright or not.
Because brightness is not circular, eventually
brightness will stop since you can’t make the
quilt any darker or lighter. The higher the
number, the more dramatic the change will
Brightness set to -20 Brightness set to 20 be.
Set Brightness to 0 and click on your quilt. You

will notice the fabrics will be replaced by solid
colors.
Set Brightness to a negative number and click

on the quilt. Your quilt will become darker
with each click.
Set Brightness to a positive number and click

on the quilt. Your quilt will become lighter
with each click.
5
Randomize
Choosing randomize will replace all the colors
in the quilt with a different solid color from
the current Sketchbook palette. EQ8 will keep
track of the colors used and try to prevent
duplicating them (see Notes below). The more
colors you have in your Sketchbook the better
the results, see page 110.
NOTES
When you use Shift Hue, Saturation or Brightness
and choose a number close to zero, your changes
will be gradual. If you choose a number farther
away from zero, the changes will be quite drastic.
When you choose Randomize, EQ8 will try to avoid

duplicating the colors in the quilt. But, sooner or
later, the color differences may “collapse” and
some patches will be colored with the same solid
color. Use the Paintbrush tool (pages 96) to recolor
them again in different colors, if necessary.
Example results of using Randomize
117
Map to Sketchbook
When you modify colors with the Randomize
tool, the resulting colors are not in the
Sketchbook. They are mathematical variations
of the originals. You must map the modified
colors to colors or fabrics in the Sketchbook
before you continue to work on the quilt. Find the mapping options in the Sketchbook Fabrics & Colors
palette, with the Randomize tool selected
Map to colors – This replaces fabrics or colors

with the closest color in the palette. When
replacing a fabric, closeness means closest to
the fabric’s average color. If Don’t map unless
within is checked, a replacement will only
occur if within the set tolerance. See Tolerance
below.
Map to fabrics – This feature will replace each

color with the closest fabric in the current
palette. Closeness for colors is compared to
a fabric’s average color. If Don’t map unless
within is checked, a replacement will only
occur if within the set tolerance. See Tolerance
5 below.
Tolerance (0 to 500) - Tolerance is the “trade-

Original quilt with fabrics After choosing Map to colors
off” between the accuracy of a replacement
and the number of replacements. To require
a Tolerance when mapping, be sure there is a
check in the checkbox and that the tolerance
value has been adjusted. Tolerance setting
keeps your mapping accurate. For example,
if you have 300 solid colors and 10 fabrics
in your Sketchbook for a specific project,
and choose Map to fabrics, some of your
solid colors may be mapped to the same
fabric because there are no fabrics in the
Sketchbook that are a close match.
NOTES
When only using colors, try a combination of the
Randomize tool and Add Shades & Tints, Add
Tones, or Add Grades so EQ8 will have more colors
to use, see pages 112-113.
Original quilt with solid colors After choosing Map to fabrics
Suggestion: Put a check next to Don’t map unless

within, and set the Tolerance somewhere between
100 and 200. Choose Map to Fabrics and click on
the quilt to replace your colors accurately. Then go
to the Fabric Library and find fabrics similar to the
ones not replaced.
Tolerance setting
118
6A
CHAPTER 6
Section A: Pieced Blocks
EQ8 is very versatile in the drawing styles it offers when creating your own block designs. Chapter 6 is broken into four
sections: Pieced Blocks, Applique Blocks, Pieced & Applique Blocks, and Serendipity Blocks. We’ll begin with the pieced
blocks section, which offers you two different drawing styles:
EasyDraw gives you tools for drawing pieced blocks like you would if you were using graph paper and a pencil. Use the
Line or Arc tools to draw an individual line or arc, as if you were drawing on the worktable with a pencil. After you’re done
drawing, EQ8 converts those intersecting lines and arcs to create patches.
PolyDraw also creates pieced blocks, but it’s not like drawing with a pencil. Instead, it uses a tool that is most often used
in Computer-Aided Design (CAD) programs which, in EQ8, allows you to make complete patches versus individual lines
or arcs. Because you’re drawing completed patches, you must think of the “background” behind patches as additional
patches since PolyDraw doesn’t have a block outline (like in EasyDraw). For this block style you have six grids, such as
Circle, Kaleidoscope, and Octagon, to choose from to help guide your block design.
Drawing an EasyDraw Block.............................................................................120

Setting up the Precision Bar......................................................................121
Drawing with the Line and Arc Tools.........................................................123
Drawing a Grid...........................................................................................124
Editing EasyDraw Blocks............................................................................125
Drawing a PolyDraw Block................................................................................129
Choosing a PolyDraw Grid.........................................................................129
Setting up the Precision Bar......................................................................130
Drawing with the PolyLine and PolyArc Tools...........................................132
Editing PolyDraw Blocks............................................................................134
DRAWING AN
EASYDRAW BLOCK
EasyDraw is like drawing with a pencil. The
rule is: as long as the lines intersect or
connect to one another, or to the edge of the
block, you can fill the patches they create
with color (solid or fabric). Any segments
breaking the rule will disappear or cause color
Draw a diagonal line to divide EQ understands the drawing and
to bleed through multiple patches when you the block into two triangles. creates the two patches that
try to save or color it. make up the block.
You can see from the picture at the top that it

is not necessary to think in terms of outlining
all sides of a patch. You are not required to
draw one triangle patch, then draw a second
triangle exactly the same size (as for an
applique block) to create the block. Instead,
you draw one line and EQ does the rest. That’s
why it’s called EasyDraw!
Beyond the Line and Arc tools, EasyDraw also Good - All lines touch, Bad - If we bump the left point off
has a Grid tool that allows you to draw all creating a pieceable block. the block outline, the lines still touch,
but the left side cannot be easily
lines of the selected grid in one stroke, making pieced and color will bleed.
it that easy to draw some block styles. You
choose how many columns and rows you want
in the grid. See page 124.
6 NOTES
Both ends of a line or arc must touch another
segment or the block outline. Anything floating
at one end or both ends will disappear when you
click Add to Project Sketchbook or click on the
COLOR tab.
Although this may be a beautiful The Log Cabin “border”
All lines must fall within the block outline when you block, the center is not connected will be all that remains when you
click Add to Project Sketchbook. Do not drag lines to the other lines of the block. switch to the COLOR tab.
outside of the block outline or have them extend
past the block outline.
Lines floating or extending past Only lines connected to the

an existing line will disappear. outline or each other will remain
after adding to the Project
Sketchbook.
120
Chapter 6A: Drawing Blocks–Pieced Blocks
Step 1 SETTING UP THE

PRECISION BAR
Here you’ll learn how to select the size of the
block and other important drawing features
for this style.
1. On the Block Worktable, click the NEW

BLOCK tab. On the ribbon, click Pieced,
then EasyDraw in the palette. You will
Precision Bar be on the DRAW tab, click Drawing
Tools on the ribbon (if it is not already
selected). No matter what Drawing Tool
is selected, you will see the Precision
Bar above the Block Worktable.
We will address each option working from left

to right.
2. Block Size: Double-click in the boxes for

Block Width and Block Height and type
a new size. Remember that the size you
enter here is the finished size of your
block.
After choosing EasyDraw as the Block Style, you’ll be switched to the DRAW tab. 3. Snap Points: Double-click in the boxes
for Snaps Horizontal and Snaps Vertical
and type a new number to change the
Step 2
Block Size
Step 3
Snap Points
Step 4
Graph Paper Cells
snaps. See About Snap Points (below) 6
and Example Snap Settings (left).
4. Graph Paper Cells: To see graph paper

lines on the worktable, press the Hide/
show graph paper button. (These will
EXAMPLE SNAP SETTINGS: not print, they are only there to help
For a 6” by 6” block: as you draw). To change the divisions
For snaps every inch: 6 (6 x 1 = 6) of the graph paper, double-click in the
For snaps every ½ inch: 12 (6 x 2 = 12) boxes for Horizontal and Vertical
For snaps every ¼ inch: 24 (6 x 4 = 24) and type a new number.
For snaps every 1/8 inch: 48 (6 x 8 = 48)
ABOUT SNAP POINTS
For a 6” by 10” block: These numbers control the snap grid. They should
For snaps every inch: 6 x 10 (6 x 1, 10 x 1) be equal to, or a multiple of, your block size. The
For snaps every ½ inch: 12 x 20 (6 x 2, 10 x 2) more snap points, or higher the Horizontal and
For snaps every ¼ inch: 24 x 40 (6 x 4, 10 x 4) Vertical numbers are, the harder it will be to
see every single snap point. If EQ8 tried to show
For snaps every 1/8 inch: 48 x 80 (6 x 8, 10 x 8)
every snap point, the worktable would look like a
filled space with dark dots, so don’t be nervous if
For a 15 cm by 15 cm block: you don’t see every snap because EQ8 will react
For snaps every cm: 15 (15 x 1 = 15) accordingly to your settings. (If you have the graph
For snaps every 0.5 cm: 30 (15 x 2 = 30) paper showing this could also “hide” snap points by
overlapping the same space.)
For snaps every 2 mm: 75 (15 x 5 = 75)
For snaps every mm: 150 (15 x 10 = 150)
121
5. Snapping Options: Decide what Step 5 Step 7

Snapping Options Tracing Image
snapping options you want turned on
or off. The default is Snap to grid points
on worktable and Snap to nodes of
on off
drawing are on and Snap to lines and Step 6
Guide Options
arcs of drawing is off. We recommend
sticking with the default settings
and turning Snap to grid points on
worktable on and off as needed. See
descriptions of each snap setting to the Snap to grid points on worktable: snaps the ends of lines or
arcs to grid points on the worktable. It matches your snap point
right. settings in step 3.
6. Guide Options: With one or more Snap to nodes of drawing: snaps the ends of your lines or arcs to
segments selected with the Pick tool existing intersections or ends of other lines or arcs where a black
(see page 125), click the Convert (square) node is present.
selected segments to guides button

Snap to lines and arcs of drawing: is rarely used, but will snap to a
to turn the segments into guidelines. line or arc whether or not there is a node present.
If you click this button without any
segments selected, the entire drawing
will convert to guides. These guides will
also not appear on a printout, but are
there to help in your drawing.
Click Clear the current guides to erase

all of the guides on the worktable. The
guides will stay on the worktable until
you choose to clear them (even if you
6 start a new block), so if you don’t want
them you can simply click this button.
7. Hide/show image for tracing: See page

158 to learn more about tracing.
NOTES
Original drawing Drawing converted to guides
No matter which Snapping Options you choose,
you must still follow the “rules” for drawing.
For instance, if you have Snap to grid points on
worktable selected, draw a line so it snaps to a
grid point, but then have no intersecting lines or
arcs and the initial line doesn’t touch the edge, so
it appears to float, it will disappear when you click
Add to Project Sketchbook or the COLOR tab.
As you are drawing and lines and arcs intersect, you

will not see the nodes, or black squares, appear
until you click on the COLOR tab or Add to Project
Sketchbook.
122
DRAWING WITH THE LINE AND ARC TOOLS

When drawing with EasyDraw, remember you are drawing the seam lines in your block. Therefore, all lines must touch or cross
other lines or the block edge. You cannot have any patches “floating” inside your block. You should also not draw lines on top
of other lines.
Step 2 be on the DRAW tab, click Drawing
Line tool
selected).
Line Tool
The Line tool draws straight lines.
2. Click the Line tool.
3. Click, hold, and drag from where you

want the line to start and where it is
to end, then release. The line draws as
you drag. The line must touch another
Step 3 – Position mouse Click, hold, and drag to line or arc, or the outside of the block,
at starting point the end point of the line
at a snap point, before you release.
Arc Tool
The Arc tool draws semi-circular arcs which
may be edited to form deeper or shallower
curves. 6
2. Click the Arc tool.
3. Click, hold, and drag from where you

Step 2
Arc tool
want the arc to start to where it is to
end, pressing your keyboard Spacebar if
you want to change the direction of the
arc, then release. The arc draws, as you
drag. The arc must touch another line
Step 3 – Position mouse
at starting point or arc, or the outside of the block, at a
snap point, before you release.
NOTES
If the line or arc is left “floating,” it will disappear
when you click Add to Project Sketchbook or the
COLOR tab.
When you release the mouse, the line or arc may

seem to move a bit. This is because lines drawn in
EasyDraw will snap to points on a grid. The number
of grid points can be adjusted using the Precision
Bar, see page 121. Snapping to a grid helps ensure
that your lines are connected. Any segments not
connected to other lines or arcs will disappear or
Click, hold, and drag to Press the SPACEBAR before releasing
the mouse to flip the arc
cause color to bleed through multiple patches.
the end point of the arc
123
DRAWING A GRID
Use the Grid tool to quickly draw grid-style
blocks.

be on the DRAW tab, click Drawing Step 2
selected).
Step 3
2. Click the Grid tool. The GRID TOOL
OPTIONS boxes will appear and your
cursor will look like a plus sign with
a 9-patch square in the bottom-right
quadrant.
3. Under the GRID TOOL OPTIONS,

double-click in the boxes for Columns
and Rows and type a new number
to change the grid. You can also click
the up or down arrows to change the
number.
4. To create the grid, position your cursor

where you want the grid to start, click
and drag diagonally (you’ll see it appear
6 as you drag), and release.

Step 4 – Position mouse Click, hold, and drag
If you want the grid to fill the entire at starting point to the ending point
block, start with the cursor at the top-
left corner, drag diagonally, and release
at (or just outside) the bottom-right
corner of the block.
NOTES
No matter where you draw the grid or what size it
is, make sure it’s snapping to grid points, especially
if you’re not filling the entire block.
Make sure the grid works for the block size and
snap points, in that area. You will be able to draw
the grid, but may get unexpected results when you
try to draw other lines. Example: Don’t drag out a
3x3 grid to fill a 7 inch block.
You can draw a grid within a grid, and even You can draw grids within a grid. After drawing the initial nine
patch grid, three more grids were drawn inside the squares.
change the number of Columns and Rows for the
inner grid. Use this tool to save you time drawing
individual lines.
124
EDITING EASYDRAW
BLOCKS
Step 2 The Pick and Edit tools can be used on blocks
you’ve drawn or blocks from the Library.
Using the Pick Tool

This tool allows you to move or delete
segments.
1. With an EasyDraw block on the Block

Worktable, click the DRAW tab, then
click Drawing Tools on the ribbon (if it
is not already selected).
2. Click the Pick tool.
3. Click on a line or arc to select it.
To select multiple segments, click the

first segment, then hold your keyboard
SHIFT key while clicking the other
Step 3 segments.
To select the entire drawing, press

CTRL+A (Command+A) on your
keyboard.
4. To move the selection, click and hold 6

in the center of the selection and drag
it to a new location. Note whether the
new position has the segment snapping
to a grid point.
To Delete the selection, click the Delete

button under the PICK TOOL OPTIONS
or press the DELETE key on your
Step 4 – Move Step 4 – Delete
Drag the selected segment to a new location Click the Delete button to keyboard.
delete the selected segment
5. (Optional) Click the arrow beside
Advanced Symmetry in the palette to
see more options.
Step 5 Click Flip Left to Right to flip the

Click the arrow selection horizontally.
to see additional
options
Click Flip Top to Bottom to flip the
Flipping selection vertically.
options
Click Flip Diagonally L to flip the
selection diagonally left.
Click Flip Diagonally R to flip the

selection diagonally right.
125
Click Clone to make a copy of the

selection.
Clone
Click Rotate 90, 180, or 270 to rotate
the selection 90, 180, or 270 degrees. Flipping
options
Rotating
Click Rotate to choose a specific degree options
of rotation by either typing a number in
the box or using the slider bar.
Resize
Click Resize to choose the specific

horizontal and vertical percent the
selection will resize to by typing a
number in either or both boxes, or
using the slider bars.
6. After using any of the above options,

the segment(s) will still be selected.
Click and hold in the center of the
selection and drag it so it snaps into
place. If you click Rotate, a new window
appears where you can enter the
specific degree of rotation.
NOTES
If you click Resize, a new window
To undo either a move or deletion, click the Undo appears where you can enter the
button. resize percentage.
Refer to Help to ensure proper snapping of all

segment endpoints, particularly if you decide to use
the Advanced Symmetry tools.
6
Step 2
Using the Edit Tool
This tool allow you to adjust the endpoints,
or nodes, or the shape of the curve, where
applicable. You can split a line or arc, adding
nodes, with the Edit tool which gives you
ADD NODES
more nodes to play “connect the dots.” palette
1. With an EasyDraw block on the Block

2. Click the Edit tool. An ADD NODES

palette will appear.
3. Click on any line or arc to select it.
Step 3 – Select a line or arc
126
4. You can then add nodes to the selected

segment in any of the following ways:
At Location: Click At Location in the

palette, then click on the segment
where you want a new node to appear.
(The reason you’d want a new node is
so that segments could snap there, if
it’s not the location of a grid point or
intersection.)
Click At Location in the menu, then click on the selected
line or arc where you would like a node to appear.
At Intersections: A node (or nodes)
will appear every place where a line
intersects with the selected segment.
See Notes on the next page.
Half: A node will appear in the middle

of a segment, splitting it into two equal
pieces, or halves.
Thirds: Two nodes will appear to split

the segment into three equal pieces.
At Intersections places nodes at every point
where a line or arc crosses the selected segment.
Partition Segment: Allows you to
choose how many equal sections you
want a segment to be split. You can
double-click on the number and type
a new number, or use the arrows to 6
change the number. After setting the
number, click Apply.
Stagger Segment: Allows you to choose

how many sections you want a segment
to split into in a “half-drop” version
of that many equal pieces. You can
Half Thirds
double-click on the number and type
a new number, or use the arrows to
change the number. After setting the
number, click Apply.
Partition set to 5 Stagger set to 5
127
5. If you don’t like the placement of the

nodes, click the Undo button.
Otherwise, click the Line tool to draw

lines or the Arc tool to draw arcs to the
new nodes created.
6. To move an individual node, click

directly on the node and drag it to a
new location. When you move the
node, it will “snap” according to the After adding nodes, you can use them to draw new lines or arcs.
settings you’ve select in the Precision
Bar (see page 121).
7. To change the curve of an arc, click

directly on an arc to display the “tent,”
and drag the tent to adjust the shape
and direction of the arc. When the tent
is displayed, you can also drag the “hot
spot” at the center of the arc closer or
farther from the tent.
NOTES Step 5 – Move a node
Make sure to keep all parts of an arc inside the

block outline when dragging the tent.
The EasyDraw block outline cannot be split.

However, lines drawn on top of the outline can be.
6
When drawing EasyDraw blocks, nodes get Hot spot
automatically added at every line intersection
as soon as you click Add to Project Sketchbook, Tent
or when you click the COLOR tab. When you are
working on a more complex block, you may not
want all those nodes to appear while you are still
drawing, but need them in certain parts of the Step 6 – Change the curve of an arc
block. You’ll find At Intersections useful if you want
more control over when and where nodes are
added while you are working on an in-progress
drawing. Remember, once you Add to Project
Sketchbook or switch to the COLOR tab, nodes will
be added at all intersections.
Use Partition Segment (set to the same Use Partition Segment on one segment and
number each time) on two segments to Stagger Segment on another (both set to the
create a straight line effect. same number) to create a zigzag effect.
128
DRAWING A POLYDRAW BLOCK

PolyDraw uses a tool that is most often used in CAD programs. Unlike EasyDraw, you draw one complete patch at a time.
You must start and stop at the same point to finish your patch. Double-clicking at that start/stop point will close the patch
and release the tool from the worktable. This type of drawing can be a lot of fun because there are special grids that make
designing easier.
Step 1 CHOOSING A
POLYDRAW GRID
There are six grid options. In order to begin
drawing a Pieced PolyDraw block, you need to
choose one of these grids. Whichever one you
choose, it will not appear on your printout,
but will be a drawing guide and determine
which tools you can use (see page 132).

then PolyDraw in the palette. You will
be on the DRAW tab, click Drawing
selected). No matter what Drawing
Tool is selected, you will see the GRID
PROPERTIES in the POLYDRAW BLOCK
palette.
Step 2
2. Select a Grid option in the palette.
6
The snapping options
3. Under the Grid options, there are
listed here will change two snap boxes. What these snaps
depending on the grid represent depends on the grid you
chosen above.
choose in step 2:
Rectangle – has typical Horizontal and

Vertical snaps. Example: Log Cabin
Circle – Rings controls the number

of full circles (the center counts as 1,
and there will be parts of other, not-
fully-seen or complete, circles in the
corners). Spokes controls the number
of spaces between the lines radiating
Rectangle Circle from the center. Example: Compass
Arc – Rings are the number of complete

quarter circles (the center counts as 1,
and there will be parts of other, not-
fully seen or complete, arcs in the
corners). Spokes are the number of
spaces between the lines radiating from
Arc the corner. Example: New York Beauty
129
Eight Point Star – Dimension 1 controls

the number of horizontal snaps in a
corner square. Dimension 2 controls
the number of vertical snaps in a corner
square. The diamond sides will line
up with the dimensions according to
which dimension they meet. Example:
LeMoyne Star
Kaleidoscope – Dimension 1 is
the number of rows/rings in the Eight Point Star Kaleidoscope
kaleidoscope. Dimension 2 is the

number of diagonal rows possible
within a wedge. Example: Maltese Cross
Octagon – Dimension 1 is the

number of rows/rings in the octagon.
Dimension 2 is the number of diagonal
rows possible within a wedge. Example: Octagon
Kaleidoscope Rotated
After choosing the grid and setting the snaps,

you can move on to Setting Up the Precision
Bar below and then Drawing with the PolyLine
and PolyArc Tools (page 132).
NOTES
6 You can switch between grid layouts while drawing
to allow you to include patches with arcs in a layout
that only has lines, but you don’t want to overlap
patches because they can’t be layered in this
The Eight Point Star grid The grid was then
drawing style. If you want to overlap patches, you was used while drawing switched to Circle.
may want to draw an applique block, see page 149. in the upper-left and
lower-right quadrants.
Since the lines and arcs have to follow the grid
guides, you can change the snap numbers while
working on the same layout (i.e., go from 4 to 8
spokes in an Arc layout).
Using the PolyArc tool, curved patches

were drawn in the upper-right and
SETTING UP THE lower-left quadrants.
PRECISION BAR
1. On the Block Worktable, click the NEW Step 1
selected). No matter what Drawing Tool
is selected, you will see the Precision
Bar above the Block Worktable.
130
Precision Bar We will address each option working from left

to right.

block.

lines on the worktable, press the Hide/
show graph paper button. (These will
not print, they are only there to help
as you draw). To change the divisions
After choosing PolyDraw as the Block Style, you’ll be switched to the DRAW tab. of the graph paper, double-click in the
boxes for Horizontal and Vertical
and type a new number.
Step 2 Step 3 Step 5
Block Size Graph Paper Cells Guide Options 4. Auto Fill: When Hide/show Auto Fill
on closed patches is selected, closed
patches will automatically fill with a
Step 4 Step 6
cream color.
Auto Fill Tracing Image
5. Guide Options: With one or more
segments selected with the Pick tool
(see page 134), click the Convert
to turn the segments into guidelines.
6

Auto Fill on Auto Fill off guides will stay on the worktable until
start a new block), so if you don’t want

131
DRAWING WITH THE POLYLINE AND POLYARC TOOLS

When drawing with PolyDraw, remember you are drawing completed patches. Therefore, all lines or arcs must start and stop
at the same point (after you’ve clicked other points). Although adjacent patches will share edge lines, they will be drawn twice,
once for each patch. You should not draw patches that overlap.
Which grid you choose will determine which tool will be applicable. The PolyLine tool is active for all six grids, but the PolyArc
is only available if you choose the Circle or Arc grids because those grids incorporate curves. No matter what grid layout
you choose, none of them have a block outline, so you must fill the entire block with patches. For example, when you have
finished drawing the rings in a Circle layout, you must still make patches for the areas outside of the last full ring that extend to
the edge of the dotted block outline.
Drawing with the PolyLine

Tool
The PolyLine tool draws straight lines and Step 2
can be used in each of the grids (though the
PolyArc tool will be preferable in the Circle
and Arc grids).

BLOCK tab. On the ribbon, click Pieced, The Kaleidoscope grid is used in the following illustrations. This is a zoomed-in view.
selected).
2. Click the PolyLine tool. Your cursor will

6 look like a pen. The Rectangle, Eight
Point Star, Kaleidoscope, and Octagon
grids are all applicable for this tool.
3. Place your cursor where you want to

start the patch and double-click (this Step 3 Step 4
anchors your line to that point). The Double-click to anchor Single-click on the next point.
the starting point for the patch.
node will automatically snap to the
nearest grid point. When you move
your mouse you’ll see there is a blue
line “attached” to your cursor.
4. Click (once) on another grid point to

place a node. Again, the node will
automatically snap to the nearest grid
point.
5. Continue to single-click on grid points

to create the patch.
6. When you are ready to complete the Step 5 Step 6

patch, double-click the first grid point. If Continue single-clicking Double-click on the starting
Auto Fill is turned on, the newly-drawn on points to create the patch. point to close the patch.
patch will fill with a cream color.
132
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to draw as many

patches as you want.
NOTE
If you decide you no longer want to finish the patch
you started drawing, press the keyboard ESC key or
double-click anywhere on the worktable, to release
the blue line attached to the cursor.
SHIFT+click to release the last node that was

placed. Holding the SHIFT key and clicking multiple
Continue drawing patches until the entire block is filled.
The snap points you set under GRID PROPERTIES in the palette determine times will release a node, one at a time, back until
where you can draw the patches (see page 129). You can change the snaps the initial node.
while working on a block to manipulate the grid.
You must complete an entire patch before starting
a new one when drawing with these tools.
Drawing with the PolyArc

Tool
The PolyArc tool draws arcs on the Circle and
Arc grids, so before you begin, choose one of
these grid layouts. (You can select this tool for
the other grids, but it will only draw straight
Step 1
lines since it is “forced” to follow the grid
guides.)
1. With either a Circle or Arc grid, click the

The Arc grid is used in the following illustrations. This is a zoomed-in view. PolyArc tool. Your cursor will look like 6
a pen.
2. Place your cursor where you want to

start the patch and double-click (this
anchors your line to that point). The
node will automatically snap to the
nearest grid point. When you move
your mouse you’ll see there is a blue
Step 2 Step 3 line “attached” to your cursor.
Double-click to anchor Single-click on the next point.
the starting point for the patch.
Although the PolyArc tool makes arcs, if
you’re following the outline of the grid
and move your cursor over the block
edge or another non-arced line, it will
draw a straight line for that segment.
3. Click (once) on another grid point to

place a node. Again, the node will
automatically snap to the nearest grid
point.
Step 4
Continue single-clicking 4. Continue to single-click on grid points
on points to create the patch. to create the patch.
133
5. When you are ready to complete the

patch, double-click the first grid point. If
Auto Fill is turned on, the newly-drawn
patch will fill with a cream color.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to draw as many

patches as you want.
NOTES Step 5
When using the PolyArc tool, be sure to click on Double-click on the starting
each intersecting point on either the Circle or point to close the patch.
Continue drawing patches until the
Arc grids to ensure the arc follows the grid as entire block is filled.
accurately as possible.
EDITING POLYDRAW
BLOCKS
As in EasyDraw, there are the Pick and Edit
tools, and although similar, have a few
differences.
Using the Pick Tool

This tool allows you to move, flip, clone,
rotate, or delete segments.
1. With a PolyDraw block on the Block

6 Worktable, click the DRAW tab, then
click Drawing Tools on the ribbon (if it Step 2
3. Click on any edge of a patch to select

it. No matter what shape the patch is,
EQ will create a rectangle of 8 nodes
around it with a crossed, double-sided
arrow as the cursor in the center.
To select multiple patches, click the first

patch, then hold your keyboard SHIFT
key while clicking the other patches.
To select ALL the patches, press CTRL+A

(Command+A) on your keyboard.
4. To move the selection, click and hold

it to a new location. Note whether the Step 3 Step 4 – Move
new position has the segment snapping Drag the selected patch to a new location.
to a grid point.
134
To Delete the selection, click the Delete

button under the PICK TOOL OPTIONS
or press the DELETE key on your
keyboard.
5. Using the options under Selected

Patch Properties, you can do any of the
following:
Click Flip Left to Right to flip the patch

horizontally.
Step 4 – Delete
Click the Delete button to
delete the selected segment. Click Flip Top to Bottom to flip the
patch vertically.
Click Clone to make a copy of the patch.

The new patch will be selected and
overlapping the original patch, so you’ll
want to move it so it snaps into place
on the grid.
Step 5
Click Rotate to rotate the patch
clockwise at different angles specific to
the grid you are using.
PolyDraw Clone and Rotate Method
You can draw just a portion of the block and then quickly fill the rest of the block 6. After using any of the above options,
using Clone and Rotate. See the EQ8 Online Support site for full directions. the patch(es) will still be selected. Click
and hold in the center of the selection
and drag it so it snaps into place. 6
NOTES
When you use the Pick tool and make any
adjustments, you want to be sure the patch isn’t
on top of other patches or floating outside the
block outline. Be sure to move them so there is no
overlap.
To undo any action made with the Pick tool, click

After drawing the patches that make up Move the new set of patches to the
one of the star points, you can select all the next star point so they snap into place. the Undo button.
patches and click Clone and Rotate.
The PolyDraw Clone and Rotate Method is a fast
way to create unique designs. See the EQ8 Online
Support site for directions.
Continue cloning and rotating Don’t forget to fill the rest

to fill all the star points. of the block with patches.
135
Using the Edit Tool

This tool allows you to move an existing node,
add new or delete nodes.
1. With a PolyDraw block on the Block

Step 2
2. Click the Edit tool.
3. Click on the outline of any patch. Nodes

will appear.
4. To move a node, click directly on the

node and drag it to a new grid point.
5. To add a node, double-click anywhere

on a line to add a node at that location.
After adding a node, you can move it as
described in step 4.
Step 3 Step 4
6. To delete a node, double-click on the
node and it will disappear.
NOTES
To undo any Edit action, click the Undo button.
6 Whether you are dragging an existing or new node,

it will snap to a grid point. If it’s not snapping
where you’d like, you can change your snap points,
see page 129.
When dragging nodes, be sure to keep all segments

and patches inside the block outline.
Step 5
Double-click on a line to add a node (left). You can
then move the node to a new location (right).
Step 6
Double-click directly on a node to delete it.
136
6B
CHAPTER 6
Section B: Applique Blocks
Understanding Block vs. Motif.........................................................................138

Setting up the Precision Bar.............................................................................138
Using the Draw Tool.........................................................................................140
Drawing with the Line and Bezier Curve Tools..........................................140
Drawing with the Freehand Tool...............................................................141
Drawing with the Brush Stroke and Swath Tools......................................142
Using the Ellipse and Rectangle Tools..............................................................144
Using the Shapes Tool......................................................................................146
Using the Oval and Polygon Shapes..........................................................146
Using the StarMaker or PosieMaker..........................................................147
Using the StencilMaker.............................................................................148
Editing Applique Blocks or Motifs....................................................................149
Using the Pick Tool....................................................................................149
Making a Wreath.......................................................................................151
Using the Edit Tool....................................................................................152
Making an Applique Block a Motif...................................................................154
UNDERSTANDING
BLOCK VS. MOTIF
If you want to draw an applique block, EQ8
gives you two choices: Block or Motif. With
the addition of the StencilMaker for a Motif
(see page 148), the tools and techniques are
the same in both styles. The only, but big,
difference is Block has a background patch
and Motif does not.
An applique block has An applique motif does not
a background square. have a background square.
An applique Block will create a plain
background patch for your design when you
click the Color tab. The design gets saved as
a block and can be set on any layer of a quilt
(see page 73).
An applique Motif has no background patch.

These designs get saved to the Motifs tab of
the Block Sketchbook. They are used on Layers
2 or 3 of a quilt design (see page 75).
Since the tools are almost identical for both

In the Project Sketchbook, applique with a background will be on the
styles, we’ll go over all of them together. Blocks tab. Applique without a background will be on the Motifs tab.
Step 1
SETTING UP THE
6 PRECISION BAR
The Precision Bar for an applique block has all
of the same options as an EasyDraw block (see
page 121), the Hide/show Auto Fill on closed
patches button from a PolyDraw block (see
page 130), and has additional snapping points
options, so we’ll explain those here.

NEW BLOCK tab. On the ribbon, click Precision Bar
Applique, then Block (or Motif) in the
palette. You will be on the DRAW tab,
click Drawing Tools on the ribbon (if
it is not already selected). No matter
what Drawing Tool is selected, you will
see the Precision Bar above the Block
Worktable.

block.
After choosing Block or Motif as the Applique Style, you’ll be switched to the DRAW tab.
138
Chapter 6B: Drawing Blocks–Applique Blocks
Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 3. Snap Points: Double-click in the boxes

Block Size Snap Points Graph Paper Cells
for Snaps Horizontal and Snaps Vertical
and type a new number to change the
snaps.

Step 5 Step 7 lines on the worktable, press the Hide/
Snapping Options Guide Options show graph paper button. (These will
not print, they are only there to help
as you draw). To change the divisions
on on
Step 6 Step 8 of the graph paper, double-click in the
Auto Fill Tracing Image boxes for Horizontal and Vertical
and type a new number.
Snap to grid points on worktable – snaps the ends of lines or arcs 5. Snapping Options: Decide what
to grid points on the worktable. snapping options you want turned on
or off. The default is Snap to nodes and
Auto join segments are on. Snap to grid
Snap to nodes of drawing – snaps the ends of your lines or arcs to
existing intersections or ends of other lines or arcs where a black and Snap whole patch to a grid could
(square) node is present. be helpful if you are working with a
specific grid. See descriptions of each
Snap whole patch to a grid point on worktable – snaps the snap setting to the left.
closest node (in a patch) to the closest snap grid point, so that the
whole patch snaps to the grid.
6. Auto Fill: When Hide/show Auto Fill
Snap aligned segments – auto aligns the edges of patches, on closed patches is selected, closed
especially for polygons when you want triangles or hexagons to be patches will automatically fill with
exactly side by side.
a cream color. If you think you’ve
finished, or closed, a patch and it
Auto join segments when drawing – snaps nodes together as
you’re drawing. If it is off you will not have closed patches. (This
is particularly helpful when drawing and not using the automatic
doesn’t fill with the cream color, then 6
you know it isn’t actually closed (see
shapes.)
page 140).
7. Guide Options: With one or more

segments selected with the Pick tool
(see page 149), click the Convert
to turn the segments into guidelines.

guides will stay on the worktable until
start a new block), so if you don’t want

139
USING THE DRAW Step 1
TOOL
When using the Draw tool, you need to use
your mouse like you would a pencil. Once
you have selected a specific drawing tool you
will press and hold your cursor, acting like
the pencil, drag it where you want on the
worktable, and release to create your line or
curve.

NEW BLOCK tab. On the ribbon, click
palette. You will be on the DRAW tab, Step 2
2. Click the Draw tool. There are five sub-

tools available for the Draw tool. We
will cover each sub-tool in the following Draw sub-tools
sections.
Drawing with the Line and

Bezier Curve Tools
3. Click the first sub-tool, Line, to draw
straight lines. Or the second sub-tool,
6 Bezier Curve, to draw line segments in
C and S formations.
4. Position your cursor inside the block

outline. Click and hold to start the
segment and drag your cursor across Step 3 – Line sub-tool draws straight lines. Step 3 – Bezier Curve sub-tool draws curves.
the screen to change its length. Release
to stop that segment, but do not move
your mouse cursor.
5. Continuing from the stopping point of

the last segment, click and hold to start
the next segment. Drag to the desired
ending point and release, but do not
move your mouse cursor.
6. Repeat step 5 until you release the

segment where you started the initial
line or curve (in step 4) in order to close Step 4 – Drag out
the first segment.
the patch. If Auto Fill is turned on, the
patch will fill with a solid color. If it
Step 5 – Drag out each
does not fill, it means all the segments segment from the ending
are not joined and the drawing will be point of the previous
segment.
considered thread (because it is not a Step 6 – End at the starting
closed patch). point to close the patch.
140
NOTES
There may be cases where you do not want segments to form patches and simply be threads, such as when making cat whiskers. If you’re
drawing straight-line quilting, you also don’t need to close the patch.
The Bezier Curve tool is not like the Freehand tool. A single arc drawn with this tool can never be more complicated than an “S” curve. To
draw a complex shape with this tool you must “build it up” by joining together several curves.
If you want to draw a patch combining lines and curves, use the Bezier Curve tool and CTRL key (Command key). When you draw with the
CTRL key (Command key) held down, it will draw lines; when the key is released, it will draw curves.
Drawing with the Freehand

Tool
When drawing curves, the Freehand tool gives
you more flexibility than the Bezier Curve
tool. It is often used when tracing an applique
image, see page 158.
3. Click the third sub-tool, Freehand,

to draw a curvy line with multiple
segments and nodes.
Step 3 – Freehand sub-tool draws curved
lines with multiple segments and nodes. 4. Position your cursor inside the block
outline. Click and hold to start the
segment and move your cursor freely
across the worktable (you will see the
line forming). Release to stop that
segment. If you stop the cursor where
you started it, a patch will form (if Auto 6
Fill is on, the shape will fill with a solid
cream color).
5. If you created a patch in step 4 then

you can repeat it again to draw
Step 4 – Drag your mouse around Step 4 – Release the mouse at the new patches. If you did not create a
freely to form the patch. starting point to form a closed patch. patch, then you can continue drawing
segments until you release a connected
To adjust the way the Freehand tool draws, click the Worktable Options button. segment on the starting point where
Under Applique, click Freehand, Rectangle, Ellipse. Under Freehand Default Settings,
drag the slider bar to change the settings. you started to close the patch. (If a
patch is still not formed, you may
need to use the Edit tool to connect
“floating” nodes, see page 152.)
NOTES
Any unclosed shapes will be interpreted as threads.
Do not cross over the line when drawing it because

you will not be able to cut or sew the patch, and
will receive an error message if you try to print a
template of the block.
The closer the slider bar is to Better Fit, The closer the slider is to Looser Fit,
the more nodes created when you draw. the fewer nodes created when you Do not draw patches extending past the block
This will require a lot of editing, but will draw. This will create a smoother
make your drawing more accurate. drawing with less editing.
outline.
141
Drawing with the Brush

Stroke and Swath Tools
Drawing with the Brush Stroke and Swath
tools are very similar in how they are created,
as you will see in the steps below. When
you draw with either of these tools, you will
initially see a line appearing on the worktable,
but when you release your cursor, a very
different segment will display.
3. Click the fourth sub-tool, Brush Stroke,

to draw a brush stroke, or the fifth,
Swath, to create unique flying geese or
diamond patches. Step 4 – Brush Stroke
When you release the mouse, it will now look like there are three lines.
4. Position your cursor inside the block The middle line (the one you drew), is called the spine, and you’ll have
outline. Click and hold to start the the ability to reshape your brush stroke using the spine.
segment and move your cursor freely

across the worktable (you will see a line
forming). Release to stop that segment.
After you release, the brush stroke or swath

will be selected, so you can make changes
to the settings under STROKE or SWATH
PROPERTIES in the palette.
5. To change the brush stroke’s body or

6 ends, click on the down-arrow beside
the Contour or End Caps boxes and
choose the image you desire.
To change the swath’s body or internal Step 4 – Swath

When you release the mouse, it will either look like a strip of flying geese or diamonds,
patches, click on the down-arrow depending which style is selected. The middle line (the one you drew), is called the spine,
beside the Contour or Style boxes and and you’ll have the ability to reshape your swath using the spine.
choose the image you desire.
6. To change the thickness of the brush

stroke or swath, you can change the
minimum width and/or boldness.
Minimum Width – All of the contour

styles (except the first one), have a
Steps 5 & 6
place at the beginning, end, or middle Properties available for brush stroke
where the line tapers in. This is the
“location” in the line where the width
is at its minimum. Set the Minimum
Width to zero and this “location” will
be basically flat (no width). As the
minimum width number increases, this
“location” will grow wider. Steps 5 & 6
Properties available for swath
142
Boldness – Boldness or “fatness” refers

to the size of the brush stroke or swath
around the spine. If you set it to 1, you
have a very narrow area surrounding
the spine. As you increase this number,
the brush stroke or swath gets fatter
and fatter, or bolder and bolder,
Steps 5 & 6 around the spine. The overall style, or
Make changes to properties of the brush
stroke in the palette. The brush stoke will contour, does not change so it still has
update accordingly on the worktable. a “location” where it’s tapered and
that area does not get fatter unless you
change the Minimum Width for it.
7. Click the Edit tool and click the spine to

change its shape. Click and hold on any
node and drag to a new position. You
can also click a node to see its handles.
Click and hold on a handle and drag it
to a new position.
Steps 5 & 6
Make changes to properties of the swath
in the palette. The swath will update 8. When you are happy with your brush
accordingly on the worktable. stroke or swath, click Convert to patch.
NOTES
You can change the order of steps 5-7, editing first
and then changing properties, or you can repeat
those steps several times until you create the
desired patch.
6
When you make changes to the properties, you
may have to move the brush stroke or swath so it
does not extend past the block outline.
When you make changes to the Contour, Width,

and Boldness in Swath Properties, the number of
triangles or diamonds may change.
Step 7
Use the Edit tool to make adjustments to the spine. This can only be
done before the brush stroke or swath has been converted to a patch. Once you have converted the brush stroke or swath
to a patch, the property options are no longer
available. You can still move the patches using the
Pick tool (the flying geese or diamonds for the
swath will now be individual patches), and make
adjustments to individual nodes with the Edit tool,
but the spine will no longer be available.
Step 8 If you have used the Line or Bezier Curve tools to

When you are done editing and making adjustments to the properties, click Convert to draw, you can easily change those segments to
patch to change the drawing into patches. When you click Add to Project Sketchbook, brush strokes or swaths. Select the Brush Stroke
or switch to the Color tab of the Block Worktable, the drawing is also converted to or Swath tool and then double-click on the line or
patches. Make sure you are done making adjustments before converting.
curve to change it to that drawing style.
Do no draw lines that cross.
143
USING THE ELLIPSE AND RECTANGLE TOOLS

Using the Ellipse tool you can draw an ellipse, pie, or arc and decide how many partitions you want and how they are
segmented. The Rectangle Tool makes squares, rectangles, or rounded rectangles.

2. Click the Ellipse or Rectangle tool. The

Step 2
respective PROPERTIES for that tool will
appear in the palette.
3. Position your cursor inside the block

outline, then click and hold to start
the shape. Drag your cursor across the
screen to change the size, then release
to stop the shape.
This is a drawing-in-progress, so it will

not fill automatically if you have Auto
Fill turned on. You can still change the
shape’s size and other properties until
you Convert to patch.
6 NOTE
Step 3 – Ellipse tool Step 3 – Rectangle tool
If you hold down your keyboard CTRL key

(Command key) while dragging out the shape, it
will make a perfect circle or square.
Ellipse Pie Arc
Steps 4-7 are optional. If you are happy with
your drawing, skip to step 7.
4. To change the ellipse’s shape, click one Starting angle

of the shape buttons in the palette: Ending angle
Ellipse – makes your ellipse or circle

Step 4 – Ellipse
without gaps (a circle or an oval).
Pie – makes your ellipse or circle into

a pie; choose the starting and ending
angles to increase the gap in the pie.
Arc – makes your ellipse into an arc;

choose starting and ending angles to
increase the gap in the arc.
Ellipse properties applied
144
Rectangle Rounded Rectangle To change the rectangle’s shape, click

one of the shape buttons in the palette:
Roundness Rectangle – makes the corners sharp

numbers for (90 degrees).
each corner
Rounded Rectangle – makes the

Step 4 – Rectangle corners rounded; choose the roundness
setting for each corner.
5. If you are making an ellipse, pie, or arc,

you can section it into pieces. Click the
arrows beside Sections to choose how
many sections you want (if you are
adding sections for an arc, it will not be
as visible, but nodes will be added).
Click either the Partition evenly

into sections or Stagger initial/final
sections button to determine how the
Rounded rectangle properties applied
segments will appear in the ellipse.
Partition Stagger 6. When you are finished editing the

shape, click the Convert to patch
button in the palette. (You can also click
on the COLOR tab or the Add to Project
Change number Sketchbook button to convert the
of sections
shape to a patch.)
6
NOTES
Step 5
If you deselect the shape before you convert it to a
patch or are finished changing its properties, click
the Pick tool, then click the shape to select it again.
Once you have converted to patch, you can no

longer change the shape’s properties. You can
still move the patches using the Pick tool (if you
sectioned the ellipse, each section will now be
an individual patch), and make adjustments to
Step 6 individual nodes with the Edit tool.
These shapes have been converted to patches.
145
USING THE SHAPES TOOL

This tool allows you to draw patches instantly, as well as making your own star, posy, or stencil (for Motif only).

is not already selected). Step 2
2. Click the Shapes tool. The OVAL AND

POLYGON SHAPES and PATCHMAKER
Step 3
SHAPES tools will appear.
Using the Oval and Polygon

Shapes
Under OVAL AND POLYGON SHAPES, you will
see a number of shapes, including a heart,
leaves, triangles, a hexagon and more. The
oval shapes are in purple and the polygons are
in teal. They are all drawn in the same way.
3. Click on one of the Oval or Polygon

sub-tools.
4. Click on the point on the worktable

6 where you want to start the shape.
Hold down the mouse and drag it
across the worktable in any direction
for the shape to appear. The farther you
drag, the bigger the shape will become. Step 4 Step 5
Click, hold, and drag to make the shape. When you release the mouse, you create a
5. Release the mouse to stop the shape. It closed shape. If Auto Fill is turned on, the
shape will fill with a solid cream color.
will be selected, so you can easily move
or resize it (see page 149).
NOTES
Do not start or extend a shape outside of the block
outline.
If you hold down the keyboard CTRL key (Command

key) while you drag the patch, it will constrain the
proportions and angle of the patch.
Don’t feel as though the pre-determined shape

that you see on the tool is your only option. After
drawing the initial shape, you can then use the Edit
tool to re-position nodes, adjust curves, etc.
To reshape, or edit, patches, see page 152.
146
Using the StarMaker or

PosieMaker
Step 3 These tools can be used in either an applique
Block or Motif. What you create is based
on what options you choose, including the
number of points and size of the center.
3. Under PATCHMAKER SHAPES, click

either StarMaker or PosieMaker.
The respective window with options
StarMaker appears.
options
4. Make adjustments to the available

options using the sliders. You can also
double-click on a number and type a
new number. Where applicable, click
the circle next to the option you want
to choose.
Step 5
The Preview will automatically update
when you change the settings.
5. When you are happy with the star

or posy you see in the Preview, click
OK. EQ8 will put the patch on your
worktable. (A StarMaker patch will be
PosieMaker in the center of the worktable, while a
6
options
PosieMaker patch will be in the top-left
corner.) The patch will be selected, so if
you want to move it, place your cursor
over the center, click, hold, and drag it
to a new location.
If you decide you do not want one of

these automatic shapes, click Cancel.
You can choose a pre-designed PosieMaker Step 5 NOTES

shape here. The shape can be used as-is, You can use the Edit and Pick tools on these shapes.
or you can you use it as a starting point
and adjust the settings above. See pages 149 and 152.
You can move the patch at any time by using the

Pick tool, but do not move it outside of the block
outline.
After clicking OK in Step 5, the new shape will be placed on the worktable.
147
Using the StencilMaker

This tool is intended to make quilting stencils
to be set on Layer 3 of a quilt design. It can
only be used on the applique Motif worktable,
so make sure you choose Motif in Step 1 (on
page 146).
3. Click on the StencilMaker tool. The

StencilMaker window will appear.
The StencilMaker tool will only be available if you chose Motif as your Applique Style.

new number. Click on the checkbox
next to Add end loop to petals if you’d
like to add that option. Step 3

5. When you are happy with the stencil

you’ve created, click OK. EQ8 will put
it on the worktable. The stencil will
StencilMaker
be selected, so if you want to move it, options
place your cursor over the center, click,
hold, and drag it to a new location.
6 If you decide you do not want a stencil,

click Cancel.
NOTES Step 5
You can change the thread color, style, and weight
by using the Thread Tools. See page 105.
You can use the Edit and Pick tools on the stencil.
See pages 149 and 152.
Learn how to set a stencil in a quilt, see page 75.
After clicking OK in Step 5, the new stencil will be placed on the worktable.
When you add

the stencil to the
Project Sketchbook,
it will be on the
Stencils tab of the
Blocks section.
148
EDITING APPLIQUE BLOCKS OR MOTIFS

There are two editing tools for patches you have drawn on a block or motif worktable, the Pick and Edit tools.
Using the Pick Tool

Whether you have drawn a patch from scratch
or used the Shape tool, you can change its
Step 2
size, location on the worktable, flip, rotate,
or clone it, alter the layering of patches, and
even make a wreath, all using the Pick tool.
1. With an applique block or motif on the

Block Worktable, click the DRAW tab,
then click Drawing Tools on the ribbon
(if it is not already selected).
3. Click on any edge of a patch to select it.
To select multiple patches, click the first

patch, then hold your keyboard SHIFT
key while clicking the other patches. Or
Step 3
You can select multiple patches at once by dragging click and hold the mouse button and
a marquee rectangle around the patches. drag a dotted marquee rectangle so
that it entirely surrounds the patches
you want to select. When you release
the mouse, the patches are selected.
6
To select ALL the patches, press CTRL+A
Step 5 (Command+A) on your keyboard.
Resize using the Width and Height boxes or by
clicking the Resize button below
4. To move the selection, click and hold
it to a new location. To select an exact
location, you can click the up and down
arrows beside the X- and Y-axis boxes.
Step 4
Drag the selected patch(es)
to a new location The following options are found in the palette,
under Selected Segment/Patch Properties.
These options are only enabled when you
have one or more patches selected. You may
have to use the vertical scrollbar to see all the
options.
To resize the patch, click the arrows

beside the Width and Height boxes to
change the size. You can also click the
Resize button at the bottom to change
the Horizontal and Vertical percentage
Resize for the patch.
If you click the Resize button, a new
window appears where you can enter
the resize percentage.
149
To rotate a patch, type in the exact

degree (0-360) you want to rotate in
the Segment Rotation box, then click
Apply. You can also click the Rotate
Rotate by degrees
90, 180, or 270 buttons to rotate the
patches by those degrees. The rotation Center Make a copy
of some patches may be difficult to see See the following Delete
if it is symmetrical. page for info on
Wreathmaker Layering options
for overlapping
To flip a patch, you have four options patches
to choose from (you may not notice Flipping
options
a difference if the patch has any
symmetrical sides): Rotating
Flip Left to Right (a horizontal flip) options
Flip Top to Bottom (a vertical flip) Resize
Flip Diagonally L (a left-diagonal flip)
Flip Diagonally R (a right-diagonal flip) Step 5 options
To place the patch in the exact center

of the block, both horizontally and
vertically, click the Center in Block
button. Step 5 – Changing the layering of patches
To make a copy of the patch, click the

Clone button. The copy will be on top
of the original patch, so you can click
on the center crosshair and drag it to a
6 new location.
To delete a patch, click the Delete

button. You can also use the DELETE key
on your keyboard.
To move the flower head on top of the leaves, click the

To rearrange overlapping patches, you flower head patch then click Bring to Front in the palette.
can click the Bring to Front or Send
to Back buttons, which will place the
patch on top or bottom, respectfully.
This tool can be especially helpful after
making a wreath.
5. After using any of the above options,

the patch(es) will still be selected. Click
and hold on the center crosshair if
you’d like to drag it to a new location.
To move the stem behind the flower head, click the

stem patch and click Send to Back in the palette.
150
Making a Wreath
Step 2 You can use the Wreathmaker tool on any
patch(es), whether you’ve drawn it yourself or
are using a block or motif from the library.

Step 3 2. Click the Pick tool.
3. Select the patch(es) you’d like to use for

the wreath (see page 149).
Step 4
4. Click Wreathmaker in the palette.

new number.

Step 5 6. When you are happy with the wreath

See descriptions you’ve created, click OK. EQ8 will put
below
it on the worktable. (Wreaths are
automatically centered in the block.)
6
Step 6 If you decide you do not want a wreath,
Number of clusters – changes the number of patch groups (Range: 3-20) click Cancel.
Cluster spacing – changes the amount of space between patch groups (Range: 0-100%)
NOTES
Resize cluster – changes how much the patch groups are resized (Range varies; 100% = no Wreathmaker can be used on segments or patches.
change in size) It will not work on a “drawing-in-progress” until it
is converted to a patch (drawings made with the
Brush Stroke, Swath, Ellipse, or Rectangle tools).
If you want to layer the patches differently, use the

Bring to Front or Send to Back buttons.
If you set Cluster Spacing to 0% the wreath will

be touching in the center. If you set it to 100%,
WreathMaker may automatically change the value
for Resize cluster to ensure that the wreath fits
inside the block.
If you set Resize cluster to 100% the patches will

After clicking OK in Step 6, the You can use WreathMaker on a wreath for not change size. If you set it to anything higher than
new wreath will be placed on the interesting effects. WreathMaker is also great 100%, the patches will increase in size.
worktable. for creating quilting stencils.
Starting with the wreath created in Step 6,

the three bottom flowers were deleted, and
then Wreathmaker was used again.
151
Using the Edit Tool

The Edit Tool allows you to add or delete
nodes, convert arcs to lines or lines to curves,
Step 2
and apply other segmenting options.

2. Click the Edit tool.
3. Click on any edge of a patch to select

it. There will be two nodes, one at each
end of the segment, and if it’s a curve,
it will have handles.
You can shape patches using any of the The options available under EDIT NODES AND SEGMENTS will
enable/disable based on what is selected on the worktable.
following options.
4. To add a node, double-click on the line

or curve at the point where you want a
node. Or click Add Node in the palette
to add a node in the center of the
selected segment.
5. To delete a node, double-click directly

on node. Or select the node and click
6 Delete Node in the palette. Step 4 – Add a node by double-clicking on the line or curve.
Or click Add Node to add a node in the center of the selected line or curve.
6. To move a node, click directly on the
node and drag it to a new location.
Step 5 – Delete a node by double-clicking on the node.

Or click on the node to select it and click Delete Node.
Step 6 – Move a node by clicking on the node and dragging it to a new location.
152
7. To split the patch or segment at a node,

click the node to select it, then click
Break at Node in the palette.
8. To join two segments, click the first

node and then hold down the SHIFT key
while you click the second node. Click
Join Segments in the palette to connect
Step 7 – Split a segment by clicking on the node to select it, then click Break at Node
the two nodes.
in the palette. If you break the node of a closed patch, and have Auto Fill turned on,
you’ll see that the patch is no longer filled (because it’s no longer closed). 9. To change a curve to a line, click on the
curve to select it, then click Convert to
Line.
10. To change a line to a curve, click on the

line to select it, then click Convert to
Curve.
11. To change the shape of a curve, click

directly on the curve to display the
“handles” at each node. Click and drag
Step 8 – Join two segments by clicking on the first node, then SHIFT+click on the second a handle to change the shape.
node to select it. Click Join Segments in the palette. If joining the two segments closes a
patch, and you have Auto Fill turned on, the patch will fill with a cream color. To change the smoothness of a node’s
handles, there are four options for
changing how the handles for that node
work:
Corner – allows the curves to reshape

Step 12 – There are four options for changing the node’s handles:
independently of each other. Moving 6
the handle on one side does not affect
the other handle. The other handle
stays in place until you’re ready to
adjust it.
Cusp – the handles lie on top of each

other to create a sharp point at the
Corner - handles move independently Cusp - handles are locked together node. Move the node and the handles
around to reshape the point.
Smooth – adjusts both curves like a

teeter-totter. When one side goes up,
the other goes down. The length of
the handles are not equal. One can be
really long and the other really short.
Symmetrical – the handles also act

Smooth - handles form a straight line; Symmetrical - handles form a straight line;
length of the handles can be different length of the handles are the same size like a teeter totter, but the length of
the handles stays the same, creating a
symmetrical curve at that node.
153
MAKING AN APPLIQUE
BLOCK A MOTIF
The only difference between an Applique Step 2
Block and Motif is the background patch in
an applique block. If you decide you want to
eliminate the background, you can copy and
paste the other patches into a Motif.
1. With an applique block on the Block

Step 3
3. Click on the Applique tab below the

worktable.
4. If you want to select all of the patches,

press CTRL+A (Command+A). Or you Step 4
Select the patches you
can click Edit on the main menu, then want to use for the motif.
Select All. If you only want to select
some of the patches, click on the first
patch, then SHIFT+click on the rest of
the patches you want.
5. With the patches selected, press
6 CTRL+C (Command+C). Or you can click

Edit on the main menu, then Copy.
6. Click the NEW BLOCK tab. On the

ribbon, click Applique, then Motif in
the palette. (If you have not added Step 6
the Applique Block to the Project

Sketchbook yet, you will be asked if
you want to save before starting a new
block.)
7. Press CTRL+V (Command+V) to paste

the patches. Or you can click Edit on
the main menu, then Paste.
8. The patches will be slightly off-center,

but they will still be selected, so
you can move them by clicking and
dragging. Or click the Center in Block Step 7 Step 8
button in the palette. Paste the patches on the Motif worktable. Drag to re-position the pasted patches,
They will be slightly off-center. or click Center in Block in the palette
to center all the patches.
The motif will be on the Motifs tab
in the Blocks section of the Project
Sketchbook.
Step 9
154
6C
CHAPTER 6
Section C: Pieced & Applique Blocks
Understanding Easy + Applique vs. Poly + Applique Blocks..............................156

Combining Pieced and Applique Blocks...........................................................156
Tracing an Image..............................................................................................158
Tips for Tracing.................................................................................................161
UNDERSTANDING EASY + APPLIQUE VS. POLY + APPLIQUE

The only difference in these two block styles is the tools that are used to draw the bottom, pieced layer. You will start by
selecting the tools that you want to use, choosing from EasyDraw or PolyDraw (see pages 120 and 129). The drawing rules that
applied for each of these pieced block styles when drawing them alone (not with an applique layer), applies for either of these
combinations.
The worktable will display tabs along the bottom of the screen. Use these tabs to change layers and load the appropriate tools
in the palette. The tools for the pieced layer will be either EasyDraw or PolyDraw, depending on your choice. The tools for the
applique layer are the same for both styles. Review Sections A and B from this chapter for help with these tools.
COMBINING PIECED AND APPLIQUE BLOCKS

You can draw a combination block from scratch, but if you already have separate pieced and applique blocks and want to
combine them, follow these steps. You can start with any block you want on the worktable, but for this example we’ll begin
with a Pieced block, whether it be EasyDraw or PolyDraw.
1. With the Pieced Block on the Block

click Drawing Tools on the ribbon (if it Step 1
3. If you want to select all of the

segments, press CTRL+A (Command+A).
If you only want to select some of the
segments, click on the first one and
6 then SHIFT+click on the additional
segments.
4. With the segments selected that

you want to copy, press CTRL+C
Pay attention to the block style
(Command+C). listed above the Drawing Tools, so
you know which to choose in Step 5.
This is especially helpful if the block
NOTE is from the library and you’re not
Step 2
When you are copying and pasting pieced blocks, sure how it was drawn.
you should make sure that the new worktable
has the same snap settings or grid settings as the
original worktable. See pages 121 and 130.
5. Click the NEW BLOCK tab. On the Step 5

ribbon, click Pieced & Applique. Which
block style you select will depend on
what type of Pieced block you copied. If
you copied segments from an EasyDraw
block, then click Easy + Applique. If
you copied segments from a PolyDraw
block, then click Poly + Applique.(If
you have not added the Pieced Block
to the Project Sketchbook yet, you will
be asked if you want to save before Choose one of the combination block styles based on the block that you used in steps 1-4.
starting a new block.)
156
Chapter 6C: Drawing Blocks–Pieced & Applique Blocks
6. On the EasyDraw or PolyDraw tab

(below the worktable), press CTRL+V
(Command+V) to paste the segments.
7. The segments will be slightly off-center,

but they will still be selected, so you
can move them by clicking on the
center crosshair and dragging to a new
location. If you have your snaps set
properly, the segments should snap
into place when you move them.
Step 6 Step 7
Paste the segments Move the segments so they 8. Click Add to Project Sketchbook.
are centered in the block and
snap into place
10. In the Blocks section, click on the

applique block you want to combine
Step 8 Step 9
with your pieced block, and click Edit.
11. Make sure the Applique tab (below the

worktable) is selected, then click the
Pick tool in the palette.
12. If you want to select all of the patches,

press CTRL+A (Command+A). If you
only want to select some of the
patches, click on the first one and then
SHIFT+click on the additional patches.
13. With the patches selected that

6
you want to copy, press CTRL+C
Step 10
(Command+C).
Applique tab
Step 14
157
15. In the Blocks section, click on the block

you saved in step 8, and click Edit.
16. Make sure the Applique tab (below

the worktable) is selected, then press
CTRL+V (Command+V) to paste the
patches.
17. The patches will be slightly off-center,

but they will still be selected, so you
can move them by clicking on the
center crosshair and dragging to a new Step 15
location. Or click the Center in Block
button in the palette to center them.
NOTE
You can copy patches from an applique block first
and then add, or paste, segments from a pieced
block second. Use the same directions above, only
switch to the applique block when talking about
pieced blocks, and pieced for applique.
Step 6 Step 7
Paste the patches Move the patches while they are still
TRACING AN IMAGE selected. Click Center in Block if you’d
like them centered.
You can trace an image on any Block
Worktable in order to make it a pieced,
6 applique, or combination block. If you are
tracing an image for a foundation pieced Choose which
block, you’ll most likely use EasyDraw. If you’re kind of block
on the ribbon.
tracing an image for applique, you can use
Applique Block or Motif (see page 138).
PolyDraw gives you the least flexibility in

Then, choose
drawing because of the special grids, and the block style
would only be applicable in a small number of in the palette.
Step 1
tracing situations.
If the tracing image is in the Project Sketchbook:

Importing an Image
BLOCK tab and choose what kind of
block you’d like to make on the ribbon.
Then choose the Block Style in the
palette. You’ll then be switched to the
DRAW tab.
2. If the tracing image is already in the

Project Sketchbook, click View Project
Sketchbook, then click the Photos
section. Select the image, then click Step 2
Edit >> to Block worktable. Select the image and Edit to the Block Worktable.
158
If the tracing image is on your computer: If the tracing image is on your

computer, click Tracing Image on the
ribbon. Click Import Image in the
Step 2
Tracing Image
palette. Navigate to the location of
on ribbon the image file on your computer. Click
on the file to select it and click Open.
Click OK in the Crop Image box. These
options are available in the palette and
we’ll adjust them in the next steps
3. (Optional) After editing or importing,

the palette will switch to the Position &
Resize tool. You can choose one of five
Import Image POSITION & RESIZE RELATIVE TO BLOCK
options:
Navigate to the file on your computer, select it and click Open.
Inside Fit – this takes the longest edge
of your image and fits it proportionally
inside the outline, thus fitting the entire
image inside.
Outside Fit – this takes the shortest

edge of your image and lines it up
proportionally with the block outline.
Part of the longer part of the image
may fall outside the outline.
Distort Fit – this ignores your image
Step 3
proportions and fits each edge of
the image to each edge of the block 6
outline.
Center Image – this centers the image

at its actual size/pixels in the block.
Step 4
Upper Left Image – this places the
image at its actual size/pixels in the
upper-left corner of the block.
4. (Optional) Drag the slider bar under

Image lightness for tracing to change
how light or dark the tracing image
appears. You can change this at any
point during your tracing.
Smaller number = darker image, larger number = lighter image
159
5. (Optional) Click the Crop tool. Crop by

sight by dragging a handle on the image
to a new location. Crop by numbers
using the palette. Under CROP VALUES Step 5
RELATIVE TO IMAGE, increase the X-
and Y-axis, or decrease the Width and
Height (you can type in new numbers
or use the arrows). You can use both
methods to get the box close to where
you want to crop and then change the
Width and Height to make it precise.
Click the green Apply Crop checkmark
Choose whether or not to
to make your crop permanent or click make the crop permanent.
the blue Reset Crop arrow to undo
changes and cancel the crop.
Step 6
6. Click the Drawing Tools option on
the ribbon. Draw the block using the
tools provided (see previous drawing
sections to revisit how to use specific
tools). See the next section for tips.
7. (Optional) Click the COLOR tab to color

your block.
NOTES
6 When working on an applique block, you many find Trace the image on the DRAW tab.
it helpful to turn off Auto Fill while tracing.
When using the Freehand tool to trace an applique

patch, you may want to adjust the way the
Freehand tool draws. See page 141 for details.
Color the block on the COLOR tab.
To learn how to edit photos from the Sketchbook,

see page 30.
To learn how to scan, import (onto the Image

Worktable), and edit an image, see Chapter 7.
Step 8
160
TIPS FOR TRACING

Choose Pieced or Applique All images are different. Following are
guidelines and tips to help you trace your
image.
1. Before drawing, study your image

and consider how you will divide your
image into patches which can be sewn.
For a pieced block, EasyDraw would be
appropriate for foundation pieced blocks 2. Decide if you’d like to make a pieced or
and most grid-based blocks. PolyDraw applique block. Then determine which
gives you the least flexibility in drawing
because of the special grids, but may be block style would be most appropriate
applicable in some situations. If making an applique, decide if you for the block you want to create.
want your traced block to have a
background (Block) or not (Motif). 3. Click the Hide/show image for tracing
button on the Precision Bar, when you
want to hide the image and see only
your drawing. If you want to delete
the image, click Tracing Image on the
Tip 3 ribbon, and click Delete Image in the
Hide/show image for tracing
palette.
4. Click the Add to Project Sketchbook

button as you are drawing to save the
block in stages. If you decide you like
an initial patch, but not some later
patches, you can edit an earlier version
of the block from the Sketchbook and
start again. 6
Applique
Show image for tracing Hide image for tracing 5. Applique will allow for the layering
of patches and gives you the most
flexibility in shaping individual patches.
6. Each drawn patch must be a complete,

closed patch. No patch can share a line
with another patch.
7. Any unclosed shapes will be considered

embroidery or quilting stitches, not
patches. Lines can be colored using
the Thread Tools, but they cannot be
printed as Template patterns or filled
with fabric, as patches can.
8. The drawing order of patches

Tip 7
The cat’s body is made up of closed patches, but its whiskers are determines the layering order. You can
only lines and therefore are considered quilting stitches. change the patch layering order at any
time, but it is easier to draw them in
the order you’d like them layered: first
drawn = bottom; last drawn = top.
161
9. You may want to click the Hide/show

Auto Fill on closed patches button on
the Precision Bar in order to still see the Tip 9
Hide/show Auto Fill on closed patches
image.
Foundation Pieced Blocks

10. You can turn Snapping Options on and
off while drawing to give you more
flexibility. Drawing a foundation pieced
block would be one of the instances
when you may want to turn Snap to
lines and arcs of drawing on.
11. You can also change your Snaps

Show Auto Fill on closed patches Hide Auto Fill on closed patches
Horizontal and Vertical while working.
For example, increase the number of
snaps while working on a more detailed
portion of the tracing. Remember,
EasyDraw Precision Bar
if you’ve turned Snap to Grid off,
changing these snap numbers won’t
matter because you’re no longer
Tip 11 Tip 10
snapping to these points. Change the Snaps Turn the Snapping
Horizontal and Vertical Options on and
12. When drawing a foundation pieced while drawing. off, as needed,
while tracing.
block, it’s usually best to start by
drawing the lines that split the block
into the large sections you intend to
6 sew. Then begin adding detail to each
section to make the block.
13. Using At Intersections (available

with the Edit tool, in the ADD NODES
palette) is particularly helpful while
drawing foundation pieced blocks
because it allows you to add nodes at
select intersections.
Grid-Based Pieced Blocks Tip 12

14. If you’re trying to draw a block based Start by drawing the lines for the major seams in the block, then add detail.
on a photograph of a traditional pieced

block (i.e. Ohio Star, Log Cabin, etc.),
you may find it easier to draw the block
by studying the grid of the block and
setting your Precision Bar appropriately,
rather than trying to trace the
photograph directly.
162
6D
CHAPTER 6
Section D: Serendipity Blocks
Frame Block......................................................................................................164
Tilt Block...........................................................................................................165
Merge Blocks....................................................................................................166
Clip & Flip.........................................................................................................167
Shrink & Flip.....................................................................................................168
Kaleidoscope....................................................................................................169
Fancy Star.........................................................................................................170
SERENDIPITY
Using the Create Serendipity option allows you to make new blocks without drawing so much as a line! All you have to do is
have a block, whether it’s one you’ve drawn or one from the library, in the Project Sketchbook. You will use the same first step
for all of the Serendipity options:
Step 1
1. With one or more blocks in your Project
Sketchbook (see page 200), click the
Block Worktable button, NEW BLOCK
tab, and Create Serendipity on the
ribbon.
Frame Block
Use this to add any of the pre-drawn frames
in EQ8 around your Project Sketchbook block.
There are over 140 frames to choose from! Serendipity
Toolbox
2. Click Frame Block. The Frame Block box
will appear. It has three sections: the
frame, the result, and the block.
3. In the left column, use the vertical

scrollbar to see all the frame choices,
and click the frame you want to use.
(Optional: Use the coloring arrows
below the column to choose either a Step 3 Step 5 Step 4
grayscale or uncolored frame.)

6 4. In the right column, use the vertical
scrollbar to see your Project
Sketchbook blocks. Click the block
you want to frame. (Optional: Use the
coloring arrows below the column to
choose from the block colorings.)
5. In the center, you will see the resulting

block. This picture is interactive. If your
block is asymmetrical (not the same
on all sides), click on the block in the
center picture to rotate it 90 degrees
with each click.
Coloring arrows Coloring arrows
Step 6 Step 7
for frames for Sketchbook blocks
6. If you like the new framed block, click
Add to Sketchbook. (If you click Add
to Sketchbook, that button will be
disabled until you choose a different
frame or block, or you rotate the block.)
If you don’t like it, start over at step 3. NOTES
These frames are pre-drawn for you. To draw your own frames, try Merge Blocks
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to try framing other instead (see page 166).
blocks, or click Close to return to the
worktable. Blocks created can be edited further on the Block Worktable.
164
Chapter 6D: Drawing Blocks–Serendipity Blocks
Tilt Block
Use Tilt Block to rotate or tilt the block inside
a square (like Diamond in the Square at
varying angles). Tilt 45 degrees to turn a block
on-point. Or create a fun, twisted effect by
continuing to “tilt” each newly-created block.
2. Click Tilt Block. The Tilt Block box will

appear. It has three sections: the block,
Step 2
the result, and a slider to control the
tilt.

Step 3 Step 5 scrollbar to see your Project
Sketchbook blocks. Click the block you
want to tilt. (Optional: Use the coloring
arrows below the column to choose
from the block colorings.)
4. Below the “result” block, drag the slider

rectangle to the desired tilt.
5. You will see the block tilt as you

drag the slider rectangle. This
Step 4 picture is interactive. If your block is
asymmetrical (not the same on all
sides), click on the block in the “result”
picture to rotate it 90 degrees with
Coloring arrows
Step 6 Step 7
each click. 6
6. If you like the new tilted block, click
disabled until you change the tilt or
block, or you rotate the block.) If you
don’t like it, start over at step 3.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to try tilting other

worktable.
NOTE
Blocks created can be edited further on the Block
Worktable.
165
Merge Blocks
Use this to combine two blocks from your
Project Sketchbook to create one new block.
2. Click Merge Blocks. The Merge Blocks

box will appear. It has three sections:
the background block, the result, and
Step 2
the inner block.

Step 3 Step 4
scrollbar to see your blocks that fit
the requirement. (Not all blocks will
show because they do not fit the
requirements. Click the Help button for
more info.) Click the block you want
as the background. (Optional: Use the
4. In the right column, use the vertical

scrollbar to see all your Project
want to merge into the background.
(Optional: Use the coloring arrows
below the column to choose from the
block colorings.) Coloring arrows Coloring arrows
for background blocks Click Help to see for Sketchbook blocks
background block
5. In the middle, you will see the resulting
6 block. This picture is interactive in two
requirements
ways:
If there is more than one square, Step 5
rectangle, or 4-sided spot in the

background block, click a different spot
of the background block to change the
location of the merged block.
If your block is asymmetrical (not the

same on all sides), click on the block in
the picture to rotate it 90 degrees with
each click.
6. If you like the new merged block,

click Add to Sketchbook. (If you click
Add to Sketchbook, that button will
be disabled until you change the
background or merging block.) If you
Step 6 Step 7
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to try merging other

worktable.
166
Clip & Flip

Use this to flip and rotate the upper-left
quadrant block to create a new version of the
block.
2. Click Clip & Flip. The Clip & Flip box

will appear. It has three sections: the
Step 2
block to choose, the preview, and
buttons (flags and a die) to choose the
orientation.
Step 3 3. In the left column, use the vertical
want to clip and flip. (Optional: Use the
4. Below the preview, click to choose one

of the flag orientation blocks or the
red die button to generate random
samples. You can click the die multiple
times for different orientations.
5. If you like the block preview, click

Step 4 Add to Sketchbook. (If you click Add
disabled until you change the block, or
Coloring arrows
Step 5 Step 6 flag or die orientation.) If you don’t like 6
it, start over at step 3.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to try clipping and

flipping other blocks, or click Close to
NOTES
You will have more interesting results if you choose
blocks that are asymmetrical (not the same on all
sides).
EQ clips the block to the top-left quadrant and uses

that for the flipping, so if there are different colors
or designs in the other quadrants of the block, you
will not see them in the new block.
Blocks created using this feature can be printed

for patterns, set in quilts, and colored on quilts. It
is recommended that you do not edit to the Block
Worktable for further editing or coloring.
167
Shrink & Flip

Use this to shrink a block and then flip and
rotate it in the four quadrants to create a new
block.
2. Click Shrink & Flip. The Shrink & Flip

box will appear. It has three sections:
Step 2
the block to choose, the preview, and
buttons (flags and a die) to choose the
orientation.
Step 3
want to shrink and flip. (Optional: Use
the coloring arrows below the column
to choose from the block colorings.)
4. Below the preview, click to choose one

of the flag orientation blocks or the
red die button to generate random
samples. You can click the die multiple
times for different orientations.
5. If you like the block preview, click Step 4

disabled until you change the block, or Coloring arrows
6 flag or die orientation.) If you don’t like
Step 5 Step 6
it, start over at step 3.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to try shrinking and

flipping other blocks, or click Close to
NOTES
You will have more interesting results if you choose
blocks that are asymmetrical (not the same on all
sides).

168
Kaleidoscope
Use this to turn a simple block into a
kaleidoscope!
2. Click Kaleidoscope. The Create

Kaleidoscope from Block box will
appear. It has three sections: the block
Step 2
to choose, the preview, and which
triangular portion of the block to
Step 3 Step 4 choose.

want to kaleidoscope. (Optional: Use
the coloring arrows below the column
to choose from the block colorings.)
4. In the right column, choose the

triangular portion of the block you wish
to use. There are 8 options in all, so
make sure you use the vertical scrollbar
on this column to see all the options.

Coloring arrows
Step 5 Step 6
disabled until you change the block or
triangular portion.) If you don’t like it, 6
start over at step 3.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to try kaleidoscoping

other blocks, or click Close to return to
the worktable.
NOTE
169
Fancy Star
Fills star points with your selected block.
2. Click Fancy Star. The Fancy Star box will

appear. It has three sections: the block
to choose, the preview, and settings at
the bottom to choose.
Step 2
scrollbar to see your Project Sketchbook
Step 3
blocks. Click the block you want to
make a fancy star. (Optional: Use the
4. Decide if you want to create a motif

or block. Put a check next to Add a
background patch to star motif to
create a block. Leave it clear if you
want to create a motif.
5. Click the Select number of points drop- Step 4

down box to choose the number of star
Step 5
points (you can choose between 5 and
10 points). Step 6
6. If you chose to create a block in step 4,

drag the slider bar to choose how large Coloring arrows
6 the star is on the background block. Step 7 Step 8

disabled until you change the block,
number of points, size, or whether
there is a background patch.) If you
8. Repeat steps 3-7 to try creating other

fancy star blocks, or click Close to
NOTES
Create a motif and block, if unsure which you’ll
use. Click Add to Sketchbook with a check in Add
a background patch to star motif and without a
check. The motifs will be saved on the Motif tab in
your Project Sketchbook Blocks section.

170
7
CHAPTER 7
Working with Photos and Fabric Images
EQ8 comes with hundreds of photos and fabrics that you can use “as is” in your quilt designs. You can also import
pictures you’ve taken, or scans of your favorite fabrics. Whether working with photos or fabrics from the built-in
libraries, or importing your own, they can all be edited, including cropping, resizing, and changing their coloring.
These options, similar to those in a photo-editing software, will help you create your own fabric designs to print
on fabric, prepare images for your next memory quilt, and much more.
Understanding Photos......................................................................................172
Scanning Fabrics or Photos...............................................................................172
Importing an Image..........................................................................................174
Editing an Image...............................................................................................175
Resizing an Image.............................................................................................175
Deleting an Image............................................................................................176
Scaling Fabric....................................................................................................177
Straightening, Flipping, Rotating, or Shearing an Image..................................178
Cropping an Image...........................................................................................180
Worktable Tools................................................................................................181
Coloring an Image............................................................................................182
Using the Hue Map...........................................................................................184
Creating Your Own Colorway............................................................................185
Using and Viewing the Histogram....................................................................187
Changing Brightness or Contrast......................................................................189
Using Special Effects for an Image....................................................................190
Increasing or Decreasing Color Depth..............................................................196
UNDERSTANDING PHOTOS
“Image” is the generic term EQ8 uses for any item that can be edited on the Image Worktable. In more technical terms, any
file that is saved in an image file format (BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, or TIF files).
These images can be photos you’ve taken with your camera, fabrics you’ve scanned, etc. When importing and saving from the
Image Worktable, these items are saved in the Photos section of the Project Sketchbook. So, even if the image you’re working
with is a scanned fabric, EQ8 interprets the image as a photo. If you’d like to treat the image like a fabric, you can use the Copy
to Fabrics button (see page 30) in the Photos section of the Sketchbook, or use the Add as Fabric button (see page 181) in the
Image Worktable palette after editing on the worktable.
Quilt Worktable
You can set images in your quilts for planning
any type of printable fabric quilt (memory
quilts, art quilts, photo effect quilts), quilts
where portions are already finished (large
panels, T-shirt quilts, embroidered blocks,
etc.), and even for planning borders for quilt
centers. To set an image on your quilt, make
sure it is in your Project Sketchbook, then see
page 79.
In addition, you can use an image to create a

One Patch Quilt using the Photo Patchwork
Layout. This quilt will be filled with solid
colors based on the image. To create a Photo A photograph printed on fabric is the focal point of this quilt design.
Patchwork quilt, see page 49.
Block Worktable
Images can be traced to create printable
patterns, using the tools provided for the
block type you choose. See page 158.
7
Image Worktable
Images can be cropped, rotated, flipped,
sheared, and their colors can be modified in
Flower photograph used as a tracing image for an applique block.
many different ways.
SCANNING FABRICS OR
PHOTOS
You can scan any image and use it in your quilt
design, including actual fabric. Because there
are so many scanners available, you will need
to be familiar with how your scanner works.
Following are general suggestions for the best
results when scanning. When you scan an
image, we suggest saving it in a subfolder of
Circular symmetries effect used to create this kaleidoscopic image.
Documents or Pictures so you can find it again
easily.
172
Chapter 7: Working with Photos and Fabric Images
Fabric cropped without

regard for the design repeat.
Fabric has been cropped
to the design repeat. Scanning Fabrics
Suggested Size for Fabrics
Approximately 5” x 5” (350 pixels). The fabric
image does not need to be square, especially
if you’re trying to crop to the design repeat.
Generally speaking, anywhere from 3” to 7” is
an acceptable size. See Note below, left.
Resolution for Scanned Fabrics

• 72 or 75 dpi – all files but GIF or PNG
• 96 dpi – GIF or PNG files
Other Fabric Scanning Tips

• Iron the fabric and place the fabric as
straight as possible on the scanner bed,
especially with striped or checked fabric.
If you need to straighten the fabric image
after importing, see page 178.
• Don’t waste fabric by cutting out a swatch

to use. Just drape an ironed portion of
your fabric over the scanner bed.
When the fabric is “tiled” in the quilt, The tiling is seamless in this quilt because
it’s very obvious where the fabric the fabric image was cropped properly.
has been cropped.
• If the fabric shifts when closing the
scanner lid, use a book to hold it in place
instead. If your fabric is light-colored, and
NOTE you can see the book through the fabric,
try covering the book in white paper.
To keep file sizes as small as possible, fabric in EQ8 “tiles” (repeats) the small
fabric design you save, in order to simulate the effect of a large piece of fabric on
• Scaling – Don’t change the scale of the
your quilt. To make this tiling less noticeable, it is important to find your fabric’s
design repeat, and spend time cropping your scan at the appropriate place. It’s fabric because EQ8 will correctly scale the
also important to keep the cropped image as small as possible. Small repeats fabric on the block or quilt for you, as
mean small files (which is good), and large repeats mean larger files (which can long as you follow the resolution (dpi)
make your computer run slower). Make EQ8 run most efficiently by keeping your
project file sizes manageable. This means not loading in too many fabrics at once,
guidelines above. If you need to adjust 7
the scale of the fabric after importing, see
and keeping your scanned image sizes small.
page 177.
• Normal vs. Photo Color – choose a

setting such as Normal rather than Photo
color, if possible.
• Descreening – A scanned fabric’s weave

can produce a moiré pattern. To avoid
this, use a setting such as Descreen, or
Magazine/Newspaper. Or slightly turn
the fabric on the scanner bed.
• Cropping – The image you save is what

will appear when you color in EQ8. Be
Look for options like Color Mode or Color Setting, and Descreen or
Magazine/Newspaper. Every scanner software is different. Experiment to sure to crop your fabric to cut out any
find which settings work best for your particular scanner. white edge caused by the scanner bed
behind the fabric. See page 180.
173
Scanning Photos NOTES

Suggested Size for Photos Resolution - 72 dpi
If you will be printing the photo from EQ8, If you do not plan to print directly from EQ8, say you have a t-shirt quilt you are
import it (see below) in the same dimension working on, or want to use a panel print, keep the resolution low to save file
you’ll set and print it. For example, import a space. Low resolution images (screen-res) is fine for visual representations in EQ8.
5” x 7” photo and set it in your quilt at 5” x 7”.
Resolution - 150 dpi or higher
If you plan to print the photo onto inkjet fabric sheets directly from EQ8, a
Resolution for Scanned Photos
resolution of 150 dpi or higher is best. Remember to leave some extra printed
• 72 dpi – when not printing from EQ8 space around your photo for seam allowance.
• 150 dpi or higher – when printing from
EQ8 (See Notes, right.)
IMPORTING AN IMAGE
To import an image onto the Image Step 1
Worktable, whether you’ve scanned,
downloaded, or gotten it on to your computer
some other way, follow these steps. (If you
want to import the image into a Library, see
page 208.)
1. Click on the Image Worktable button,

then the IMAGE tab. On the ribbon,
click Edit, then the Import Image
option in the palette.
2. Navigate to the location of the file on

your computer.
3. Click on the image file you want to

import.
4. Click Open. The image will appear on
7 the Image Worktable.
5. Click Add to Project Sketchbook to

make the original image part of your Step 3 Step 4
current project.
NOTES
You can now change the size, orientation, and
colors on the image, apply filters and effect, and
much more, see pages 175-196.
You can only import one image at a time on the

Image Worktable. If you’d like to import multiple
photos at once, use the Import button in the Photo
Library, see page 208.
If you are replacing an image on the worktable and The selected image will open on the Image Worktable.
have not saved changes to the previous image, you
will receive a prompt. Click Yes to save the previous
image in the Project Sketchbook Photos section.
Click No to discard the changes.
Step 5
174
EDITING AN IMAGE
There are many ways to edit images on the Image Worktable. First, you must have the image you want to edit on the
Image Worktable. You can import the image, as explained on the previous page, or edit it from the Photo Library or Project
Sketchbook.
Edit to Image Worktable – From the Photo Library

Adds the selected item to your Project Sketchbook
and immediately places it on the Image Worktable. In the Photo Library (from Libraries on the
main menu), you can find and select an image
and click the Edit to Image Worktable button
to instantly be able to work on that image.
The selected image will also be added to the
Libraries menu > Project Sketchbook.
Photo Library
From the Project

Sketchbook
In the Photos section of the Project
Sketchbook, you can click the Edit button and
then click the to Image worktable option.
If you have a fabric in the Project Sketchbook

Edit from the Photo Library
that you want to edit on the Image Worktable,
find and select it, and click the Copy to
Photos button. Then go to the Photos section
and click the Edit button and then to Image
Worktable option.
RESIZING AN IMAGE
It’s a good idea to add the original image
to the Project Sketchbook before you start
making size adjustments.
Edit from the Project Sketchbook 1. With your image on the Image
7
Worktable, click the IMAGE tab. On
the ribbon, click Edit, then the Resize
Image option in the toolbox. The Resize
Image box will appear.
2. (Optional) The Width and Height

numbers are in the Units specified.
If you want to use another unit of
measurement (Pixels, Inches, or
Step 3 Centimeters), change the Units first and
then change the Width and Height.
Step 2
Step 1 3. Use the arrows next to the size or
double-click on the numbers and type
a new size. If you have Maintain aspect
ratio checked, changing one number
will change the other to keep them
proportional.
175
4. (Optional) To change the Resolution,

double-click the existing number
to highlight it and type something
different. Note: Resolution is in pixels
per inch or pixels per centimeter. If
Units is set to Pixels, changing the Step 4
Resolution will adjust Width and Height
automatically when you click OK.
Step 5
5. If you are decreasing the size of an
image, set Resampling to Normal.
Step 6
If you are increasing the size of an
image, set Resampling to Bicubic and
Increasing the size of a small image may
averaging (or Linear and averaging).
make it blurry. Decreasing the size of an
image may make it appear slightly sharper.
6. Click OK to apply your changes or
Cancel to leave the image unchanged.
Doubling this photo’s size has created a
When you change the size of an image, blurry image.
the image on your screen and the rulers
will re-scale to reflect the change.

the new image.
NOTE
Typically, you do not want to increase the size
of images past what their resolution and size
will allow because the quality of the picture will
degrade. We recommend a resolution of 150-200
dpi when printing an image on printable fabric.
7 DELETING AN IMAGE
To clear the Image Worktable, so you can work
on a new image, follow these steps. Delete
Image will not remove a saved image from the
Sketchbook. However, if you have not saved
the image previously, the image will be lost.
Add to Project Sketchbook if you’re not sure.
1. On the Image Worktable, click the

IMAGE tab. On the ribbon, click Edit,
then the Delete Image option in the
palette. You may receive a prompt
asking if you want to delete.
2. Click Yes, if you’re sure you want

to delete the image. The image will Step 1
disappear and the worktable will be
blank. You can click No, and you’ll
remain on the Image Worktable with
Step 2
that image on the screen.
176
IMAGE tab SCALING FABRIC

Edit A new feature in EQ8 is the Scale Fabric tool.
You will not need this for fabrics already in
EQ8, as all the fabrics that are built into the
software are already scaled properly. Instead,
you can use it when you import fabrics you’ve
taken a photo of, or saved from a website. For
example, if the fabric has flowers that are 1”
wide, but the flowers are only ½” wide when
you import the image, you can use this feature
Step 1 to adjust the fabric.
1. With the image on the Image

Worktable, click the IMAGE tab. On the
ribbon, click Edit, then the Scale Fabric
option in the toolbox. You will see the
FABRIC SCALING palette.
2. Measure the actual fabric with a ruler.

Compare to the rulers on the screen.
3. Enter the correct size for the fabric

in the palette. Using the arrows
will change the size in quarter-inch
increments. Or you can double-click on
0.000 and type a number.
Step 2 4. Click the Apply Scale button. You will
When measuring the actual fabric (top), three polka dots are 4” wide.
But the rulers on the screen show this same section of fabric as only 3 3/8” wide. see the image and rulers change.
This means the fabric image is not true to scale.
5. (Optional) Now that the fabric is scaled
After applying the scale, the rulers on screen now to the right size, you can use the Crop
show that the three polka dots are 4” wide.
tool to crop the fabric image to the
repeat. See page 180. 7
6. Click Add as Fabric to save the new
image to the Fabrics section of the
Sketchbook. You may need to use
the vertical scrollbar to find the Add
as Fabric button below the FABRIC
SCALING palette. See page 181.
7. (Optional) If you would also like this

newly scaled fabric image to appear in
the Photos section of the Sketchbook,
click the Add to Project Sketchbook
button.
Step 3 Step 4
Step 6
177
STRAIGHTENING, FLIPPING, ROTATING, OR SHEARING AN IMAGE

IMAGE tab
the ribbon, click Edit, then the Rotate Edit
tool in the palette. You will see many
ROTATE & SHEAR OPTIONS.
Straightening an Image
This new tool is extremely helpful when
you’ve scanned a fabric, particularly with
a stripe or design in a column or row. Use
the design printed on the fabric to help you Step 1
straighten it. See the EQ8 Online Support site
for more examples of when this tool is useful.
2. Click the Straighten tool. Your cursor

will change to a crosshair.
3. Click, hold, and drag your cursor on

the fabric to draw a line. This line will
Step 2
determine the angle that the fabric is
adjusted to make the design straight. Step 4
In other words, draw the line next
to something that should be straight
(vertically or horizontally) on the fabric.
NOTES
The line does not have to be the entire length or
width of the image.
If you don’t like the line you’ve drawn, you can just Step 3 – Draw a line on the fabric.
7
This line was drawn following the alignment
draw it again (no need to erase or undo). of the solid pink triangles so that they will be
vertically straight after applying.
4. When you are happy with your line, Zoomed in view
click Apply Straighten. EQ will adjust
the image so that the line is perfectly
horizontal or vertical.
5. (Recommended) Use the Crop tool to

get rid of the solid background added
after straightening. See page 180.
6. Click Add as Fabric to make the

straightened fabric image appear
in the Fabrics section of the Project
Sketchbook. See page 181.
After Apply Straighten, the pink triangles are vertically straight. You can now
use the Crop tool to get rid of the background and then Add as Fabric.
Step 6
178
Flipping an Image
Your image must be asymmetrical in order to
notice any changes when flipping or rotating.
2. Click the Flip Horizontally tool to flip

the image from left to right.
Original Image 3. Click the Flip Vertically tool to flip the

image from top to bottom.
Rotating an Image
There are 2 ways to rotate the image; a simple
90 degree rotation or by specific degree.
2. Click the Rotate 90 tool to rotate the

image clockwise 90 degrees with each
click.
3. Click the Rotate -90 tool to rotate the

image counter-clockwise 90 degrees
with each click.
4. (Optional) Prior to the exact-degree

rotation, you can change the color
of the background canvas. Click the
Change Color button for the Create a
Color box to appear. Select the hue and
adjust the Saturation and Lightness
Step 4
Select hue by dragging yellow #1 sliders. When you are happy with the
around the color wheel selected canvas color shown in the
bottom rectangle, click OK.
5. Double-click the number next to

Rotation (-360 to 360) and type a new
7
number.
6. (Optional) Leave the Crop image after

rotation box unchecked if you want
Step 6 Step 5 Step 7 to see all four corners of your image
inside the rotation. Check this option
if you want your image to rotate inside
Adjust its current dimensions and cut off
sliders
the portions that fall outside those
dimensions.
7. Click the Apply button to rotate. (You

may have to click the Fit in Window
Selected color appears here.
Crop image after rotation Make adjustments above until tool to reposition the image on the
unchecked you are happy with the color. worktable.)
8. (Optional) You can repeat steps 5-7 as

Crop image after rotation many times as you’d like.
checked
179
Shearing an Image
You can shear the image horizontally,
vertically, or both. Step 2
2. (Optional) Prior to shearing, you can

change the color of the background
canvas. Click the Change Color
button for the Create a Color box to
appear. Select the hue and adjust the
Saturation and Lightness sliders. When
you are happy with the selected canvas
Step 4
color shown in the bottom rectangle,
click OK.
Step 3
3. Double-click on either the Shear
horizontally or Shear vertically boxes
and type new numbers (between -45 to
45).
4. Click the Apply button to sheer. (You

may have to click the Fit in Window
tool to reposition the image on the
worktable.)
Shear horizontally
Shear vertically
CROPPING AN IMAGE IMAGE tab
You can use this tool to cut out unneeded

Edit
portions of an image.

Crop
ribbon, click Edit, then the Crop option
7 in the palette. The image worktable will
have a dotted border with black corner
and side handles.
2. To crop by sight, position your cursor

over one of the corner or side handles
and drag it to a new location. The
portions that will be cut out will show
as a transparency.
To crop precisely to a custom size, type

in X- and Y-axis numbers for where you
want the top-left corner of the crop box
to start and Width and Height numbers
for how large you want the box to Step 2 – Crop by sight
be. (All numbers can be changed by The cursor will change to a
double-headed arrow with a crop
double-clicking on the existing numbers icon when positioned over one of
and typing, or using the arrows.) the crop box handles.
Step 2 – Crop precisely to custom size
Enter coordinates and sizes in the palette.
180
To crop precisely to a preset size, click

Step 2 the drop-down box beside Presets and
choose a dimension. If the choice you
make won’t fit, click OK and choose a
different (smaller) dimension.
3. Once the crop box is established, you

Crop precisely to preset size
Click the drop-down arrow and choose a size. can still edit it if needed. To change the
position, click inside the crop box and
drag it to a new position (or change the
X- and Y-axis numbers). To change the
size, use the handles (or change the
Step 5
Width and Height numbers).
4. When you are ready to crop, click the

Apply Crop green checkmark button.
Step 4
If you don’t want to crop, click the blue
Reset Crop button.
5. If you like the new, cropped image, click

Add to Project Sketchbook.
WORKTABLE TOOLS
These tools appear in all palettes on the
IMAGE tab of the Image Worktable (you
may have to use the vertical scrollbar to see
Depending on which these tools). You must have an image on the
palette is open, you may
need to use the scrollbar
worktable for the tools to be enabled.
to see the Worktable Tools.
View Actual Size – Displays the image at its
actual resolution. Large images will display 7
beyond the worktable.
Fit in Window – Resizes the image to fit the

full size of the worktable. Use after zooming
in, or after editing the image.
Pan – Click, hold and drag to move the image

The Worktable Tools are available around on the worktable. This is helpful when
in all palettes of the IMAGE tab.
zoomed in really close.
Add as Fabric – the images on this worktable

NOTE are saved in the Photos section of the Project
If you import an image of a fabric on the Image Worktable and click the Add to Sketchbook (even if they are images of fabric).
Project Sketchbook button, rather than the Add as Fabric tool, the fabric image In order to make these images into usable
will appear in the Photos section of the Sketchbook. fabric to color your designs with, click this
tool to make them save as fabric. (You will
You can copy a fabric image from the Photos section of the Sketchbook to the
find them in the Fabrics section of the Project
Fabrics section. Click the View Project Sketchbook button > Photos section. Select
the fabric image and click the Copy to Fabrics button in the Sketchbook. Sketchbook.)
181
COLORING AN IMAGE
You can adjust the colors in an image in creative ways using these various tools. Each feature will give you different results and
may work better on one image than another. As always, it’s a good idea to save the original image in the Project Sketchbook
before you start changing colors (just in case you don’t like the result, and also to have a copy of the original image).
Color Options
Color Balance – adjusts color levels in the
image and makes dark pixels darker and light Before After
pixels lighter. Auto adjust may be enough
without needing to use the sliders.
Red/Green/Blue – adjusts red, green, and

blue in an image to add color casts or remove
them. Leave a number set to 0 if you don’t
want the value to change.
Hue/Sat/Light – adjusts the color, intensity of

color, and lightness of color in an image. Leave
a number set to 0 if you don’t want the value
to change. Color Accent used to highlight purple umbrella
Colorize – creates a two-color image based

on the chosen color and its intensity. When
saturation is low, the image looks like a subtly Before
colored black and white photo.
Color Accent – select a hue or range of hues

to emphasize or isolate while minimizing the
hues in the rest of the image.
Hue Map – replaces specific hues (colors)

7 in your image. See page 184 for more After
information.
Colorize used to create

Channel Mixer – adjusts how much each of a sepia-tone image
the three color channels (red, green, and blue)
contribute to the final image.
Create Colorway – swaps all colors in the

image for a new set of colors based off
palettes of color. See page 185 for more
information.
182
Step 1 Using the Color Options

ribbon, click Color.
2. In the ADJUST IMAGE COLOR palette,

choose one of the color options. See
descriptions on page 182.
3. If you are using the Channel Mixer

option, click the down arrow on the box
next to Output channel to select the
Step 2
Red, Green, or Blue channel.
4. Use the sliders to adjust the image (and

where applicable, you can double-click
on a number and type a new number).
5. Click Help at any time on a tool box

to learn more about the specific way
settings affect the image. Close the
Help before continuing.
6. Click Preview to see the “After” image

temporarily on your worktable for a
closer view. (Hue/Sat/Light doesn’t
have a Preview button because it shows
you automatically as you adjust the
Step 3 sliders.)
7. Click Add to Project Sketchbook to

save the new image in the Project
Step 4 Sketchbook and put it on the
worktable. 7
Click Close if you do not wish to keep
your changes, or you want to go back to
the worktable.
NOTES
Before adjusting any image, pay attention to the
starting numbers in case you want to switch back
to them. Or, click Close to discard your changes and
repeat step 2 to choose the same tool again, but
use different values/numbers.
You can also Increase or Decrease Color Depth, see

page 196.
183
USING THE HUE MAP

The Hue Map replaces specific hues (or colors)
in your image.
1. With the image on the Image IMAGE tab

ribbon, click Color, then the Hue Map Color
option in the palette.
2. Select which color you want to change

by clicking on a wedge in the outer
color wheel or moving the small dot
around the outside of the color wheel.
(You have 12 choices, each representing
a 30 degree range.) The selected color
range will appear as a color chip and
set of numbers at the top of the vertical
slider.
Step 1
3. The vertical slider bar starts at the top
by default. Drag the slider down to
adjust the hue/color. The new value will
appear as a color chip and one number
at the bottom of the vertical slider. The
“After” image and inner color wheel
will update to reflect the change.
4. You can repeat steps 2-3 to change

other colors on the color wheel. (See
Note.)
5. Saturation shift affects the entire

image. Leave this number set to 0 if
7 you don’t want the value to change.
Step 2
Negative numbers will desaturate or
gray out the image. Positive numbers Step 3
will oversaturate the image.
6. Lightness shift affects the entire image.

Leave this number set to 0 if you don’t
want the value to change. Negative
numbers will darken the image. Positive Step 5 Step 6
numbers will lighten the image.
7. Click Help at any time to learn more

about the way specific settings affect
the image. Close the Help before
continuing.

closer view.
184
Before 9. Click Add to Sketchbook to save the

new image in the project and put it on
After the worktable.

your changes.
NOTES
Each time you click Add to Project Sketchbook
the image is saved in its current condition and
put on the worktable, but the Hue Map window
does not close. Use this to your advantage to save
intermediary images in the Sketchbook and reset
the controls to their starting point, especially if you
Using the Hue Map, we changed are unsure about which colors to change.
the flower from pink to blue.
If you want to undo one of your color changes

represented on the color wheel, select that color,
and drag the slider bar back to the top of the
vertical bar.
If you don’t see much of a difference in the After

box after following steps 2-3, it may be that the
selected color isn’t used much in the image.
CREATING YOUR OWN

COLORWAY
This tool swaps all colors in the image for a
new set of colors based off palettes of color.
You may want to check out the histogram to

understand better how this works. Spikes in
IMAGE tab
the histogram determine whether your image 7
Color is a 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-color image. For more info
about the Histogram, see page 187.

the ribbon, click Color, then the Create
Colorway option in the palette. The
Create Colorway box will appear with
Before and After images. It will also tell
you what type of color image it is (it can
be 1-4).
Step 1
NOTE
Images must have a color depth of 24 bits to use
this tool. If your image is not the right depth, EQ8
will display a box asking to automatically convert it
for you. Click OK.
185
2. Click one of the top three buttons on

the left to pick your palette: Ready-made palettes
Custom palettes
Select from ready-made palettes – Random palettes
Click one of the available color wheels
at the bottom to update the twelve
palettes at the top. Adjust Saturation Step 2
or Lightness with the sliders, if needed.
Click one of the twelve palettes at the Step 2 (left) –
top to choose that palette. Click OK. Select from ready-made palettes
Create a custom palette – Drag the

yellow numbers to new positions
around the outside of the color wheel
to pick custom colors. Adjust Saturation
or Lightness with the sliders, if needed.
Your new colors will appear at the
bottom. Click OK.
Click to create random palettes – Click

this button repeatedly to see different
computer-generated options.
3. Click the Rearrange/Shift button to

keep the current palette, but switch
which colors in the image get which
colors from the new palette.
Step 2 (right) – Create a custom palette
The number of yellow circles you see here
4. Click Help at any time to learn more depends on the number of colors in your image.
about the way specific settings affect
the image. Close the Help before
continuing.
7 5. Click Preview to see the After image

closer view.
6. Click Add to Sketchbook to save the

the worktable.

your changes.
NOTE
The number of spikes in the histogram (see page
Step 3
187) may change as you use this tool. Pixels may
be averaged together. You could start out with a
3-color image, go to 2-color, and back to 3-color,
using it repeatedly. Typically, a 1-color image will
stay a 1-color image (unless you use Hue Map, page
184, or something else to create more spikes).
186
USING AND VIEWING

THE HISTOGRAM
A histogram is a graph that provides useful
information on lighting, contrast, pixel values,
and saturation. It goes from dark (left) to
light (right) and shows the number of pixels
in the photo at each value as height on
the graph. Some digital cameras show you
this information, too, which can help you
fix your shot before taking a picture that is
underexposed or overexposed.
Step 1
Viewing the Histogram
To view the Histogram you must have an
Step 3 image on the Image Worktable.

Worktable, click Image on the menu
bar, point to Histogram, then click
Histogram in the side menu. The
Histogram box will appear.
2. Use the checkboxes to determine which

Step 2 values you want to display.
3. Close this window by clicking the X in

the top-right corner when you’re done
viewing the information.
Equalizing and Adjusting

the Histogram 7
For either of the following options you must
Step 1 have an image on the Image Worktable.

ribbon, click Histogram. The ADJUST
IMAGE HISTOGRAM palette will appear.
Equalizing the Histogram

This option spreads out the spikes in the
histogram for you automatically.
2. Click the Equalize button. The Equalize

Step 2
Histogram box will appear.
187
3. Choose the color space:

RGB space – does each channel (red,
green, blue) separately.
Step 3
YUV space – (recommended)
incorporates human perception of
luminance.
Step 4
Grayscale – equalizes according to gray

levels.
4. Click OK to equalize the histogram. Click

Cancel to make no changes.
Step 5 Step 5
Undo Add to Project
5. If you don’t like the changes, click the Sketchbook
Undo button on the left vertical toolbar.
If you do like the changes, click Add to
Project Sketchbook.
Adjusting the Histogram

This option allows you to control the
histogram adjustments.
2. Click the Adjust button.
3. Use the Glow, Lighten, Warm, or Pastel

buttons to see artistic presets. Click the
Reset to default button if you want to
try it on your own.
4. Make adjustments to the available Step 2

settings. Click the Help button for
7 detailed information on these settings.
5. Click Add to Sketchbook to save the Step 3

the worktable.
6. Click Close if you do not wish to keep

your changes or you want to return to
the worktable.
NOTES
As you make adjustments, you will see a second
histogram (gray = before, pink = after).
Click Preview at any time to see the After image on

your worktable temporarily. Your original worktable
image will come back once you move the controls Step 5 Step 6 Step 4
again.
188
Histogram
CHANGING
IMAGE tab BRIGHTNESS OR
CONTRAST
If an image is too dark or too light, you can
use the Bright/Contrast option to adjust it.

the ribbon, click Histogram, then the
Bright/Contrast option in the palette.
Step 1
The Brightness/Contrast box will
appear.
2. Drag the triangles on the Brightness

and Contrast sliders to adjust the
image. See Notes below.
3. Click Preview to see the After image

closer view.
4. Click Add to Sketchbook to save the

the worktable. You can then repeat step
2 to create different colorings for your
image.
Step 2
5. Click Close if you do not wish to keep
your changes or you want to return to
the worktable.
NOTES
Step 4 Step 3 Step 5 Brightness: 7
Drag the Brightness slider to the right to increase
brightness to the point of making the image white.
Drag the Brightness slider to the left to decrease

brightness to the point of making the image black.
Leave this number set to 0 if you don’t want it to

change. (Range -100 to 100)
Contrast:
Drag the Contrast slider to the right to increase
contrast or the saturation/intensity of the image.
Drag the Contrast slider to the left to decrease the

contrast and give the image a gray, dull-looking
cast.
Leave this number set to 0 if you don’t want it to

change. (Range -100 to 100)
189
USING SPECIAL EFFECTS FOR AN IMAGE

You can create countless variations for your images using the Special Effects options. To use any of these effects, you must
start with an image on the Image Worktable, and make sure it’s saved to the Project Sketchbook (Add to Project Sketchbook)
before you start creating new images. Since there are so many variations, it’s impossible to describe them all, so be sure to use
the Help buttons to see illustrated color examples of how each control affects the image. If you are using large images, please
be patient while EQ8 does the rendering.
Applying Effects to an IMAGE tab Special Effects
Image
ribbon, click Special Effects, then the
Effects option in the palette. The Apply
Effects box will appear with your image
displayed.
2. From the top menu in this box, choose

the type of effect, then choose the
name of the effect. (For example,
choose Pixelate > Roman Mosaic.) Step 1
3. A Samples window may appear

showing you four examples of the
desired effect. Click on one of the four
examples to choose it or click on the X
in the top-right corner to close it.
NOTE
Step 2
If you put a check next to Turn off Auto-samples
dialog, the Samples window will not automatically Step 3
appear. You can see the window and its examples
7
Choose a sample or close the window.
by clicking the Click to select from auto-samples
button. If you want to always show the window
again, uncheck Turn off Auto-samples dialog.
4. Each effect has different controls.

Where applicable, move the sliders,
change the drop-down boxes, and drag
the red bull’s eye around on the image
for different looks.
Auto-samples
checkbox
(See Note)
190
5. If you don’t know which settings you

want to use, try clicking the Generate
random samples button (the dice cube).

closer view.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to continue to change

the different controls until you find an
Step 5 effect you like (these changes will be
made to the original image, until you
add it to the Project Sketchbook).
8. Click Add to Sketchbook to save any

new images in the project and put it on
the worktable. With this new, affected
image, you can again repeat steps 2-6.
Or, click Close to discard any changes.
9. The Apply Effects window will remain

open until you are done and click Close.
NOTE
To return to the original image and start adding
special effects to it again, you will need to select
and edit it from the Project Sketchbook. (You
cannot Undo the special effects.)
IMAGE tab Special Effects

Applying Filters to an Image
ribbon, click Special Effects, then the 7
Filters option in the palette. The Image
Filters box will appear with your image
displayed.
2. From the top menu in this box, choose

the type of filter, then choose the name
of the filter. (For example, choose Edge
Detection > Brightness.)
Step 1 3. Each filter has different controls. Where
applicable, move the sliders and change
the drop-down boxes.
Step 2
191
4. If you don’t know which settings you

want to use, try clicking the Generate
random samples button (the dice cube).
5. Click Preview to see the new image

closer view.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to continue to change

the different controls until you find a
filter you like (these changes will be
Step 4
made to the original image, until you
add it to the Project Sketchbook).

new images in the project and put it on
the worktable. With this new, filtered
image, you can repeat steps 2-5. Or,
click Close to discard any changes.
8. The Image Filters window will remain

open until you are done and click Close. Step 7 Step 5 Step 8
NOTE
To return to the original image and start adding IMAGE tab Special Effects
special effects to it again, you will need to select
and edit it from the Project Sketchbook. (You
cannot Undo the special effects.)
Applying Circular
Symmetries to an Image
7 1. With the image on the Image
ribbon, click Special Effects, then the
Circular Symm option in the palette.
Step 1
2. Choose your petal shape by clicking the
first button along the top and clicking Step 2
on a petal style in the drop-down
menu.
3. Choose the number of petals by

clicking the second button along the
top and clicking on a number in the Step 3 Step 4
drop-down menu.
4. If you chose an even number of petals,

you can choose whether or not you
want the petals mirrored every other
one to face each other by clicking the
Toggle petal reflection button.
192
Select hue by dragging yellow #1 5. You can flip the image horizontally by
around the color wheel
clicking the Flip image left and right
Step 5 Step 6
button.
6. You can flip the image vertically by

clicking the Flip image up and down
button.
7. The background of the “After” image on

Step 7 the worktable is decided by the Select
the background color drop-down box.
Click the drop-down arrow beside the
background color. In the new window,
Adjust
sliders drag the yellow #1 around the outside
of the circle to a new position to
determine the color. Adjust Saturation
or Lightness with the sliders. When you
are happy with the color at the bottom
Selected color appears here. of the Create a Color box, click OK.
Make adjustments above until
you are happy with the color.
8. To move the petal around on the
image, position your cursor over the
center of the petal, click and drag the
petal to a new location.
9. Resize the petal by clicking it once

in the center to put resizing handles
around it. Position your cursor over one
of the corner handles, click and drag
Step 8 Step 9 the handle to a new location. Click on
Move the petal. Click the petal once to enter resize-mode. the petal two more times to get out of
“resizing-mode”.
10. Rotate the petal by clicking it twice in

the center to go into “rotate-mode”. 7
NOTE Position your cursor over one of the
You can move the petal while it’s corner handles, click and drag the
in Resize or Rotate mode, as long
handle around the center to a new
as your cursor is over the center.
location. Click on the petal one more
Step 10 time to get out of “rotate-mode”.
Click the petal twice to enter rotate-mode.
11. Repeat steps 2-10 in any order to adjust
your image until you like the results.

new images in the project.
13. Click Close when you are done. The

original image used to create the
Step 12 Step 13 circular symmetries will appear on the
worktable. To see your new images,
go to the Photos section of the Project
Sketchbook.
Example of Circular Symmetries results
193
Applying Square IMAGE tab Special Effects
Symmetries to an Image
the ribbon, click Special Effects, then
the Square Symm option in the palette.
The Square Symmetries box will appear
with your image displayed.
2. Choose your symmetry style by clicking

the first button along the top and
clicking on a style in the drop-down
menu. Step 1
3. Choose the number of repeats by

clicking the second button along the
top and clicking on a grid size in the Step 2
drop-down menu.
4. You can flip the image horizontally by

clicking the Flip image left and right Step 3
button.
5. You can flip the image vertically by

clicking the Flip image up and down
button.
6. If you drag the square in the Square

Symmetries window beyond the edges
of the original image, you will want to
adjust the background color. Click the
Select hue by dragging yellow #1
drop-down arrow beside the Select the around the color wheel
background color button. In the new
7 window, drag the yellow #1 around
the outside of the circle to a new Step 4 Step 5
position to determine the color. Adjust

Saturation or Lightness with the sliders.
When you are happy with the color at
the bottom of the Create a Color box,
click OK.
Step 6
Adjust
sliders
Selected color appears here.

Make adjustments above until
you are happy with the color.
194
7. To move the square around on the

image, position your cursor over the
center of the square, click and drag the
square to a new location.
8. Resize the square by clicking it once

in the center to put resizing handles
around it. Position your cursor over one
of the corner handles, click and drag
the handle to a new location. Click on
Step 7 Step 8 the square two more times to get out
Move the square. Click the square once to enter resize-mode.
of “resizing-mode”.
9. Rotate the square by clicking it twice

in the center to go into “rotate-mode”.
Position your cursor over one of the
corner handles, click and drag the
handle around the center to a new
location. Click on the square one more
time to get out of “rotate-mode”.
NOTE
You can move the square while it’s in Resize or
Step 9 Rotate mode, as long as your cursor is over the
Click the square twice to enter rotate-mode. center.
10. Repeat steps 2-9 in any order to adjust

your image until you are pleased with
the results.

new images in the project.
12. Click Close when you are done. The

Step 11 Step 12 original image used to create the 7
square symmetries will appear on the
worktable. To see your new images,
go to the Photos section of the Project
Example of Square Symmetries results Sketchbook.
Original image
New square
symmetries image
Project Sketchbook > Photos section
195
INCREASING OR
DECREASING COLOR
DEPTH
Use this feature to simplify images. You can
do this for artistic reasons or for tracing. Start
with an image edited or imported to the
Step 1
Image worktable.

Worktable, click Image on the menu
bar, then click Increase/Decrease Color
Depth. A window will appear.
NOTE
Step 2
The current bit depth of the image is the first
number in the window.
2. Under Increase or decrease to, click the

down arrow to drop-down your list of
choices. Change to a different number.
3. If you choose 1, 4, or 8, you can also

choose a palette, dithering method and
other options.
4. Click OK.
Step 3
5. The image on the worktable will update
and reflect your choices. Click Add to
Project Sketchbook if you want to keep
these changes. Or, click Undo if you
want to switch back to the previous
7 image. Step 4
NOTES
Many effects and filters require 24 bit or higher
images. If you do not increase the color depth
OR
yourself, the program will prompt you before
allowing you to continue with the effect or filter. Step 5 Step 5
Add to Project Undo
Sketchbook
You will not notice a difference in the image if you
increase the color depth.
196
8
CHAPTER 8
Libraries
EQ8 comes with six separate library types containing over 20,000 quilting items, including blocks, fabrics, threads, layouts,
and more, all to be used and reused as you design. You can also create your own libraries for blocks you’ve drawn, fabrics
you’ve scanned or photos you’ve imported, making them all handy to use in any project. This chapter shows you how to
use the library and save your own items in your own “My Favorite” Library.
About the Libraries...........................................................................................198

Using Items from the Library............................................................................200
Searching for Items by Notecard......................................................................201
Searching for Blocks by Category.....................................................................202
Searching for Fabrics by Color..........................................................................203
Searching for Threads.......................................................................................204
Linking Other Libraries.....................................................................................206
Importing from Existing Projects......................................................................207
Importing Image Files into the Fabric or Photo Libraries.................................208
Importing Embroidery (EXP) Files.....................................................................209
Adding, Formatting, and Renaming My Favorite Libraries...............................210
Adding and Saving Items in My Favorite Library..............................................211
Deleting from My Favorite Libraries.................................................................212
ABOUT THE LIBRARIES

EQ8 has six libraries: Block, Fabric, Layout, Embroidery, Photo, and Thread. The steps below work for any library.

Your Choice. The library opens with
items displayed. The first section is the
EQ Library which holds that particular
library’s respective blocks, fabrics,
layouts, embroidery, photos, and
threads that come with EQ8. Step 1
Sections
Seeing More Categories

and Styles
2. Items are organized into categories.
Beside the list of names drag the
Categories
vertical scrollbar down to see the
different categories (except in the Photo
Library because there are only 4). For
example, if you are in the Block Library
the categories are: 01 Classic Pieced, Styles
02 Contemporary Pieced, etc.
3. Each category has styles. Click the

plus sign next to any category name
to see its styles. For example, in the
Block Library if you are in 04 Classical
Applique you would see the styles
Baskets, Birds, Butterflies, etc.
4. Click any name to see items in the style.
Seeing More Items in a

Style
5. The number of items in each style is Step 4
shown at the lower-right beside the
8 horizontal scrollbar. If the style contains Step 2
57 items, but you only see 9, you need
to scroll. Drag the horizontal scrollbar Step 3
beneath the items to the right to see

more items within that style.
6. You can also change the number of

Step 6 Step 5 Number of
items that display at one time. On the items in style
will see a series of display buttons.
Click a button with a larger square to
NOTE
see fewer items, or one with a smaller Changing the number of items displayed is a nice feature when viewing complex
items. You can click a button with a larger square to “zoom in” closer to see an
item’s detail.
198
Chapter 8: Libraries
About the Rest of the Buttons

Each Library has five sections (except the Thread Library, which only has four):
EQ Library – These items come with EQ8 and are always the same. You cannot “use up,”
delete, add to, or change items in this section.
My Favorite Library – There are no items here until you add them. You can create your own
library category with your favorite or most frequently used items by saving them here.
Current Sketchbook – This area shows what is in your current project’s Sketchbook for that
item type. For example, in the Block Library the Current Sketchbook section shows blocks you’ve added to the Sketchbook. In
the Fabric Library the Current Sketchbook section shows fabrics you’ve added to the Sketchbook.
Search Results – When you search, the results will show here.
Import Results – When you import, your imported items will show here. (You cannot import thread to the library.)
Block, Photo, and Layout Libraries only Select all the Add items to the Sketchbook. Once
Adds the selected item to the Sketchbook items in a they’re in the Sketchbook you can use
and places it on the appropriate worktable. section at once. them for designing. See pages 200.
8
Change the number Import items from Search for items Close the Block Library only
of items displayed. other EQ projects, or in the Library. See library. The coloring arrows
from outside files. See pages 201-204. let you view the other
pages 207-209. colorings “stacked” on
Name items you are saving, a block. See page 109.
These buttons will be enabled when you have the appropriate item(s) and section selected: and keep design notes about
the items (the notecard is
Create Library – Create libraries with the items you like and use most in the My Favorite visible in the EQ Libraries, but
Libraries sections. you cannot edit them there).
Link Library – Link to library files in different EQ programs or from other users. See page 206.
Cut and Copy – Cut or Copy an item you want to paste into My Favorite Library.
Paste – Paste a cut or copied item into your My Favorite Library. See page 211.
Delete – Delete an item (available in all sections except EQ Library). See page 212.
Sort – Sort items in your desired order (available in all sections except EQ Library).
Save Library – Save items or changes to your My Favorite Library. See page 211.
199
USING ITEMS FROM THE LIBRARY

To design with anything from a library, you must first add it to your Sketchbook.
Finding and Selecting Items

Your Choice. Example: if you need a
block, open the Block Library.
2. Click the library section you want items

from. Step 1
3. If you choose EQ Library or My Favorite

Library, click the category, then click EQ Library – These items come with EQ8 and are
always the same.
the style you want to see.
My Favorite Library – This is empty until you add
4. Click the item you want to use. It will items. Use this section for original block designs,
scanned fabrics or photos, imported embroidery
have a blue outline, indicating it is designs, and to organize your favorite items
selected. (which can include items that came with EQ8).
Current Sketchbook – Shows what is in your

5. (Optional) To select multiple items, use current project’s Sketchbook for that item type.
keyboard shortcuts:
Search Results – When you search, the search
results will show here.
Hold down the CTRL key (Command Step 2
key) and click on each individual item Import Results – When you import, the
imported items will show here (not available in
you want to select. the Thread Library).
Hold down the Shift key as you click to

select a range of items (entire rows or Step 4 Step 5 Step 6
columns).
Click the Select All button to select

every item in the style.
Adding to your Sketchbook Category
6. Click the Add to Sketchbook button. Style

The selected item “disappears”
8 temporarily, showing you’ve added the
item to your Sketchbook.

Step 7
200
SEARCHING FOR ITEMS

BY NOTECARD
To search in the Thread Library, see page 204.
1. Open the library in which you want to

Step 1 Step 2 search. (Click Libraries from the menu
bar, then Your Choice.)
2. Click the Search button. If given two

Step 5 choices, choose By Notecard.
3. Put checks next to the fields you want

Step 3
to search (Name, Reference, and
Step 4
Notes).
4. In Find at most _____ items enter a

number between 1 and 999. (Default =
Step 6
50.)
5. In the box at the top marked Find all

blocks with this notecard text, type the
word or words you want to search by.
6. Click the Search button. After the

Step 6
progress bar disappears and the results
appear, click OK. You will now be
viewing the Search Results section of
Step 8
the Library.
7. Drag the horizontal scrollbar beneath

the items to see all the search results
if they are not all visible. (You can also
click on the number of items buttons to
change how many items you see.)
8. If you want to use an item from the

search, click directly on it to select it.
Click Add to Sketchbook. The item will
Step 7 Step 9
temporarily “disappear” to show it has
been added to the Sketchbook. You can
8
add as few or as many (you can use the
Select All button) items as you want.
NOTES
You will see more results if you check all 3 fields (Name, Reference, and Notes). 9. Click Search >> By Notecard again to do
Or, if you type part of the name instead of the full name. For instance, search for a new search or click Close to return to
“ohio” instead of “ohio star.” the worktable.
If you are searching for blocks and have BlockBase installed, be sure to put a
check next to Notes. BlockBase names are numbers. The earliest known name for
the block (not all names) is in the BlockBase Notes.
Order is important. You will get different results if you type in “Sue Sunbonnet”
instead of “Sunbonnet Sue.”
201
SEARCHING FOR BLOCKS BY CATEGORY

Each block in the Block Library is marked according to predetermined categories. These categories are grouped into sections:
Difficulty & Piecing Info, Holiday, Events, Pieced, and Applique.

Block Library.
2. Click Search >> By Category.
3. Click any section to view the categories.
4. Click the image next to a category name Step 1 Step 2

to add the category to the search. You
can add more than one category. You
will know you’ve selected the category Step 4 Step 5
because it will change from a grayscale
to multicolored square and will also
appear at the bottom of the Block
Category Search window, no matter
which category you’re viewing. If you
wish to remove a category, click the
image next to the category name again, Step 3
to deselect it and it will return to the
grayscale image.
5. In Find at most _____ blocks enter a

number between 1 and 999.
(Default = 50.) Selected categories Step 6
appear here
6. Click the Search button, then OK. You
will now be viewing the Search Results
section.

the items to see all the search results
if they are not all visible. (You can also
click on the number of items buttons to Step 6
change how many items you see.)
8 8. If you want to use a block from the

Step 8
9. Click Search >> By Category again to do

a new search or click Close to return to
the worktable.
Step 7 Step 9
202
Flip NOTES
The blocks that appear in the Search Results must
fit into all the categories chosen. You can add up to
20 categories (any combination from all 5 sections),
but your results will be fewer and fewer the more
you add.
To see a block’s assigned If you want to save the search results, consider
categories, select the block in copying and pasting these bocks into their own
the library and click the Notecard style in My Favorite Blocks, see page 210. For
button. Then use the Flip button
instance, if you are a beginning quilter and would
to see the categories on the back
of the notecard. like to stick to “Triangles and Rectangles,” Copy,
Paste, and Save Library for those results into a new
Notecard for Mosaic, No. 19 (shown at left) library. Then go to that My Favorite Blocks library
page each time you need a block for a new project.
SEARCHING FOR
FABRICS BY COLOR
Fabric Library.
2. Click to select any fabric (perhaps one

Step 1 Step 3 you want to match in color) from any
section (EQ Fabric Library, My Favorite
Fabrics, etc.). You must have a fabric
selected to proceed.
3. Click Search >> By Color.
4. To change the search color, click

the down arrow next to the solid
Step 5 color rectangle to show your Project
Sketchbook colors. Drag the horizontal
scrollbar to see them all, then click your
new color choice.
Step 6
5. In the top right you will see a list of

fabric libraries linked to EQ8. You can 8
check one or more to search. The more
Step 4 Step 7 libraries you have checked, the longer
the search will take.
6. In Find at most _____ fabrics, enter a

number between 1 and 999. (Default
= 50.) A higher number returns more
results, but takes more time.
7. Click the Search button. After the

progress bar disappears and the results
appear, click OK. You will now be
Step 7 viewing the Search Results section.
203

the items to see all the search results if Step 9
they are not all visible.
9. If you want to use a fabric from the

10. Click Search >> By Color again to do a

new search or click Close to return to Step 8 Step 10
the worktable.
NOTES
If you have a fabric library installed which is not
showing up in the list of options, use the Link
Library button. See page 206.
To see the “average color” for any fabric, click the

Show average color checkbox in the bottom right
under the fabrics. The average color will appear as
a small square in the top-left corner of each fabric.
They may be hard to see if the average color is
similar to the fabric, especially if it’s a solid-colored
fabric.
SEARCHING FOR
THREADS Step 1 Step 2
You can search for threads by text (name or
number) or by color.
Searching by Text Step 3

8 Thread Library. Step 4
2. Click Search >> By Text.
3. In the top box, type the word or words Step 5

you want to search for in the Thread
Library. A name, like Eggplant, or a
number like 5633 work best.
4. In Find at most _____ items, enter a

(Default = 50.)
5. Click Search, then OK.

Step 5
204
6. If you want to use a thread from the

Step 6 search, click directly on it to select it.
7. Click Search >> By Text again to do a

new search or click Close to return to
the worktable.
Step 7
Searching by Color
Thread Library.
2. Click to select any thread (perhaps one

you want to match in color) from any
section (EQ Thread Library, My Favorite
Thread, etc.). You must have a thread
selected to proceed.
Step 1 Step 3
3. Click Search >> By Color.
4. To change the search color, click the

down arrow next to the solid color
rectangle to show your Sketchbook
Step 5 colors. Drag the horizontal scrollbar to
see them all, then click your new color
choice.
5. In Find at most _____ items, enter a

Step 4 Step 6
(Default = 50.)
6. Click Search, then OK.

Step 6
7. If you want to use a thread from the
8
Step 7
8. Click Search >> By Color again to do a

new search or click Close to return to
the worktable.
Step 8
205
LINKING OTHER LIBRARIES

Use these steps to link other EQ software (BlockBase, Quilting Designs), personal libraries from previous versions of EQ, and
EQ-formatted libraries from other outside sources (friends, online challenges). See the EQ8 Online Support site for more info.
1. Open the library of the same type you

want to link. Click Libraries from the
menu bar, then Your Choice. (If you
want to link an outside fabric library,
open the Fabric Library.)
2. Click the Link Library button. Step 1 Step 2
3. Click the Auto Add button to add a

link for any EQ software not listed. If
the Auto Add button does not find and
link the library, you will need to add it
manually.
4. To add a library manually, click the Add

button.
5. In the first box, type a name for the

new library. This name will appear in
the list under the Library section, so
choose something that will help you
identify it. Examples: Guild Member
Blocks or Foundation Pieced Blocks, not
Blocks.
6. In the second box, you need the path Step 8 Step 6

to the folder containing the library files.
Click the Browse button to find the
location.

computer of the folder containing
the library files. Be sure the folder is
selected. Click OK to close the Browse
8 for Folder box.
8. Click OK on the Add New Library Link

box. If you chose a folder with no
library files, the library will not be
found and you will get a message Not
a valid EQ library directory. Change Modify allows you to change Remove allows Step 9
the path and click OK or click Cancel to the path (not the name) of you to take an
an existing item in the list. item off the list.
start over.
9. Click Close to return to the library. Click NOTE

Close again to return to the worktable. If you are having difficulty finding the files, but know they are on your computer,
Your library files will be available from try doing a search. File extensions are: *.blk = Block Library, *.ebr = Embroidery
the corresponding library. Library, *.fab = Fabric Library, *.pix = Photo Library, *.qlt = Layout Library,
*.thd = Thread Library.
206
IMPORTING FROM
EXISTING PROJECTS
The import feature allows you to stay in the
project you are working on and import from a
different project’s Sketchbook with just a few
clicks.
Step 1
1. Open the library into which you want
to import. Click Libraries from the
menu bar, then Your Choice. Examples:
If you need a group of blocks you
drew in a different project, open the
Block Library. If you need fabrics from
Step 2
a different project, open the Fabric
Library.
2. Click the Import button. If given two

choices, choose From Project. The
Import box will appear.
3. Navigate to the correct folder for the

project from which you need to import.
The default location for EQ8 projects is:
MAC: Go > Home > My EQ8 > Projects
4. When you see the file you want to

import from, click to select it.
Step 4 Step 5 5. Click Open. You will now be viewing the

Import Results section of the Library.

the items to see all the import results if
they are not all visible.
Step 7
7. If you want to use an imported item,
click directly on it to select it. Click
Add to Sketchbook. The item will 8
8. Click Import >> From Project again

to import from a different existing
project or click Close to return to the
Step 6 Step 8 worktable.
207
IMPORTING IMAGE FILES INTO THE FABRIC OR PHOTO LIBRARIES

Use these steps to import scanned fabrics for any quilt, or photos for photo-quilt projects. You can import BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG,
or TIF files.

to import. Click Libraries from the
menu bar, then Fabric Library or Photo
Library. Example: To import scanned
fabrics, open the Fabric Library.
2. Click Import >> From Image Files. Step 1 Step 2

computer where the image files are
saved.
4. Click the image files you want to

import. To select more than one:
Hold down the CTRL key (Command

key) and click on each individual file
you want to select.

select a range of files.
Click one file, then press CTRL+A

(Command+A) to select all the files in
Step 4 Step 5
this folder. CTRL+A (Command+A) used to select
all the files in the folder at once.
5. Click Open. The Import Results display.
6. If you want to use an imported item,

click directly on it to select it. Click
Add to Sketchbook if you plan to use
Step 6
an item in a project, or click Copy
if you plan to paste the item into a
My Favorite Library. The item will
8 temporarily “disappear” to show it has
7. Click Import >> From Image Files again

to import from a different folder or click
Close.
Step 7
NOTE
To learn more about working with photos and
fabrics, see Chapter 7.
208
IMPORTING
EMBROIDERY (.EXP)
FILES
Only .EXP files can be imported.

Step 1 Step 2 Embroidery Library.
2. Click Import >> From .EXP Files.

computer where the image files
containing your .EXP files are saved.
Having the related .RGB files is optional.
If you have the .RGB files, they should
be saved in the same folder as the .EXP
files, but you will not see them listed in
the Import window.
4. Click the .EXP files you want to import.

To select more than one:

key) and click on each individual file
Step 4 Step 5
you want to select.

select a range of files.
Step 6 Click one file, then press CTRL+A

(Command+A) to select all the files in
this folder.
5. Click Open. You will now see the Import

Results section of the Library.
6. If you want to use an imported

embroidery design, click directly on it
to select it. Click Add to Sketchbook.
8
The item will temporarily “disappear”
to show it has been added to the
Sketchbook. You can add as few or
Step 7
as many (you can use the Select All
button) items as you want.
7. Click Import >> From .EXP Files again to

NOTES import from a different folder or click
EQ8 may let you adjust the size of the embroidery larger than what your hoop Close.
and sewing machine can stitch.
Use the Thread Tools to recolor your imported embroideries, see page 105.
209
ADDING, FORMATTING, AND RENAMING MY FAVORITE LIBRARIES

Use the customizable My Favorite Libraries to store your personal designs for easy access when working on any EQ8 project.
This feature is great for new block designs and scanned fabrics.
to add a My Favorite category. Click
Libraries from the menu bar, then Your
Choice. Example: If you want to add
a personal library of blocks, open the
Block Library.
2. Click the My Favorite section.

Step 1
3. Click the Create Library button.
4. Type a descriptive name for the library

category. Example: Italy Trip Photos, Step 2
not Photos.
5. In Start with _____ styles, choose the

number of styles (or sub-categories) for
this library category. This number can
be from 1 to 59 styles.
6. Click OK to add the new library

category. Step 3
7. To format the library category and

change its name or add more styles,
right-click on the name in the list and
click Modify Library.
8. Type in a new name or a new number

of styles. When you’re done, click OK. Step 4
Step 5
NOTES
Step 6
If you only want to change the name, you can click
8 once on the name to select it and click on it again
to get the renaming box. (Click, pause, click.) Type a
new name and then click elsewhere to deselect it.
If you add items to a My Favorite Library (your

own personal library), they won’t show up in the
regular EQ8 Library. You will need to click on the
My Favorite Library section to see them.
If you are only changing the library or style name, Step 7

you do not need to click the Save Library button. If
you are changing the name and adding items to the
style you do need to click Save Library.
Step 8
To learn how to delete from or an entire My
Favorite Library, see page 212.
210
ADDING AND SAVING ITEMS IN MY FAVORITE LIBRARY

Copying the Items
1. Open the library to which you want
to add items. Click Libraries from
the menu bar, then Your Choice. For
example, if you want to add a block to
a My Favorite Library, open the Block
Library.
Step 1 2. Click to choose the section of the

library you want to copy from: EQ
Library, Current Sketchbook, Search
Results, or Import Results. If you
choose Import Results, see pages 207-
Step 2 209, or Search Results, see pages 201-
204, follow those instructions and then
return to this step.
3. Click an item to select it. You can also

use keyboard shortcuts to help you:

key) and click on each individual item
you want to select.
Step 4 Step 3 Hold down the Shift key as you click to

select a range of items.
Click one item, then press CTRL+A

(Command+A) to select all the items in
this style.
4. Click the Copy button, or press CTRL+C

(Command+C).
Step 5
Adding & Saving the Items
5. Click the My Favorite library section.
8
6. Click the plus sign next to the library
name, then the style name you want to
Step 6 add these items to. (If you do not have
libraries added to My Favorite library
yet, see page 210 and then return to
this step.)
7. Click the Paste button, or CTRL+V

Step 7 (Command+V). Do not add more than
254 items to any style.
211
8. Click the Save Library button. If you

change styles without clicking Save
Library you will be prompted to save
the changes.
Step 8
9. Click OK, then Close to return to the
worktable.
Step 9
DELETING FROM MY
FAVORITE LIBRARIES
1. Open the library in which you want
to delete from. Click Libraries from
the menu bar, then Your Choice. For
example, if you want to remove a
Step 1
scanned fabric, open the Fabric Library.
2. Click the My Favorite Library section.

Step 2
3. Click the plus sign next to the library
category name to open it, then click the
style name containing the item or items
you want to delete.
4. Click to select all items you want to

delete. You can also use keyboard Step 3
shortcuts to help you:

key) and click on each individual item
you want to select. Step 5 Step 4

select a range of items.
Step 6
Click one item, then press CTRL+A
(Command+A) to select all the items in
this style.
8 5. Click the Delete button or press your
keyboard Delete key to delete the Step 7
selected items.
6. At the prompt, click Yes if you are sure Step 8

you want to delete the selected items.
7. Click Save Library. If you change styles NOTE

without clicking Save Library you will To delete an entire My Favorite Library category and all the styles it contains, you
be prompted to save the changes, need to find the User Favorites folder. The default location is:
otherwise the items will not be deleted. PC: Documents > My EQ8 > User Favorites
MAC: Go > Home > My EQ8 > User Favorites
8. Click OK, then Close to return to the Find the library file (it will have the same name as in the library list, potentially
worktable. with an extension, such as .FAB) and delete it.
212
9
CHAPTER 9
Printing
EQ8 gives you many possibilities for printing patterns, colored block and quilt pictures, yardage estimates, photographs,
and even quilting stencils. And with EQ8’s Photo Layout you can customize your printout by rotating, adding more than
one photo to a printout, or resizing your image. This chapter describes all possible printing methods.
Printing Patterns Overview...............................................................................214

Printing a Block, Motif, or Stencil.....................................................................216
Printing Templates............................................................................................218
Printing a Foundation Pattern..........................................................................219
Changing Foundation and Template Printouts.................................................222
Printing a Rotary Cutting Chart.........................................................................224
Notes on Rounding in Rotary Cutting...............................................................225
Printing Border or Sash Blocks.........................................................................228
Printing a Quilt.................................................................................................229
Printing Photos or Embroidery from the Quilt Worktable................................230
Printing Images with Photo Layout..................................................................231
Printing Fabric Yardage Estimates....................................................................233
Special Notes on Fabric Yardage Estimates......................................................234
Changing Fonts.................................................................................................235
Changing Page Setup or Printers......................................................................236
PRINTING PATTERNS OVERVIEW

There are a number of options for printing patterns in EQ8, but the basic steps are the same. Printing a block pattern can be
done from either the Block Worktable or the Quilt Worktable, while printing a Quilt and Fabric Yardage can only be printed
from the Quilt Worktable.
Each pattern style has specific options for you to select which we’ll explain in the following sections. However, there are
general options that they all share, which we’ll discuss below.
View the Printing Options View the Printing Options
On the Quilt Worktable, click the PRINT &

EXPORT tab. Click Print on the ribbon. Select
the layer (below the worktable) on which you
set the block, motif, or stencil. Click the item Quilt Worktable
you’d like to print. It will have a green outline,
showing it’s selected, and the size of the
selected item will display.
On the Block Worktable, click the PRINT & Block Worktable

EXPORT tab. Click Print on the ribbon.
Select a Printing Style

In the PRINT PATTERNS palette, select a print
style. The palette on the Quilt Worktable has
options for printing the quilt, fabric yardage,
all the block patterns, as well as embroidery
and photo (see page 230).
The palette on the Block Worktable has the When you select an item on the Quilt Worktable > PRINT & EXPORT tab,
pattern styles available for blocks. the item will have a green outline and the finished size will display.
General Printing Options Only applicable print options will be

enabled in the palettes. For example,
Edit Name is on the first tab or screen of all if you have an applique block
printout styles, except for Foundation Patterns selected for printing, Rotary Cutting
will not be enabled.
(click the Options tab). If the quilt or block
does not have a name, Unnamed or Worktable
Block will appear in the name box. This name
appears at the top of your printouts. If you
want to name the quilt or block (or edit the
existing name), click Edit Name. Your cursor PRINT PATTERNS palette
on the Quilt Worktable
9 will appear in the name box. Type the new
name and click Apply. This name change
will update on the Notecard in the Project
PRINT PATTERNS palette on the Block Worktable
Sketchbook as well.
Edit Name
214
Chapter 9: Printing
Finished Block Size is on the first tab or screen

of all printout styles, except for Foundation
Patterns (click the Options tab). Under
Finished Block Size, you have two options:
Finished • Recommended: Use size from quilt (Quilt

Block Size Worktable) or Use size from worktable
(Block Worktable) – The finished block
size will show in gray because EQ8 is
reading the sizes you set for this block.
(The size will be correct, but if you
question the size, specifically when
Copies printing a block from the Quilt Worktable,
be sure to review how blocks are
measured for the layout style you are
These six buttons will appear at the bottom of every print window. using, see pages 39-45 and 49.)
See descriptions below.
• Custom block size – To enter a different
Help – click to view detailed help information. size, click Custom block size, then double-
click in the Width and Height boxes and
Page Setup – click to change margins, paper size, orientation, or the printer
(see page 236). type a size.
Fonts – click to change fonts or font size (see page 235). Under Copies, double-click in the box and
Preview (recommended) – click to preview your printout. From the preview, type the number of printouts you want (1 to
click Print to print, Zoom In and then drag the magnifying glass to zoom in 99).
(if you select this and want to preview it again before closing, either click
Zoom Out or Fit to Screen), or Close to return to this box.
Click any of the buttons across the bottom of
Print – click to print your block, motif, or stencil without previewing. the box for more options. See the descriptions
Close – click to return to the worktable without printing.
of these options to the left.
NOTES
If multiple-page printouts are missing the right-
edge guideline, click Page Setup and increase your
Print button Close button
Right page margin.
Previewing a Template or Foundation pattern

printout can save you paper. You can delete or
move templates or foundation sections. You can
also rotate templates in 30 degree increments to fit
better on a page. See page 222.
9
Print preview
215
PRINTING A BLOCK, MOTIF, OR STENCIL

PRINT & EXPORT tab. Click Print on
the ribbon. Select the layer (below the
worktable) on which you set the block, Step 2
motif, or stencil. Click the item you’d
like to print to select it.
On the Block Worktable, click the

PRINT & EXPORT tab. Click Print on the
ribbon.
2. In the PRINT PATTERNS palette, select If you choose Showing fabrics in Step 4,
Block. the coloring displayed here will print.
3. Choose your Finished Block Size

(Use size from quilt or worktable is
recommended), see pages 37 and 215.
4. Under Printing Style, choose from the Step 3

following:
Outline drawing – black and white solid

lines showing how patches overlap.
Step 4
Quilting stencil – black and white
dotted lines. If you are printing stencils
colored using the Thread tool, choose
Showing fabrics instead.
As applique pattern – solid black lines Step 5 Coloring

arrows
with white-filled patches showing how
patches are layered.
Showing fabrics – prints the block in

color as displayed in the Print Block
box. This option also prints a stencil in
the thread color, style, and weight you
have chosen. If the picture of the block
in the Print Block box is only an outline,
Showing fabrics will not be available. Outline drawing Quilting stencil
Click the coloring arrows beneath the

9 block picture to enable this option
and choose the coloring you want to
print. The displayed coloring will print,
regardless of which coloring is shown
on the worktable.
5. Under Copies, double-click in the box

As applique pattern Showing fabrics
and type the number of printouts you
want (1 to 99).
216
Chapter 9: Printing
6. Click the Options tab, then under

Step 6 Pattern Style Options, click to check the
Options tab options you want:
Print block name – prints the name

at the top of your printout from the
block’s Sketchbook notecard. If you
did not name your block, it will say
Step 6 “Unnamed.” You can name or rename
your block using the Edit Name button
Step 7 on the Block Size tab and then clicking
Apply, see page 214.
Print as many as fit – prints as many

Step 8 full blocks on one page as possible,
when you are printing smaller blocks.
(Altering your page margins in Page
Setup may change the number of
blocks that fit on a page.)
Step 9 Step 10
Mirror – prints the block flipped
horizontally.
7. For Line Thickness, click the down

Step 10
Print
arrow to show the styles, then click
directly on the thickness you want.
(This option is only available for the
Outline drawing and As applique
pattern Printing Styles.)
8. If you choose Showing fabrics, the

outline choices on the Options tab
under Showing Fabric Style Options
will be enabled. (Other styles listed in
step 4 automatically print outlines.) Put
a check next to the options you want.
(You can check one, both, or neither of
Print preview screen the options.)
Print block outline – prints a black

outline around the block.
Print patch outline – prints black

outlines around the patches. 9
9. Change the Page Setup or Fonts (see
pages 235 and 236).
10. Click Preview to see what will print,

then click Print.
217
PRINTING TEMPLATES
You can print templates for any block, no matter if it is pieced or applique. Each patch is printed as a separate piece
(surrounded by seam allowance, if you so choose).

worktable) on which you set the block
or motif. Click the item you’d like to
Step 2
print to select it.

ribbon.
2. In the PRINT PATTERNS palette, select

Templates.

Step 3
4. Seam Allowance – check Print seam

Step 4
allowance if you want seam allowance
added around each template. Double-
click the number and type a new Step 5
Step 7
number, if you need to change it. (See
Notes at the end of this section for
seam allowance tips.)
5. Print Key Block – the key block is

a small picture of your block, with Step 6 Step 9 Step 8
each patch identified by a letter. This
“key” helps you know how to fit your
template patches back together. Click
to choose one:
None – choose when you don’t need Key block

a key block, and want more room for
templates.
Small – choose when your block does

not have many small patches.
9
Large – choose when your block has so
many tiny patches that the patch letters
would not fit or read well on a small key
block.
6. Line Thickness - click the down arrow

to show the styles, then click directly on Template printout
the thickness you want.
218
Chapter 9: Printing
Step 9 7. Mirror block - flips patches horizontally.

Print
(Depending on your technique, use
this so your block doesn’t end up
backwards.)

want (1 to 99).
9. Click Preview to see what will print. You

can move, rotate, and delete patches
to customize your pattern, see page
222. When you are happy with your
printout, click Print.
Print preview screen
NOTES
If your printer prints the seam allowance faintly,
you can darken it by clicking File from the menu
bar, then Preferences and General. Under “Printing
Options” change the “Minimum line size in pixels”
from 1 (default) to 2, 3 or 4. See which thickness
Blank pages you prefer with your printer.
will not print.
If you are printing directly onto freezer paper
and plan to hand-cut seam allowance around the
patches, uncheck Seam Allowance. Then see pages
222 for how to move or delete unnecessary patches
from your printout, so you can fit as much on one
Customize your printout by deleting unwanted patches (like the large page as possible.
background patch that you would cut with a ruler), and then moving
and rotating patches to best fit on the page(s). See page 222 for details.
PRINTING A
FOUNDATION PATTERN
Foundation patterns are also known as paper
piecing patterns. If you’ve drawn a PolyDraw
block or if your EasyDraw block has curves,
you will need to section and number the block
yourself. See Sections and Numbering on the
next page.

worktable) on which you set the block.
Step 2
Click on the block you’d like to print to 9
select it.

ribbon.

Foundation.
219
Options tab Step 3
3. Click the Options tab.

recommended), see page 37 and 215. Step 8
Step 4
5. Seam Allowance – check Print seam
allowance if you want seam allowance
added around each section. Double- Step 9
click the number and type a new Step 5
number, if you need to change it.
6. Line Thickness – click the down arrow

to show the styles, then click directly on
the thickness you want.

want (1 to 99).
Style Options:
8. Under Style, click the option you want.
Line drawing will print a black and
white block. Grayscale fill will fill the
sections with shades of gray. Color fill
will print the block with solid colors
(if you colored the block with fabrics,
EQ8 will choose solid colors that closely
resemble the average color of the
fabric).
Line Drawing Grayscale fill
9. Under Options, click to check the
options you want. See details at right.
10. Click Preview to see the pattern. If you

don’t like how the block is sectioned Color fill
or numbered, click Close, then follow
steps 11 – 16. Otherwise, click Print. If
your preview says “Unnamed” and you
want to name the block, see page 214. Options:
Print numbering – prints the paper piecing letters and numbers on the pattern.
Separate units – separates pattern according to sections defined on Sections tab. If you
plan to move or delete sections of the pattern in the Print Preview, this option must be
checked.
9 Mirror – flips pattern horizontally. (Depending on your technique, use this so your block
doesn’t end up backwards.)
Print block name – prints the name at the top of your printout from the block’s Sketchbook
notecard. If you did not name your block, it will say “Unnamed.” (Naming a block is
different than naming a project. See pages 34 or 214.)
Print as many blocks as fit – prints as many full blocks on one page as possible. If you
plan to move or delete sections of the pattern in the Print Preview, this option must be
unchecked.
220
Chapter 9: Printing
Step 11
After clicking Start Over, click
on the patches for the section. Sections tab
11. Click the Sections tab. Blue lines
surround the areas denoted as sections
(units).
12. To resection the block, click Start

Over. All blue lines will disappear.
Click directly on the patches you want
in a section. When all patches for a
section are selected (gray), click Group.
Continue grouping sections until all
the patches are included. If you make
a mistake, SHIFT+click on a patch to
remove it from the selection before
Step 12 clicking Group. Or click Start Over to
deselect everything.
This window is resizable to help you section or number complicated patterns. Position your
cursor over the edge or corner of the window, then click and drag to enlarge the entire box.
Numbering tab
13. Click the Numbering tab. You’ll see
Step 14
Step 13 Click on the patches in sewing order. numbers and letters in the sections of
your block.
14. To renumber the block, click Change

Numbers. Click the patches in the order
you want them numbered. If you make
a mistake, SHIFT+click on a patch to
remove the number. Or click Start Over.
15. Change the Page Setup or Fonts (pages

235 and 236).
16. Click Preview to see your printout.

You can move or delete sections to
customize your pattern, see page 221.
Click Print, or click Close and return to
any above steps to make changes.
NOTES
Print
If you don’t want EQ to help with sectioning or
numbering of your pattern, put a check in I want
to section & number myself without EQ’s help. You
will need to section the parts of the block that you
want to generate a pattern for, and you will need
to number every patch. You are not required to
section every part of the block. Only the sections
9
that you define will appear on the printout.
To make your sectioning and numbering permanent

for this Sketchbook block, edit the block, follow
steps 2-14, click Preview, Close, Close and the Save
button. You may want to save this block in your
My Favorite Library to make it accessible for other
projects. See pages 211.
Print preview screen
221
CHANGING FOUNDATION AND TEMPLATE PRINTOUTS

Sometimes you may want to delete repeated templates or foundations, or move them so they don’t extend across more pages
than necessary. You can tailor your printout before printing by using the available buttons on the print preview.

print to select it.

ribbon.

Templates or Foundation. Step 2
3. Choose your settings and sizes, see

pages 218-221.
4. Click Preview.
NOTE Key block Step 6 Step 5

Templates have a key block option that appears
at the top-left of the printout. You can choose not
to print it, or to print it small or large. Make this
choice before moving or deleting templates. If you
close the print preview your printout will reset,
then you’ll have to start deleting, moving, and
rotating all over again.
Deleting
When you delete pattern pieces, the
remaining pieces reorganize. So, delete pieces
before moving them. If you are printing
applique blocks, you may want to delete the Click on the patch or section to delete. The outline will turn red.
large background square and cut that later.
5. Click directly on a piece you want to

delete. The piece outline will turn red
and the Delete button will be enabled.
9 6. Click the Delete button. The piece will

disappear and the other pieces will
move up to take the deleted one’s
place.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to delete other

pieces as desired. If you delete enough
pattern pieces to clear a page, that The large square patch has been deleted.
blank page will not print.
222
Chapter 9: Printing
Step 8
Moving
8. Click directly on the piece you want to
move. The outline will turn red.
9. With the piece selected, click, hold, and

drag the piece to another position, then
release the mouse when the pattern
piece is where you want.
10. You can repeat steps 8 and 9 to move

other pieces as desired.
Rotating (Templates only)

11. Click directly on the piece you want to
rotate. The outline will turn red.
12. With the piece selected, click the

Blank pages Rotate button. The patch will rotate 30
will not print. degrees. You can click the Rotate button
more times until the piece is at the
desired angle. You may need to repeat
steps 8-9 to move it again.
13. Click Print when the pattern looks the

Repeat steps 8 and 9 for any pieces you’d like to move. way you want it. If you click Close the
pattern will reset and you’ll have to
start over.
NOTES
If you accidentally delete a template or foundation
piece you still need, click Close and click Preview
again to start over.
Once you click Print, the changes you’ve made to

the preview will be lost. If you’d like to “save” the
print preview, you can create a PDF file. See the
EQ8 Online Support site for instructions.
Step 11 Step 12
Click the Rotate button multiple times, if necessary.
223
PRINTING A ROTARY CUTTING CHART

This type of printout is not available for all blocks, because some blocks are not ideal for rotary cutting. Blocks made up of
squares, triangles, rectangles, parallelograms or diamonds work best.
If you notice patches missing from the printout, it’s because they are not able to be rotary-cut. Print the block again as
Templates to get these “missing” patches.
Be sure to read the next topic on notes about rounding and also the “best practices” to use when rotary cutting. See
pages 225-227.

print to select it. Step 2

ribbon.

Rotary Cutting.

Step 3
4. Seam Allowance – choose the seam Step 4

allowance Width you want added
around each piece. Double-click the Step 5
number and type a new number, if you
need to change it.
5. Print Key Block – the key block is a

small drawing of your block, with each Key block
patch identified by a letter. This “key”
helps you know how to fit your patches
back together. Click to choose one:
Small – choose when your block does

not have many small patches.
9 Large – choose when your block has so

many tiny patches that the patch letters
would not fit or read well on a small key
block.
Rotary Cutting Chart printout
224
Chapter 9: Printing
6. Rounding (available when working in

Step 6 inches; metric automatically rounds
to the nearest millimeter) – click to
select whether you want EQ8 to round
to the nearest 1/8 or 1/16 inch when
calculating, or you can select “None” if
you want exact cutting dimensions.

want (1 to 99).
Understanding the Cutting Diagrams
235 and 236).
9. Click Preview to see your printout, then

click Print.
For Patch A, cut a strip of fabric 2½” wide, then cut 2½” squares from the strip.
You’ll need 4 blue squares, 4 pink squares, and 1 red square.
NOTES ON ROUNDING
IN ROTARY CUTTING
Rotary cutting dimensions are nearly always
approximations. For example, the 7/8 inch that
quilters conventionally add for half-square
triangles is really 0.85355 inches, rounded off
For Patch B, cut a strip of fabric 27/8” wide, then cut 27/8” squares to the nearest 1/8 inch so it can be read on a
from the strip. Cut the squares diagonally to make half-square triangles.
You’ll need 8 white triangles and 4 green triangles. ruler. (In fact, experienced quilters cut a little
“shy” in this case since 0.85355 is a little less
than 7/8 or 0.875.)
This applies to the dimensions given in

EQ8 rotary cutting printouts, as well as to
dimensions in books. Even selecting “None”
For Patch C, cut a strip of fabric 3¼” wide, then cut 3¼” squares from the strip. Cut the for rounding, the rotary cutting instructions
squares diagonally twice to make quarter-square triangles. You’ll need 4 green triangles.
may not always be the best way to cut your
block. Here are some things that you should
know when deciding on the best type of
pattern to use for a given block.
0.85355”
EQ8 Gives Conventional

Results 9
With simple cases (rectangles and triangles
at even sizes), EQ8 gives the same results as
1
conventional quilter’s wisdom. It adds 1¼
inches to the finished size of quarter-square
triangles, just like in books.
It would be nearly impossible to accurately cut this
dimension with a rotary cutter and ruler.
225
But, EQ8 gives rotary cutting dimensions

even in cases where the conventional rules
do not apply. Here you need to be aware that
rounding off to the nearest 1/8 or 1/16 inch may
produce inaccuracies. The example to the
right illustrates this point very well. Choosing
“None” for rounding may still calculate
inaccuracies, especially if there are irregular
shapes in the block.
The inaccuracies produced by “rounding off”

can become significant if the finished sizes of
patches are not easily measured on common
rulers. The illustrated block has 7 patches
across by 5 patches down. If you wanted a
10-inch square block, this would mean that
each rectangle has a finished size 1.428571”
by 2”. The measurement 1.43 is not to be
found on your ruler. Even choosing “None” as
your rounding option, EQ8 goes to the 3rd, or A block 7 across by 5 down should be printed at 7” x 5” or 14” x 10” or 21” x 15”, etc.
If the size is not a multiple of the grid, print templates instead.
thousandth, decimal point, so the block would
be rounded to 1.429 which would, over the
entire quilt, cause inaccuracies.
1.43”
EQ8 would add the ¼ inch seam allowance,
round off (say, to the nearest 1/8 inch), and tell
you to cut rectangles 1 7/8” by 2 ½”. If you then
pieced together these patches (assuming you
use accurate quarter-inch seams), the finished
size of the actual block would come out to be 1 2
9 5/8” by 10”, a full 3/8 inch too narrow! If you
round off to the nearest 1/16 inch, the block will
be 10 1/16” x 10”, and still 1/16 inch too wide.
Use Templates to Verify

Sizes
EQ8 templates are always 100% accurate.
If you are uncertain about rotary cutting
dimensions in some cases, print the
templates as a check. The actual, un-
rounded, dimensions for rotary cutting may
9 be measured by the dotted seam allowance
lines on the templates. First, extend the seam
allowance lines at the corners until they cross.
Then measure the resulting total length and
height.
Original EQ8 template Extend seam allowance lines at

the corners, then measure.
226
Chapter 9: Printing
Best Practices
1. Make note of a block’s grid or
1 2 3 structure. For example, a Nine Patch
and all its variations and stars are on a
3 x 3 grid.
2
2. When setting up a quilt on the LAYOUT
tab, set the finished block size to be
a multiple of that grid. Nine patches
3 would be best at 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, etc.
3. When printing rotary cutting, print

Best Practices 1 the block at a multiple of that grid
Make note of a block’s grid or structure. The Ohio Star shown is on a 3 x 3 grid. and round to 1/16 of an inch. Click the
Use size from quilt option to print the
block the same size as specified on the
LAYOUT tab.
4. Print templates to cross-check the

sizes, especially if the block is complex
and the grid is not apparent. Tape these
to the underside of your acrylic ruler to
verify the actual width of the patches
to be cut and to keep the templates
from sliding away.
Best Practices 2
Make finished block size a multiple of the block grid.
Best Practices 3
Choose Use size from quilt and set Rounding to 1/16.
227
PRINTING BORDER OR Step 1
SASH BLOCKS
Printing border or sash blocks is like printing
other blocks: you select the block, choose
your pattern type, then print. What’s
confusing is that the whole border won’t
print as one pattern. Most borders require
multiple print jobs because they are made up
of multiple blocks or sections. (See the Notes
below about using the Auto Borders.)
1. On the Quilt Worktable on Layer 1,

click the PRINT & EXPORT tab. Click
Print on the ribbon.
2. Click on the border or sash block you

want to print. The whole block will Step 3 Step 2
Click on the border or sash block to select it. It will have a
select, whether it is a long strip, a green outline and display the size you set on the LAYOUT tab.
whole block, or a clipped block.
3. Click the Print option you want. (Use

Templates, Foundation, or Rotary
Cutting to get a pattern.)
4. Choose your Finished Block Size (Use

size from quilt recommended), see
pages 37 and 215. The finished block
size will show in gray.
Check Use size from quilt to ensure If you forget to check Use size from
5. Under Copies, double-click in the box your printouts are correct. quilt, your printout may be wrong.
want (1 to 99).

235 and 236).

click Print. Step 4
NOTES
If you want the convenience of having your whole
border print in one print job, use a border from the
Single Block Patterns Auto Border categories. See
9 page 66.
If you notice patches are missing on rotary cutting

charts for border, sash, or sash corner blocks, it’s
because those patches are not able to be rotary-
cut. Print the block again as Templates to get these
“missing” patches.
If you want to delete, move, or rotate patches, see

page 222.
228
Chapter 9: Printing
PRINTING A QUILT
Step 2 To print a quilt, you must be on the Quilt
Worktable with the quilt you wish to print on
your screen.
1. Click the PRINT & EXPORT tab, and

2. In the PRINT PATTERNS palette, click

Quilt. The Print Quilt box appears.
3. Under Printing Style, choose either:

Step 3
Outline drawing – to print your quilt as
a line drawing with no color.
Step 4 Showing fabrics – to print your quilt

See descriptions
below filled with the current fabrics and
colors.
Step 5
4. Under Options, click to check the
options you want. See descriptions of
these options on the left.
Step 6 Step 7
Step 7
Print and type the number of printouts you
want (1 to 99).

235 and 236).

click Print.
NOTES
If the line drawing printout of your quilt has
overlapping shapes, especially with applique, try
coloring the entire quilt white. Then print the white
quilt Showing fabrics.
To print a smaller picture of your quilt, try making

Options: your margins larger (page 236) or exporting your
Print name – prints the name at the top of your printout from the quilt’s Sketchbook
notecard. If you did not add your quilt to the Sketchbook and name it, the printout will say
quilt as an image (page 238). Then import that
“Unnamed.” image through the Photo Library (page 208), and
If you want to name the quilt or edit the existing name, click Edit Name. Your cursor
print it from the Image Worktable to the exact size
you need (page 231). 9
will appear in the name box, so delete any words you don’t want, and type the new or
additional name you want for the quilt. Click Apply. This name change will update on the
Notecard in the Sketchbook. (Naming a quilt is different than naming a project. See page If you would like to select part of a quilt to print,
214.) while still on the PRINT & EXPORT tab, click Export
on the ribbon. Choose Selection in the EXPORT
Print overall size – prints the dimensions of your quilt at the top of your printout.
IMAGES palette and drag the mouse on the quilt
Print block outline – prints a block outline around each block. to select the area you want to print. In the window
that appears, click Print. See page 240.
Print patch outline – prints black outlines around each patch.
229
PRINTING PHOTOS OR EMBROIDERY FROM THE QUILT WORKTABLE

To print a photograph or embroidery design from your quilt, you must be on the layer on which you set the photo or
embroidery design. Photos can be set on Layers 1, 2, or 3. Embroidery designs can only be set on Layer 3.
1. On the Quilt Worktable, click the PRINT

& EXPORT tab, and Print on the ribbon. Step 2
Choose the layer (below the worktable) where the item is set.
2. Click the layer where your photo or
embroidery design is that you want to
print.
3. Click on the photo or embroidery you

want to print. In the PRINT PATTERNS
palette, the respective option will
enable (either Photo or Embroidery).
Click this option.
Step 3
4. For either photo or embroidery, select (Only the appropriate print
the size you want it to print. Use size option will be enabled.)
from quilt is recommended.

want (1 to 99).
6. Change the Page Setup or Fonts (pages Step 4
235 and 236).
7. On the Print Embroidery Design box,

click the down arrow under Line Step 5
Thickness and click on the desired line
thickness.
8. Click Preview to see your printout, then Step 6 Step 8

click Print.
NOTES
If you are printing photos on fabric, for sewing into
a quilt, you may want to print them a fraction larger
than the size you will sew (have the color extend
into the seam allowance). Then, when you sew, you Step 4
won’t see any white lines from unprinted fabric
along your seam line.
9 You can also print images from the Image Step 7

Worktable, see page 231.
Step 5
Step 6 Step 8
230
Chapter 9: Printing
Step 1
PRINTING IMAGES WITH
PHOTO LAYOUT
Make the most of printable fabric sheets and
arrange photos before printing. Do this from
the Image worktable when you have at least
one photo in your Sketchbook. Change Page
Setup before you start this process.
Step 2
1. On the Image Worktable, click the
PRINT & EXPORT tab, and Print on the
Sketchbook photos appear here. Use the ribbon.
scrollbar to the right, if you don’t see them all.
2. In the PRINT IMAGE palette, click Photo
Layout. What looks like a blank piece of
paper will appear with the photos from
your Sketchbook on the right.
3. Drag and drop an image from the right

column onto the page. The toolbar will
enable once there is an image on the
page. The image will set at its saved
size, unless the image is too large to fit
on your page. If it is too large, click Yes,
to scale the image to fit. You can drag
as many images onto the page as you
Step 3 like.
Drag the photo from the right column onto the page. The photo
will be small and transparent until the mouse is released. Steps 4-13 can be done in any order, but the
image must be selected:
4. Move the image – click and drag the

image to a new position.
Step 5 5. Resize the image – if the image’s top-

Resize
left corner is not visible, move the
image. Click the Resize dialog button.
Step 5 If Maintain aspect ratio is checked, the
image stays proportional. To change the
Step 6 – Rotate or Flip numbers, double-click the number and
type a new one or use the arrows next
to the size to move in increments. Click
Rotate Rotate Flip Flip OK. You may need to move the image
Left Right Horizontally Vertically
back on the page.
Step 7 – Center or Move
9
6. Rotate or Flip the image – click the
Rotate Left or Rotate Right buttons
Center on Center Center to rotate the image 90 degrees each
Page Horizontally Vertically time. Click the Flip Horizontally or Flip
Vertically buttons to mirror the image.
7. Reposition using the presets – click any

Move to Move to Move Left Move Right
Top Bottom of the Center or Move preset buttons.
231
8. Reposition the image using the grid – Step 8 – Grid

make sure you can see the grid (click
Show Grid) and turn on grid snapping
(click Snap to Grid). Now when you Show Grid Snap to Grid
move the image, the image will snap to
the grid. (The grid does not print.) Origin: Where you want
the grid to start
9. Changing the grid – click View > Grid
Spacing: Increments used
Setup. Choose the Origin and Spacing. for Snap to Grid
Click OK.
Step 9
10. Aligning images – click the image you
want all others to follow. SHIFT+click
Step 10 – Align
the other images you want to align to
the first selected image. Click one of the
Align buttons to align tops, bottoms, Align Align Align Left Align Right
lefts, or rights. (The Align options are Top Bottom
only active when there is more than
one image selected.) First block selected SHIFT+click the other photos to align
11. Make a full sheet of printable fabric

(works best for small images) – click the
Tile button. The image will repeat side
by side on the page. (To turn off Tile,
click the Tile button again.)
12. Copying and pasting images already

on the page – to copy the image, press
the Copy button, or press CTRL+C Align Top was used
in this example
(Command+C). Paste the image by
clicking the Paste button, or pressing
CTRL+V (Command+V).
13. Remove/Delete an image from page –

click the image to select it. Click the
Delete button or press your keyboard
Delete key. Step 11
Tile
14. Print – click Print when the page is
ready. You may receive a printer box
asking which printer to use. Choose a
printer from the list and click OK. The
page will remain open in case you want Full page of tiled photos
to print it again or make changes.
9 NOTES
Click the X in the top-right corner to Remember seam allowance when positioning images. We suggest setting your
close Photo Layout. The page will be grid to Upper left of page with ¼ inch spacing and positioning your images 2
erased. squares apart, and at least one square from the edge of the page.
Print your images a fraction larger than they need to be so your color extends
past your sewing line to avoid seeing any white lines from unprinted fabric
along your seam line. Example: Instead of printing at 5” x 5”, print at 5.125” x
5.125” to have the color extend 1/16 of an inch into each seam allowance side.
232
Chapter 9: Printing
PRINTING FABRIC
YARDAGE ESTIMATES
Step 2 EQ8 will estimate yardage for your quilt.
Remember that these are estimates. You may
find you need less fabric depending on your
quilt style. In contrast, if you are using a fabric
with a repeat or a specific design you want in
the center, you will probably need more than
the estimated amount.
1. With the quilt you want to print fabric

Step 3 yardage for on the Quilt Worktable,
click the PRINT & EXPORT tab, and
Step 4
2. In the PRINT PATTERNS palette, click
Yardage. The Print Yardage Estimates
box will appear.
Step 5 3. Under Fabric Width, click the down

Print Zoom In
arrow beside Width to select a width
size for your fabric. Or, you can decide
to have the fabric yardage given using
Fat quarters only by clicking the
checkbox.
4. Under Seam Allowance choose the

seam allowance Width you want added
around each piece. Double-click the
number and type a new number, if you
need to change it.
5. Click Preview to see what will print. To

zoom in, click the Zoom In button, drag
a marquee box around what you want
to see larger, then release to see the
Here is how EQ8 figures yardage: selected area zoom. Click Zoom Out
or Fit to Screen to zoom back to the
1. It adds the selected seam allowance to each patch and places an
regular view. Note that the fabric name
imaginary rectangle around each patch at the seam allowance.
and SKU, where applicable, are listed.
2. It places these rectangles on fabric of the selected Fabric Width. Click Print.
3. Each time a “row” is filled, it begins a new row, counting the entire
strip as required yardage.
NOTE
If you need to change the font or font size, see page
9
235. Numbers is the main font used in yardage
• The result is usually an over estimate. Shapes like on-point sashes charts.
tend to give exceptionally large yardage figures.
• The estimate for the border assumes that long strips are pieced. The
piecing length is based on the width of fabric selected in the Print
Fabric Yardage box.
• Backing and binding are not estimated.
• For tips on Fabric Yardage Estimates, see page 234.
233
SPECIAL NOTES ON Example 1
FABRIC YARDAGE
ESTIMATES
Color your center and borders differently to
get separate yardage amounts for each. If
your quilt center and borders use the same
fabric swatch (let’s say a green leaf print), the
yardage will show as one number for both in
the estimate. Leave your quilt center colored
in the green leaf fabric, but change your
border to be a gray solid color. If you re-print Initial design – borders and center are Modified design to see yardage needed
colored in the same fabrics. for center versus borders.
fabric yardage, they’ll show up as separate
numbers in the estimate. After printing the
Example 2
fabric yardage, you can recolor the borders
using your desired fabrics. See Example 1.
For quilts with many identically colored

blocks, you can use the yardage estimate to
count the number of blocks you need to sew.
On the Quilt Worktable, click the DESIGN tab.
On the ribbon, click Fabric Tools. Click the
Paintbrush tool and select either a fabric or
solid color not used anywhere in your quilt,
or close in color to any others you have used.
CTRL+click (Command+click) one patch in one
block on the quilt. This will make all matching CTRL+click to color a patch in one block and preview the yardage to get a block count.
blocks color in the same patch. Continue
this step until the blocks you want counted
are filled. If you preview the yardage now
(PRINT & EXPORT tab > Yardage > Preview),
the number of patches needed for the new
fabric or color chosen will equal the number The fabric yardage estimate says there are 16 black patches in the quilt,
of blocks colored that way on the quilt. See which means there are 16 Economy Patch blocks in the quilt.
Example 2.
Example 3
Fabric yardage will not calculate backing, but
if you design a second quilt that is the quilt
back you can print yardage for that as well.
Start a new Custom Set quilt (the same size as
your quilt front) and set a plain square which
covers the entire center rectangle (see page
9 55). Or, design a pieced back in any layout
style (the same size as your quilt front) and
color it with fabric. To see how large your
quilt front is, look in the bottom-right corner
of your screen and find Finished Quilt Size.
This is the finished size of the quilt (including Quilt front – 50” x 76” Quilt back – 50” x 76”
borders). See Example 3.
The finished quilt size appears at the lower-right corner of your screen.
234
Chapter 9: Printing
CHANGING FONTS
You can customize your printouts by changing
the style or point size of the fonts.
Step 1
1. Click FILE from the menu bar, then
Printer Fonts. OR, if you have the Print
box on your screen, click the Fonts
button. The Printer Fonts box appears.
If you already have a Print window open, click the Fonts button.
2. Click the down arrow next to the
Choose font for: box, and click the item
you want to change.
Symbol (default is Arial, 8) – On

Step 2 templates and rotary cutting charts, it
labels the key block. It also labels each
Step 3 template.
Step 4 Number (default is Arial, 8) – On quilts,

it is the overall size of the quilt (below
the Header). It’s also used for labeling
on foundation piecing printouts,
templates, and rotary cutting charts. On
Step 5 fabric yardage estimates, it is the main
font used.
Header (default is Arial, 12) – The

Header Symbol header prints the block or quilt name
(as it appears on the notecard – if there
is no name, it will read “Unnamed”) at
the top of the page.
Footer (default is Arial, 7) – The footer

prints in the lower-left corner of all
printouts. It will again list the name of
the block or quilt, the size of a block,
Data
and the name of the project.
Data (default is Arial, 8) – The data font

prints on rotary cutting instructions
only. This is used for the legend for
cutting diagrams, patch counts, and
patch labels. 9
3. Click the down arrow below the Font:
box, and click the font style you want.
4. Click the down arrow below the Size:

Footer Number box, and click the point size you want.
5. Click OK to keep your changes, or click

Close to cancel them.
235
CHANGING PAGE Step 2

SETUP OR PRINTERS
Step 1
Use this to change the page orientation, (Optional)
margins, paper size, printer or paper source.
1. (Optional) If you need to change

Step 1
printers, click FILE from the menu bar, (Optional)
then Print Setup. Click the down arrow
next to Name and click the printer you
wish to use. Click OK.
2. Click FILE from the menu bar, then Page

Setup. OR, if you have the Print box
on your screen, click the Page Setup
button. The Page Setup box appears.
3. Under Paper, click the down arrow next

to the Size box to choose your paper
size.
4. Under Paper, click the down arrow next

to the Source box to choose where the
paper is fed from (which paper tray, or
manual feed, for example).
5. Under Orientation, click Portrait if you

want your printout to be tall (normal)
or Landscape if you want your printout
to be wide (sideways).
6. Under Margins, double-click in each

box and type the size you want to set
the left, right, top and bottom margins.
Margins are the spaces around the Step 3
edges of your printout. If you make Step 4
them too large it will take more pages
to print the information. Your printer
determines how small they can be. Step 5 Step 6
7. Click OK to keep your changes, or click

Cancel to cancel them.
Step 7
236
10
CHAPTER 10
Exporting
This chapter explains the ways you can export selected areas of your design, images, and metafiles of blocks. And, in this
age of social media, we’ll show you how you can share your designs on Facebook.
Exporting Images..............................................................................................238
Exporting Selected Areas..................................................................................240
Exporting Metafiles of Blocks...........................................................................241
Sharing Designs on Facebook...........................................................................242
EXPORTING IMAGES
EQ8 lets you export images, perfect for everything from webpages to books—in other words, images of low to high resolution.
1. On the Quilt or Block Worktable, Step 1
click the PRINT & EXPORT tab. On
the ribbon, click Export, then Image
from the palette. An Export Image box
appears.
Quilt Worktable
computer where you’d like to save the
image.
3. Click the down arrow next to Save as

type: and choose the desired file type: Block Worktable
TIF is typically used for high resolution

printing purposes. Use this, for
instance, for images to be sent to
publishers.
JPG, GIF, BMP, and PNG files are

typically used for web images.
Quilt Worktable
4. Click inside the File name: box and type

a name for your image. Block Worktable
5. Click Save. An Export Image File of Quilt

or Block (depending which worktable
Step 2
you are on) box appears. You will want
to export the image at the size and
resolution you need.
NOTE
To print a quilt a specific size, or print several blocks
on one sheet of paper, export them using these
directions, then import them as images (see page
174), and print using Photo Layout (see page 231).
This will also work for quilt labels you create using
the Set Applique Text tool.
6. Under Dimensions of Image, enter the

size you need by double-clicking inside
each box and typing a new size. If you Step 4 Step 5 Step 3
are exporting a quilt image, leave Keep
aspect ratio checked to keep your quilt
correctly proportioned when changing
width or height.
10
238
Chapter 10: Exporting
7. Click the down-arrow next to

Resolution: and click the resolution
you need. Resolution depends on how
Step 6
you’ll use the image:
Step 7 72-75 dpi (low resolution) – for images

to be emailed or used in web pages.
Step 8
150-300 dpi – for images to print from
Step 9
your home printer.
300-600 dpi (high resolution) – for

Step 10
images to be used in books or
magazines.
8. Under Options, you can uncheck the

Outline patches and Outline blocks
boxes if you do not want a black line
around blocks and patches.
9. If you choose to export a TIF or JPG file,

set the other options:
TIF files – Compression (LZW or none)

and Depth (24 bit or 32 bit).
JPG files – JPEG quality (set to 50 by

default; available choices 0-100;
100 is the highest quality/largest file
size; 0 is the lowest quality/smallest file
size).
10. Click OK.
NOTES
When in doubt, try several settings and choose the
one image that works best for your use.
In general, you want to export the image at the size

you plan to use it in the document. The number of
pixels in an image is fixed. Increasing or decreasing
image size after the image has been created can
lead to resolution and printing issues in your
document.
10
239
EXPORTING SELECTED Step 1
AREAS
1. On the Quilt or Block Worktable click
the PRINT & EXPORT tab. On the
Quilt Worktable
ribbon, click Export, then Selection
from the palette. Your cursor will
change to a fancy plus sign with a
rectangle in the bottom-right quadrant.
2. Position the center of the plus sign at Block Worktable

the top-left of the area to be exported.
Click, hold, and drag diagonally down
and right to form a box, release when
the box encloses the image you want
to export. An Export Selection box will
appear with three choices:
Quilt Worktable
Save as a File
3. Click the Save as a file button. Block Worktable

computer where you’d like to save the
image.
Export Selection Cursor
5. Click inside the File name: box. Type a
name for your file.
6. Click Save. Your file will be saved as a

bitmap (.bmp).
Copy to Windows Clipboard

Only available for Windows® operating
systems.
3. Click the Copy to Windows clipboard

button.
4. Open a drawing, imaging, or word

processing program on your computer.
Step 2
5. Create a new image, file, or document. Click, hold, and drag diagonally to form a box around the area you’d like to export.
Click EDIT > Paste (or press CTRL+V).
Your image will appear in the
document.
10 Print
3. Click the Print button. Your image will
print.
Step 3
240
Chapter 10: Exporting
NOTES
If you decide you don’t want to export anything
and the plus-sign cursor is engaged, click on a
different EQ8 tab, palette option, or worktable and
it will disappear. If you have created the export box
around the image and the Export Selection box is
on your screen, click the X in the top-right corner to
close the box. Your cursor will return to its previous
use.
To print the entire screen, press the Print Screen

key (Command+SHIFT+4) on your keyboard, open
a new document in a program such as Word, and
press CTRL+V (Command+V) to paste the screen
image. This is handy for writing EQ8 teaching
materials.
EXPORTING METAFILES
OF BLOCKS
Only available for Windows® operating
systems. In EQ8 you can export metafiles
of blocks (not quilts) and import them into
another software application, such as Word,
to make piecing diagrams.
1. Begin on the Block Worktable, with

Step 1
the block you want to export. Click the
PRINT & EXPORT tab. On the ribbon,
click Export, and Metafile from the
palette. The Export Metafile box will
appear.
2. Under Quality choose Draft quality,

Medium, or High.
Step 1
3. Under Options, choose one:
Outline and Fill – colored block with

outlines
Step 2 Outline only – line drawing
Fill only (recommended) – colored

Step 3
block with no outlines
NOTE
Fill colors are solid colors only. The average color of
the fabrics in the block will be used If you choose
Outline and Fill or Fill only.
10
241
4. You can save the metafile as a file or

copy it to the clipboard:
Save as Windows metafile – Navigate

to the location on your computer
where you’d like to save the image.
Click inside the File name: box and type
a name for your metafile. Click Save. Step 4
EQ8 automatically adds the three-letter
extension of .emf.
Copy to Windows clipboard – The

metafile is copied to the Windows
clipboard. After exporting, open the
document (or program) you want to
paste into, and choose Edit > Paste (or
CTRL+V) to paste the metafile.
NOTE
To learn how to explode a metafile for a piecing Step 1
diagram, see the EQ8 Online Support site.
SHARING DESIGNS ON
FACEBOOK
Let your Facebook friends see what quilts Step 1
you’ve been designing.
1. Begin on the Quilt Worktable with the

quilt you want to share. Click the PRINT
& EXPORT tab. On the ribbon, click
Export, and Facebook from the palette.
A Log into Facebook box appears.
Step 2
2. Enter your Facebook login information,
then click Log In.
3. Click OK to the Facebook permission

questions. Step 4
4. Check the box if you’d also like to post

your design on the Do You EQ Facebook Step 5
page to share with other EQ users.
5. Type content in the top box to post

with your image.
6. Click Post to My Facebook Wall.

10
7. A message will display telling you that
your quilt has been posted. Click OK.
Step 6
242
INDEX & TOOLS
Index.................................................................................................................244
Keyboard Shortcuts..........................................................................................249
Tool Reference..................................................................................................250
Centering on quilt 88
INDEX Clipping 88
C
Colorings 109 Center Image 159
Symbols Copy & paste 85 Center in Block 150
Delete 85 Centering blocks on a quilt 88
3 Dot Options 14, 32, 76
EasyDraw 121 Centimeters or Inches 10
A Editing from Project Sketchbook Channel Mixer 183
29 Circular Symmetries 192
Activation 12 Erase 86 Clear the current guides 122, 131,
Add a border to a quilt 63 Making multiple blocks the same 139
Add as Fabric 177, 178, 181 size 90 Clip & Flip 167
Adding Items to Project Sketchbook Move 83 Clipping blocks 88
27 Pieced 121 Clone 126, 135, 150
Add to Sketchbook (from Library) Printing 216 Borders 65
200 Resize on Layers 2 or 3, or on Selected strips in a strip quilt 48
Adjust Image Color 183 Custom Set 84 Color Depth 196
Adjust tool 83, 85, 88, 90 Rotate and flip 82 Coloring Arrows 109
Advanced Symmetry 125 Rotate on Layers 2 or 3, or on Colors 96 (see also Fabric Tools)
Aligned Borders 70 Custom Set 84 Adding grades 113
Aligning multiple blocks 90 Search by Category 202 Adding new 110
Align to Edge fabric rotating method Select Coloring 73 Adding shades & tints or tones
103 Set on quilt 73, 74 112
Applique Skew on Layers 2 or 3, or on Sorting 107
Block vs. motif 138 Custom Set 84 Compress a Project’s File Size 23
Center (patches) in Block 150 Stacking order 88 Contact EQ 12
Clone patches 150 Block Library Convert selected segments to guides
Combining with pieced block 156 Search by Category 202 122, 131, 139
Delete patches 150 Block Size 121, 131, 138 Convert to patch 143, 145
Drawing a block or motif 138 Block Tools Copying
Editing blocks or motifs 149 Adjust tool 83, 85, 88, 90 Projects from One Computer to
Editing nodes 152 Erase Block tool 86 Another 25
Flip patches 150 Eyedropper 77 Copy & paste
Make a wreath 151 Flip tool 82 Items on Layers 2 or 3, or on
Making a block into a motif 154 Rotate tool 82 Custom Set 85
Rearrange overlapping patches Set Block 73, 75, 76 Copy to Fabrics 30, 181
150 Symmetry tool 87 Copy to Photos 175
Resize patches 149 BMP 172, 208, 238 Create Colorway 185
Rotate patches 150 Border Create Copy Project 23
Applique text 92 Adding, Deleting, or Inserting a Create Quilt from Block 56
Arc (Ellipse tool) 144 63 Create Serendipity 164
Arc Tool 123 Aligned 70 Crop 160, 177, 178, 180
Auto Add 206 Auto Borders 66 Custom Set Quilt 55
Auto Borders 66 Choosing a style 62 Aligning blocks 90
Auto Fill 131, 139 Cloning 65 Copy & paste items 85
Keeping borders when changing Delete items 85
B Move, resize, rotate, and skew
layouts 67
Baby Blocks Quilt 42 Making each side a different style blocks 83
Background canvas color 179, 180, 68 Set blocks 74
193, 194 Printing 228 Set photos 79
Bezier Curve Tool 140 Sizing 64 Set plain block 76
Block Styles 60 Sizing blocks 90
Adding to Project Sketchbook 27 Brightness or Contrast 189 Stacking, centering, and clipping
Add plain block 76 Bring to Front 150 blocks 88
Adjusting 82 Brush Stroke Tool 142
Aligning multiple blocks 90 Brush Thread 105
244
Index
D E Fabric Tools 96
Fussy Cut Tool 101
Default Palette Easy + Applique 156 Paintbrush tool 96
Changing the 114 EasyDraw 119 Randomize Tool 115
Default Project 11 Advanced Symmetry 125 Rotate Fabric Tool 102
Delete 125, 135, 150 Clone segments 126 Select & Spray Tool 99
Borders 63 Delete segments 125 Select & Swap Tool 100
from the Project Sketchbook 33 Drawing a block 120 Spraycan tool 99
Image from Image Worktable Editing blocks 125 Swap Color Tool 100
176 Editing nodes 126 Fabric Yardage Estimates 233
Project 20 Flip segments 125 Notes on 234
Detach button 97 Resize segments 126 Facebook, Sharing Designs on 242
Distort Fit 51, 159 Rotate segments 126 Fancy Star 170
Download 12 Rules 120 Fat quarters 233
Drag and drop 74, 75, 76, 78, 79 Editing Favorite Libraries (see My Favorite
Drawing Blocks from Project Sketchbook Libraries)
an Applique Block or Motif 138 29 File
an EasyDraw + Applique Block Photos from Project Sketchbook Compressing size 23
156 30 Creating a New Project 15
an EasyDraw Block 120 Quilts from Project Sketchbook Default location 15
a PolyDraw + Applique Block 156 28 Deleting a Project 20
a PolyDraw Block 129 Edit Tool 126, 136, 143, 152 PJ8 14
Combining Pieced and Applique Ellipse Tool 144 Moving from One Computer to
Blocks 156 Embroidery Another 25
Drawing Tools (Applique) Importing EXP files 209 Opening a Project 17
Bezier Curve Tool 140 Printing from Quilt Worktable Renaming a Project 18
Brush Stroke Tool 142 230 Saving a Project 16
Draw Tool 140 Set on quilt 78 Searching for a Project 19
Edit Tool 143, 152 Embroidery Tools Finding items with the Eyedropper
Ellipse Tool 144 Set Embroidery 78 77, 104
Freehand Tool 141 Erase Quilt 86 Finished Size 36
Line Tool 140 Erase tool 86 Fit in Window 181
Oval Shapes 146 Export Flip 125, 135, 150
Pick Tool 149 Facebook 242 Flip tool 82
Polygon Shapes 146 Images 238 Foundation Pattern 219
PosieMaker 147 Metafiles of blocks 241 Change Numbers 221
Rectangle Tool 144 Resolution 239 Changing printouts 222
Shapes Tool 146 Selected Areas 240 Deleting and moving sections
StarMaker 147 Eyedropper tool 222
StencilMaker 148 Find a block, motif, or stencil 77 Numbering tab 221
Swath Tool 142 Find a fabric or color 104 Options tab 220
Wreathmaker 151 Eye Icon 72 Sections tab 221
Drawing Tools (EasyDraw) Frame Block 164
Arc Tool 123 F Freehand Brush 98
Edit Tool 126 Fabric Library Freehand Tool 141
Grid tool 124 Importing image files 208 Fussy Cut Tool 101
Line Tool 123 Searching by Color 203
Pick Tool 125 Fabrics 96 G
Drawing Tools (PolyDraw) Add as Fabric 177
Edit Tool 136 GIF 172, 208, 238
Copy to Photos 175 Graph Paper Cells 121, 131, 139
Pick Tool 134 Scale 177
PolyArc Tool 133 Grid Snaps 80
Search by Color 203 Grid tool 124
PolyLine Tool 132 Sorting 107
Draw Tool 140 Straightening 178
245
H Inside Fit 50, 159 M

Installing EQ8 12
Help 12 Map to colors 52, 118
Hide/show J Map to fabrics 52, 118
Auto Fill on closed patches 131, Margins 236
139, 162 JPG 172, 208, 238 Mask 51
Graph paper 121, 131, 139 Measurement units (inches or
K
Image for tracing 161 centimeters) 10
Quilt patch lines 72 Kaleidoscope Merge Blocks 166
Histogram 187 PolyDraw Grid 130 Metafiles 241
Adjust 188 Serendipity 169 Most recently used fabrics and colors
Bright/Contrast 189 96
Equalize 187 L Most recently used projects 17
Home Screen 6, 17, 21 Motif (see also Applique)
Layer 1
Horizontal Quilt 39 Removing the background from
Set blocks 73
Horizontal Strip Quilt 44 an applique block 154
Set photos 79
Hue Map 184 Set on quilt 75
Layer 2
Move
I Applique text 92
Items on Layers 2 or 3, or on
Set motifs 75
Image (see also Photo) Custom Set 83
Set photo 79
Adding to Project Sketchbook 27 My Favorite Libraries
Layer 3
Adjust color 182 Adding and Saving Items in 211
Set embroidery 78
Applying Circular Symmetries 192 Adding, Formatting, and
Set stencils 75
Applying Effects 190 Renaming 210
Layout Library 57
Applying Filters 191 Delete an entire library 212
Resize a layout library quilt 58
Applying Square Symmetries 194 Deleting items from 212
Layout styles for quilts 38
Channel Mixer 183 Baby Blocks Quilt 42 N
Create Colorway 185 Custom Set Quilt 55
Cropping 180 Horizontal Quilt 39 New
Deleting 176 Horizontal Strip Quilt 44 Project 15
Editing 175 One Patch Quilt 49 Quilt 38
Exporting 238 On-Point Quilt 40 Nodes 126, 136, 152
Flip 179 Photo Patchwork Quilt 49, 50 Notecard 34
Hue Map 184 Variable Blocks Quilt 43 Flip 203
Import for tracing 158 Variable Point Quilt 41 Searching for items by 201
Import to Image Worktable 174 Vertical Strip Quilt 44
Increase/Decrease Color Depth Libraries O
196 About 198 One Patch Quilt 49, 53
Photo Layout 231 Add to Sketchbook 200 Online Support Articles 12
Resizing 175 Categories and Styles 198 On-Point Quilt 40
Rotate 179 Importing from existing projects Open a Project 17
Shearing 180 207 from your Email 22
Special Effects 190 Importing into Fabric or Photo Open Library 7
Straightening 178 Libraries 208 Options Menu 14
Tracing 158 Layout Library 57 Outside Fit 51, 159
Import Linking 206 Oval Brush 98
an image for tracing 158 My Favorite Libraries 210 Oval Shapes 146
Embroidery (EXP) files 209 Searching in the 201
from existing projects 207 Sections 199 P
Image files into Fabric or Photo Using items from 200
Libraries 208 Line Brush 98 Page Setup 236
Image to Image Worktable 174 Line Tool 123, 140 Paintbrush tool 96, 98
Photo to Quilt Worktable 50 Linking Libraries 206 Pan 181
Inches or Centimeters 10 Paper Piecing (see Foundation
Insert Borders 63 Pattern)
246
Index
PatchDraw (see PolyDraw) Changing foundation and Q

Photo (see also Image) template printouts 222
Editing from Project Sketchbook Changing Printers 236 Quick Quilt 21
30 Edit Name 214 Quick Start Guide 12
Importing image files 208 Embroidery 230 Quilt
Import to Quilt Worktable 50 Fabric Yardage Estimates 233 Adding to Project Sketchbook 27
Printing from Quilt Worktable Finished Block Size 216, 218, 220, Adjusting blocks in a 82
230 224, 228 Create Quilt from Block 56
Printing using Photo Layout 231 Foundation Pattern 219 Editing from Project Sketchbook
Set on quilt 79 Images 231 28
Understanding Image vs. Photo Key Block 218, 224 Erase Quilt 86
172 Line Thickness 217, 218, 220, 230 Hide/show quilt patch lines 72
Photo Patchwork Quilt 49, 50 Margins 236 Layout choices 38
Photo Tools Mirror 217, 219 Layout Library 57
Set Photo 79 Outline drawing 216, 229 New 38
Pick Tool 125, 134, 149 Overview 214 Printing 229
Pieced blocks 119 Page Setup 236 Rulers 81
Combining with applique 156 Patch outline 217 Setting applique text 92
EasyDraw 120 Photo Layout 231 Setting blocks 73, 74
PolyDraw 129 Photos 230 Setting embroidery 78
Pie (Ellipse tool) 144 Preview 215, 219, 220, 221, 222, Setting motifs 75
PJ8 14 225, 228, 229, 230, 233 Setting Photos 79
PNG 172, 208, 238 Quilt 229 Setting plain blocks 76
Poly + Applique 156 Quilting stencil 216 Setting stencils 75
PolyArc Tool 133 Rotary Cutting Chart 224 Snap Settings 80
PolyDraw 119, 129 Seam Allowance 218, 220, 224, Symmetry 87
Clone and Rotate Method 135 233 Understanding Layers 72
Clone patches 135 Showing fabrics 216, 229
Delete patches 135 Templates 218
R
Drawing a block 129 Use size from quilt 215 Randomize Tool 52, 115, 116
Editing blocks 134 Use size from worktable 215 Rectangle Brush 98
Editing nodes 136 Project Rectangle Tool 144
Flip patches 135 Compressing 23 Resize 126, 149
Grid 129 Create a New 15 Items on Layers 2 or 3, or on
Rotate patches 135 Create Copy 23 Custom Set 84
Polygon Shapes 146 Default locations 15 Resolution 173, 174, 176, 239
PolyLine Tool 132 Deleting 20 Restore Default Settings 10, 114
PosieMaker 147 Import from an existing 207 Rotary Cutting 224
Position & Resize 159 Moving from One Computer to Best Practices 227
Precision Bar Another 25 Notes on rounding 225
Applique 138 Open an existing 17 Understanding the cutting
EasyDraw 121 Renaming 18 diagrams 225
PolyDraw 130 Saving 16 Rotate 126, 135, 150
Preferences 10 Searching for a 19 Items on Layers 2 or 3, or on
Previous EQ Versions 17, 19 Sending via Email 22 Custom Set 84
Printer Fonts 235 Project Helper 15, 17, 18, 20 Rotate Fabric Tool 102
Printing Project Sketchbook 14 Rotate Tool 82
As applique pattern 216 Adding Items 27 Rounded Rectangle (Rectangle tool)
As many as fit 217 Deleting from 33 145
Block 216 Editing Blocks from 29
Block name 217 Editing Photos from 30
Block outline 217 Editing Quilts from 28
Border or Sash Blocks 228 Naming items 34
Changing fonts 235 Resizing 14
Sorting Items 31
247
S Strip Quilts W
Cloning a Strip 48
Same size buttons 90 Formulas 47 Worktable Options 80
Sashing 39, 40, 41 Strip Styles 46 Worktables 7
Save Support Site 12 Diagram 8
As 18 Swap Color Tool 100 Worktable Tools 181
Project 16 Swap Thread 105 Add as Fabric 181
Save Palette as Default 11 Swath Tool 142 Fit in Window 181
Scale Fabric 177 Symmetry tool 87 Pan 181
Scanning View Actual Size 181
Fabrics 173 T Wreathmaker 151
Photos 174
Seam Allowance 218, 220, 224, 233 Tape Measure Tool 37
Searching Tech support 12
for a Project 19 Templates 218
for blocks by Category 202 Changing printouts 222
for fabrics by Color 203 Deleting, moving, and rotating
for items by Notecard 201 patches 222
for threads 204 Text Tools
Select & Spray Tool 99 Adjust tool 93
Select & Swap Tool 100 Set Text 92
Send project via email 22 Thread
Send to Back 150 Adding colors 106
Serendipity 164 Properties 105
Set Search for by Text and by Color
Block tool 73, 75, 76 204
Embroidery tool 78 Thread Tools 105
Photo tool 79 Brush Thread 105
Text tool 92 Spray Thread 105
Shape Tool (from EQ7) (See Edit Tool) Swap Thread 105
Shapes Tool 146 Thread Properties 105
Shrink & Flip 168 TIF 172, 208, 238
Sketchbook (see Project Sketchbook) Tilt Block 165
Skew Toggle automatic tool snapping 77
Items on Layers 2 or 3, or on Tracing an image 158
Custom Set 84 Tips for 161
Snapping Options 122, 139 Tracing Image Tools
Snap Points 121, 139 Crop Tool 160
Snap Settings 80 Import Image Tool 159
Sort Position & Resize Tool 159
Fabrics and colors 107 Tutorial Videos 12
In the palette 32
U
Items in the Project Sketchbook
31 Uninstalling EQ8 12
Special Effects 190 Upper Left Image 159
Spraycan Tool 99 Use size from quilt 215
Spray Thread 105 Use size from worktable 215
Square Symmetries 194
Stacked Colorings 109 V
Stacking blocks 88
Variable Blocks Quilt 43
StarMaker 147
Variable Point Quilt 41
Stencil
Vertical Strip Quilt 44
Set on quilt 75
View Actual Size 181
StencilMaker 148
View Project Sketchbook 28, 29, 30,
Straighten Tool 178
31, 33, 34
248
Index
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
Speed Keys File Handling
Use these speed keys on the Quilt Worktable to quickly set blocks and/or Command Windows Mac
color patches.
New CTRL+N Cmd+N
CTRL+click (Windows) Command+click (Mac) Open CTRL+O Cmd+O

Setting blocks, photos Save / Add to CTRL+S Cmd+S
Sets blocks in all pre-defined spaces of a quilt layout. See page 73. Sketchbook
Coloring with Paintbrush tool
When the same block is used multiple times in a quilt, holding this speed Editing
key while clicking will color the same patch in all of those blocks at once.
See page 96. Command Windows Mac
Undo CTRL+Z Cmd+Z
Coloring with the Spraycan tool
When the same fabric/color is used multiple times in a quilt, holding this Cut CTRL+X Cmd+X
speed key while clicking will color the matching fabric/color in all the Copy CTRL+C Cmd+C
blocks at once. See page 99.
Paste CTRL+V Cmd+V
Clear Delete Delete/
Backspace
ALT+click (Windows) Option+click (Mac)
Setting blocks, photos
Sets blocks in alternating pre-defined spaces of a quilt layout. Miscellaneous
Coloring with Paintbrush tool Command Windows Mac
When the same block is used multiple times in a quilt, holding this speed Select All CTRL+A Cmd+A
key while clicking will color the same patch in alternating blocks at once.
Select last Spacebar Spacebar
Coloring with the Spraycan tool drawn
When the same fabric/color is used multiple times in a quilt, holding this segment(s)
speed key while clicking will color the matching fabric/color in alternating Flip arc on Spacebar Spacebar
blocks at once. EasyDraw block (while (while
drawing) drawing)
View F8 F8
Sketchbook
Close dialog Esc Esc
box
Zoom in/out CTRL + CTRL +
mouse mouse
wheel wheel
249
QUILT WORKTABLE
Photo Tools
This toolbox is found on the Quilt
Block Tools
Worktable. Click the DESIGN tab on
This toolbox is found on the Quilt Fabric Tools the top ribbon, then choose Photo
Worktable. Click the DESIGN tab on This toolbox is found on the Quilt Tools.
the top ribbon, then choose Block Worktable. Click the DESIGN tab on
Tools. Set Photo
the top ribbon, then choose Fabric
Click on a space in the quilt, or drag
Tools.
Set Block and drop a photo onto the quilt.
Click on a space in the quilt, or drag Paintbrush Photos can be set on any layer of the
and drop a block onto the quilt. Click on a patch in the quilt to color it Quilt Worktable.
with the selected fabric.
Erase Block Erase
Click on a block in the quilt to remove Spraycan Click on a photo in the quilt to remove
the block from that space. Click on a patch in the quilt to color all the photo from that space.
matching fabrics in the block at one
Rotate Adjust
time.
Click a block in the quilt to rotate it 90 Select a photo on the quilt to move,
degrees with each click. Swap Color rotate and resize it on Layers 2 and 3,
Click on a patch in the quilt to color as well as Layer 1 of Custom Set quilts.
Flip
all matching fabrics in the quilt at one This tool is only enabled when on the
Click on an asymmetric block in the
time. appropriate layer.
quilt to mirror it left to right.
Eyedropper Open Library
Adjust
Click a patch in the quilt to quickly find Opens the Photo Library window.
Select a block on the quilt to move,
the fabric or color used in the palette.
rotate and resize it on Layers 2 and 3,
as well as Layer 1 of Custom Set quilts. Fussy Cut
This tool is only enabled when on the Click, hold and drag to move the fabric
appropriate layer. around within a patch in the quilt.
Symmetry Rotate Fabric
Click on the quilt to flip and rotate Click the fabric in the quilt to rotate it
asymmetric blocks in 16 different within the patch.
variations. This works best with
horizontal layouts. Randomize
Choose an option, then click on the
Eyedropper quilt to recolor quickly.
Click a block in the quilt to quickly
locate it in the palette. Open Library
Opens the Fabric Library window.
Open Library
Opens the Block Library window. Check the EQ8 Online Support site for
information about any palette sub-tools.
250
Tool Reference
QUILT WORKTABLE
Embroidery Tools Thread Tools

This toolbox is available when Layer This toolbox is found on the Quilt
3 is selected at the bottom of the Worktable. Click the DESIGN tab on
Quilt Worktable. Click the DESIGN the top ribbon, then choose Thread
tab on the top ribbon, then choose Tools.
Embroidery Tools.
Brush Thread
Set Embroidery Click a patch in the quilt to color the
Drag an embroidery design from the outlines with the selected thread color.
palette to Layer 3 of the quilt.
Spray Thread
Erase Click a patch in the quilt to color the
Text Tools Click on a design in the quilt to remove outlines of all matching patches in the
This toolbox is available when Layer 2 it from its space. Use the Adjust tool to block at one time.
is selected at the bottom of the Quilt completely remove the empty space.
Swap Thread
Worktable. Click the DESIGN tab on
Rotate Click a patch in the quilt to color the
the top ribbon, then choose Text Tools.
Click an embroidery in the quilt to outlines of all matching patches in the
Set Text rotate it 90 degrees with each click. quilt at one time.
Hold the keyboard SHIFT key, then
Flip Open Library
click, hold and drag to create a text
Click an embroidery in the quilt to Opens the Thread Library window.
box on the quilt. When you release,
mirror it left to right.
you’ll have a box in which you can start
typing. Adjust
Select an embroidery on the quilt to
Adjust
move, rotate, resize and delete it on
Select a text box on the quilt to move,
Layer 3.
rotate, resize and delete it on Layer 2.
Open Library
Note: Text Tools are only available when
Opens the Embroidery Library window.
Layer 2 is selected at the bottom of the
Quilt Worktable.
Note: Embroidery Tools are only available
when Layer 3 is selected at the bottom of
the Quilt Worktable.
251
PRINT & EXPORT TOOLS
Export options on the Quilt Worktable shown above
Export
Print options on the Quilt Worktable shown above This toolbox is found on the Quilt
Worktable. Click the PRINT & EXPORT
tab on the top ribbon, then choose
Print
Export.
This toolbox is found on the Quilt
Worktable. Click the PRINT & EXPORT Image
tab on the top ribbon, then choose Exports an image of the quilt (or the
Print. selected block) as a *.JPG, *.TIF, *.GIF,
*.PNG or *.BMP file.
Quilt (Quilt Worktable only)
Prints a picture of the quilt. Selection
Exports an image as a *.BMP file of the
Yardage (Quilt Worktable only) selected area. Drag a box around an
Prints the yardage requirements for area of your quilt to export only that
your quilt. area.
Block Metafile (Block Worktable only)
Prints a picture of the selected block. Exports a vector metafile (*.EMF)
to explode blocks in another vector
Templates
software. This is only available for
Prints templates of the selected block.
Windows computers.
Foundation
Facebook (Quilt Worktable only)
Prints foundation patterns of the
Exports an image of your quilt to your
selected block.
Facebook page for your peers to see.
Rotary Cutting
Prints rotary cutting instructions of the
Note: The Print & Export options are
selected block.
similar on the Quilt and Block Worktables.
You may notice some of the options are not
Embroidery (Quilt Worktable only)
available on the Block Worktable and vice
Prints a picture of the selected versa.
embroidery. Only available with
embroidery selected on Layer 3. Also, some printing options do not apply
to particular quilt elements, and may not
Photo (Quilt Worktable only) be available. For example, if you have an
Prints a picture of the selected photo. applique block selected, then Foundation,
Rotary Cutting, Embroidery and Photo will
Print Setup not be available because they do not apply
Opens the Print Setup dialog to adjust to the selected applique block.
your print settings.
252
Tool Reference
BLOCK WORKTABLE
EasyDraw Tools
This toolbox is found on the Block Applique Tools
Worktable. With an EasyDraw Block
This toolbox is found on the Block
selected, choose the DRAW tab on
Worktable. With an Applique Block
the top ribbon, then choose Drawing
or Motif selected, choose the DRAW
Tools.
tab on the top ribbon, then choose
Pick Drawing Tools.
Click on a segment (line or arc) to PolyDraw Tools
Pick
select it. Selected segments can be This toolbox is found on the Block Click on the edge of a patch to select it.
moved, resized, rotated, deleted and Worktable. With a PolyDraw Block There are several options for selected
converted to guides. This tool does selected, choose the DRAW tab on patches in the palette.
have Advanced options available. the top ribbon, then choose Drawing
Tools. Edit
Edit
Click on the edge of a patch to select
Click on a line or arc to adjust the Pick it. Drag a node to reposition it. Adjust
endpoints (nodes) or the shape of the Click on the edge of a patch to select the handles to reshape curves. Double-
curve, where applicable. it. Selected patch(es) can be flipped, click a node to delete it. Double-click a
rotated, cloned and deleted. line/curve to add a new node.
Line
Click, hold and drag your mouse to Edit Draw
draw a line from point to point on the Click on the edge of a patch to select Choose a drawing sub-tool. Each has
block. it. Drag a node to reposition it. Double- its own capabilities. Drag your cursor
click a node to delete it. Double-click a on the block to draw with these tools.
Arc
line/curve to add a new node.
Click, hold and drag your mouse to
Shapes
draw an arc on the block. Use the PolyLine Choose a pre-defined shape, then drag
Spacebar to flip the direction of the This tool will follow straight line grids. your mouse on the block to place your
arc. Double-click to anchor your starting shape. Use the PatchMaker shapes to
point. Single click to anchor additional create quick stars, flowers and scallops.
Grid
points to create the patch shape.
Enter the Columns and Rows of your
Double-click on the starting point to Ellipse
grid, then drag diagonally on the block
close the patch. Drag an ellipse onto the block. Use the
to place your grid.
palette options to change the style of
PolyArc the ellipse, its shape and size.
This tool will follow straight line and
curved grids. Double-click to anchor Rectangle
your starting point. Single click to Drag a rectangle onto the block. Use
anchor additional points to create the palette options to change the style
the patch shape. Double-click on the of the rectangle, its shape and size.
starting point to close the patch.
253
BLOCK WORKTABLE IMAGE WORKTABLE
Create Serendipity Edit Options

This toolbox is found on the Block This toolbox is found on the Image
Worktable. Click the NEW BLOCK tab Worktable. Click the IMAGE tab on
on the top ribbon, then choose Create the top ribbon, then choose Edit.
Serendipity.
Import Image
Frame Block Imports an image from your computer
Tracing Image Tools Puts a pre-designed frame around the into EQ8 to edit and add to your
This toolbox is found on the Block selected Sketchbook block. project.
Worktable. With any block style
Tilt Block Resize Image
selected, choose the DRAW tab on
Tilts the selected Sketchbook block at Adjusts the image size and resolution.
the top ribbon, then choose Tracing
any angle from 0 to 90 degrees.
Image.
Scale Fabric
Merge Blocks Ensures the fabric image you have
Import Image
Combines the two selected Sketchbook imported is at 100% scale, so what you
Import an image from your computer
blocks into one block. Note that the see in your EQ quilt or block is what
into EQ8. Place as a background image
background block must meet specific you’d see in your sewn quilt or block.
that can be used as a guide for tracing
requirements. See the EQ8 Online
a new block. (You must go back to the
Support site. Rotate
DRAW tab to trace the block once the
image is set.) Options to rotate, shear or straighten
Clip & Flip an image. The Straighten feature
Flips and rotates the upper-left is very helpful for imported fabric
Position & Resize
quadrant of the selected Sketchbook images.
Use these options to position the
block.
image in the block.
Crop
Shrink & Flip Removes unwanted edges of the
Crop
Shrinks the selected Sketchbook block, image.
Crop out unwanted edges of the
then flips and rotates it into 4 different
image.
quadrants to create a new block. Delete Image
Delete Image Deletes the current image on the
Kaleidoscope worktable.
Delete the current image on the
Turns the selected Sketchbook block
worktable.
into a kaleidoscope by cutting it 8 Open Library
ways. Opens the Photo Library window.
Fancy Star
Turns the selected Sketchbook block
into a star with 5 to 8 points.
Open Library
Opens the Block Library window.
254
Tool Reference
IMAGE WORKTABLE
Histogram Options
This toolbox is found on the Image
Worktable. Click the IMAGE tab
Special Effects Options
on the top ribbon, then choose This toolbox is found on the Image
Color Options Histogram. Worktable. Click the IMAGE tab on
This toolbox is found on the Image the top ribbon, then choose Special
Worktable. Click the IMAGE tab on Adjust Effects.
the top ribbon, then choose Color. Changes the brightness and contrast of
the image. Effects
Color Balance This option has over 45 different
Automatically adjusts color levels in Equalize effects that can be applied to images,
the image. Increases the contrast in an image. including Artistic, Noise, Blur and many
more.
Red/Green/Blue Bright/Contrast
Changes the amount of red, green and Applies overall and equal adjustments Filters
blue in the image. to all the pixels in an image. This option has 9 different filters that
can be applied to images, including
Hue/Sat/Light Sharp/Unsharp, and Edge Detection.
Changes all three dimensions (hue,
saturation and lightness) of the image’s Circular Symm
color values. Takes a pie-shaped petal of an image
and turns it into a circular design
Colorize similar to the patterns seen in
Changes the overall color and intensity kaleidoscopes.
of the image.
Square Symm
Color Accent Uses a square portion of the photo
Selects a hue or range of hues to to create symmetries within a new
emphasize or isolate while minimizing 4-quadrant image.
the hues in the rest of the image.
Hue Map
Adjusts specific hues in your image.
Channel Mixer
Applies creative color adjustments to
an image.
Create Colorway
Creates various colorations of the
same image.
255
IMAGE WORKTABLE
Print Export
This toolbox is found on the Image This toolbox is found on the Image
Worktable. Click the PRINT & EXPORT Worktable. Click the PRINT & EXPORT Worktable Tools
tab on the top ribbon, then choose tab on the top ribbon, then choose
This toolbox is always found in the
Print. Export.
palette on the Image Worktable.
Photo Layout Image
View Actual Size
Interactive layout for placing Exports the image as a *.JPG, *.TIF,
Displays the image at its actual size.
Sketchbook photos on the page in the *.GIF, *.PNG or *.BMP file.
The image may be smaller or larger
best sizes and positions for printing.
Selection than your screen can display.
This helps utilize the space better,
especially if printing onto inkjet fabric. Exports an image as a *.BMP file of
Fit in Window
the selected area. Drag a box around
Zooms the image larger or smaller to
Print Setup a portion of your image to export only
fit the entire size of the window.
Opens the Print Setup dialog to adjust that selected portion.
your print settings. Pan
Grabs to move the image around on
the screen.
Add as Fabric
Adds the current image as a fabric in
your Sketchbook. This works best for
fabric photos that you have imported
and plan to use in your quilt design.
After using this tool, you will find your
image in the fabric palette on the Quilt
and Block Worktables.
256

Eq8 Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eq8 Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eq8 Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EQ8

The Electric Quilt® Company

COPYRIGHT: The Software is copyrighted 1991-2017 by The Electric Quilt Company.

NOTICE OF RIGHTS: All rights reserved.

Software Programmer: Dean Neumann

The reference manual is copyrighted 1991-2017 by The Electric Quilt Company.

Tip of the Day

WORK WITH FABRICS

• Customize borders (choose from 22 styles!)

• Add blocks, fabrics, and threads

• Draw applique blocks

• Draw combination blocks

• Create blocks without drawing

• Import photo or scans of your fabric stash, then

Project Name Worktable Tabs

Fabric Preview Palette Scrollbar

Precision Bar - Block Worktable only

Layer Tabs Status Bar

2. Under Workspace, click Measurement.

3. Click on the measurement you’d like to

1. Click File on the main menu bar, then

5. EQ8 will need to close to update

6. Open the program again and the

CREATING YOUR OWN DEFAULT PROJECT

Delete the Default Content

2. Click View Project Sketchbook.

4. Click the 3-dot Options button in the

5. Choose Clear all unused blocks.

6. Click Yes to the prompt. The Blocks

7. Repeat steps 4-6 for the Motifs and

8. Close the Sketchbook.

9. (Optional) Open the libraries and add

10. When you have your project just as

View Home Screen

Online Support Articles

Quick Start Guide

• Find answers on our Support Site at any time: Support.ElectricQuilt.com

• Contact by email: techsupport@electricquilt.com

• Contact by phone: 1-419-352-1134

DOWNLOADING AND INSTALLING

On how many computers can I have EQ8 installed at a time?

UNDERSTANDING THE PROJECT SKETCHBOOK

Resizing the Project

• Sort – sort the respective items in the

• Frame Color – change the color of the

• Display – change the size of the items

Each section offers different options. Click on

CREATING A NEW PROJECT

1. With EQ8 open, you can click the New

3. Click OK. You will now see the project

If you create a new project called “Log Cabin,” you

To save your new project, see page 16.

To open your new project after closing it, see

After clicking OK in step 3, a file is created in your My EQ8 >

1. If you have named your project (i.e. it

5. Continue to click Add to Project

To delete your project, see page 20.

If you have already added something to the Project

If you did not create a new project or create one